advertisement
Reference Manual
How to Use This
Reference Manual
The 01V96i Reference Manual (this document) allows you to search for terms and take advantage of links in the text.
Searching for terms
To search for a term, use the search function of the software you’re using to view this document.
If you’re using Adobe Reader, enter the term in the search box and press the <Enter> key of your computer keyboard to search for occurrences of that term.
Note: The latest version of Adobe Reader can be downloaded from the following URL.
http://www.adobe.com/products/reader.html
Displaying the next/previous view
If you’re using Adobe Reader, you can jump to the previous/ next view in your viewing history. This is a convenient way to jump back to the previous page after you’ve used a link to jump to a different page.
Note:
• If the Previous View / Next View buttons are not shown in the toolbar, you can hold down your computer keyboard’s <Alt> key and use the <←><→> keys to jump to the previous or next view.
• For details on using other PDF-viewing software, refer to the owner’s manual of the software you’re using.
Using the Function Tree
A function tree for the 01V96i is provided on page 4 and fol-
lowing. You can use this to quickly find the explanatory page you want.
2
Contents
Contents
How to Use This Reference Manual ............................................... 1
Contents of the Owner’s Manual (Booklet) .......... 3
Function Tree .......................................................... 4
Control Surface & Rear Panel ................................. 6
Control Surface .................................................................................. 6
Analog I/O & Digital I/O ...................................... 12
Analog Inputs & Outputs ............................................................... 12
Digital Inputs & Outputs ................................................................ 13
Converting Sampling Rates of Signals Received at I/O Card
Inputs ................................................................................. 14
Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status .................................... 14
Dithering Digital Outputs .............................................................. 15
Setting the Transfer Format for Higher Sampling Rates ........... 16
Input Channels ...................................................... 17
About Input Channels .................................................................... 17
Setting the Input Channels from the Display .............................. 18
Setting the Input Channels from the Control Surface ............... 25
Pairing Input Channels ................................................................... 26
Naming Input Channels ................................................................. 28
Bus Outs ................................................................ 29
About Stereo Out ............................................................................. 29
Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Display ........ 30
Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Control
Surface ............................................................................... 33
Pairing Buses or Aux Sends ........................................................... 33
Attenuating Output Signals ........................................................... 34
Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs .......................................... 35
Aux Outs ................................................................ 36
Aux Out 1–8 ..................................................................................... 36
Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Display ......................................... 36
Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Control Surface ........................... 38
Setting Aux Send Levels .................................................................. 38
Viewing Aux Send Settings for Multiple Channels .................... 40
Panning Aux Sends ......................................................................... 41
Copying Channel Fader Positions to Aux Sends ........................ 42
Input & Output Patching ..................................... 43
Input Patching ................................................................................. 43
Output Patching .............................................................................. 44
Patching Direct Outs ....................................................................... 46
Insert Patching ................................................................................. 47
Monitoring ............................................................ 49
Monitor and Solo Setup .................................................................. 49
Using the Monitor ........................................................................... 50
Using the Solo Function ................................................................. 51
Surround Pan ........................................................ 52
About Surround Pan ....................................................................... 52
Setting Up and Selecting Surround Pan Modes .......................... 53
Surround Panning ........................................................................... 56
Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters .......... 59
Grouping & Linking ........................................................................ 59
Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups ........................................ 59
Using Fader Group Master ............................................................ 61
Using Mute Group Master ............................................................. 62
Linking EQ and Compressor Parameters .................................... 62
Internal Effects ..................................................... 64
About the Internal Effects .............................................................. 64
Using Effects Processors via Aux Sends ....................................... 64
Inserting the Internal Effects into Channels ................................ 65
About Add-On Effects .................................................................... 67
About Plug-Ins ................................................................................. 67
Scene Memories ................................................... 68
About Scene Memories ................................................................... 68
What is Stored in a Scene? .............................................................. 68
About Scene Numbers .................................................................... 68
Storing and Recalling Scenes .......................................................... 69
Auto Scene Memory Update .......................................................... 70
Fading Scenes ................................................................................... 71
Recalling Scenes Safely .................................................................... 72
Copying and Pasting a Scene (Global Paste) ............................... 73
Libraries ................................................................ 74
About the Libraries .......................................................................... 74
General Library Operation ............................................................. 74
Using Libraries ................................................................................. 75
Remote Control .................................................... 83
About Remote Function ................................................................. 83
Pro Tools Remote Layer ................................................................. 83
Nuendo/Cubase Remote Layer ...................................................... 93
Other DAW Remote Layer ............................................................. 94
MIDI Remote Layer ......................................................................... 94
Machine Control Function ............................................................. 98
MIDI .................................................................... 100
MIDI & the 01V96i ........................................................................ 100
MIDI Port Setup ............................................................................ 101
Assigning Scenes to Program Changes for Remote Recall ...... 103
Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real-time Control .. 104
Controlling Parameters by Using Parameter Changes ............. 106
Transmitting Parameter Settings via MIDI (Bulk Dump) ....... 107
Other Functions ................................................. 109
Setting Preferences ......................................................................... 109
Creating a Custom Layer by Combining Channels
(User Assignable Layer) ................................................. 110
Cascading Consoles ....................................................................... 111
Checking the Battery and the System Version .......................... 113
Calibrating the Faders ................................................................... 113
Index ................................................................... 115
Appendix: Parameter Lists .............................. 119
USER DEFINED KEYS ................................................................. 119
USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments ............................. 121
Input Patch Parameters ................................................................ 121
Initial Input Patch Settings ........................................................... 123
Output Patch Parameters ............................................................. 125
Initial Output Patch Settings ........................................................ 127
User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings ..................... 128
Effects Parameters ......................................................................... 132
Effects and tempo synchronization ............................................. 146
Preset EQ Parameters .................................................................... 147
Preset Gate Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) ...................................... 148
Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) ......................... 149
Dynamics Parameters ................................................................... 151
Appendix: MIDI ............................................... 156
Scene Memory to Program Change Table ................................. 156
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table ............................... 157
MIDI Data Format ......................................................................... 173
MIDI Implementation Chart ........... End of Manual
01V96i—Reference Manual
Contents of the
Owner’s Manual
(Booklet)
The contents of the separate Owner’s Manual booklet are as follows.
PRECAUTIONS
Welcome
Package Contents
About the included discs
About the included DAW software
About the utility software
Firmware updates
About this Owner’s Manual
Conventions Used in this Manual
Control Surface & Rear Panel
Control Surface
Rear Panel
Installing an Optional Card
Operating Basics
About the Display
Selecting Display Pages
Display Interface
Selecting Layers
Selecting Channels
Selecting Fader Modes
Metering
Connections and Setup
Connections
Wordclock Connections and Settings
Input and Output Patching
Tutorial
Input and Output Patching
Setting the Input Levels
Pairing Channels
Setting the Routing
EQ’ing the Input Signals
Using the EQ Library
Compressing the Input Signals
Using the Internal Effects
Recording to DAW Software via the USB Port
Adjusting the Monitor Levels from the DAW
Using Scene Memories
Changing the Channel Names
Creating a Custom Layer by Combining Channels
(User Assignable Layer)
Using the Oscillator
Using the User Defined Keys
Using Operation Lock
Initializing
Contents of the Owner’s Manual (Booklet)
Troubleshooting
Error messages
Contents of the Reference Manual
Specifications
General Spec
Libraries
Analog Input Spec
Analog Output Specs
Digital Input Spec
Digital Output Spec
I/O SLOT Spec
MIDI/USB/WORD CLOCK I/O Spec
Dimensions
Options
Rack Mounting the 01V96i Using RK1 Rack Mount Kit
Index
01V96i Block Diagram
01V96i Level Diagram
3
01V96i—Reference Manual
4
Function Tree
Function Tree
DISPLAY ACCESS
Page numbers in parentheses ( ) are the page numbers of the
Owner’s Manual (booklet).
SCENE
DIO/SETUP
MIDI
UTILITY
BUTTON
/INSERT/
DELAY
PAN/
ROUTING
FUNCTION PAGE NAME LINK
BATTERY
USER DEF
LOCK
PHASE
INSERT
DLY 1-16
DLY17-32
OUT DLY
PAN
ROUT1-16
SCENE
IN FADE
OUT FADE
RCL SAFE
SCENE MEMORY
INPUT FADE TIME
OUTPUT FADE TIME
RECALL SAFE
SORT
PASTE SRC
SORT
GLOBAL PASTE SOURCE CH
SELECT
PASTE DST
GLOBAL PASTE
DESTINATION SCENE
WORD CLOCK WORD CLOCK SELECT
FORMAT
PREFER1
PREFER2
MIDI/HOST
MONITOR
REMOTE
MACHINE
SURR BUS
CASCADE
OUTPUT ATT
SETUP
PGM ASGN
CTL ASGN
BULK
OSCILLATOR
CH STATUS
ROUT17-STI
BUS TO ST
SURR MODE
CH EDIT
SURR1-16
SURR17-32
SURR ST IN
HIGHER SAMPLE RATE
DATA TRANSFER FORMAT
PREFERENCES 1
PREFERENCES 2
MIDI/TO HOST SETUP
MONITOR
REMOTE
MACHINE CONTROL
SURROUND BAS SETUP
CASCADE IN
ATTENUATION
OUTPUT PORT
ATTENUATOR
MIDI SETUP
PROGRAM CHANGE
ASSIGN TABLE
CONTROL CHANGE
ASSIGN TABLE
BULK DUMP
OSCILLATOR
CHANNEL STATUS
MONITOR
(45)
BATTERY CHECK
USER DEFINED KEY ASSIGN
OPERATION LOCK
PHASE
(47)
INSERT
INPUT CH1-16 DELAY
INPUT CH17-32 DELAY
OUTPUT DELAY
PAN
INPUT CH1-16 ROUTING
INPUT CH17-32
ROUTING/ST IN
BUS TO STEREO
SURROUND MODE
SELECTED CHANNEL
SURROUND EDIT
INPUT CH1-16 SURROUND
INPUT CH17-32
SURROUND
STEREO INPUT SURROUND
BUTTON
PAIR/
GROUP
FUNCTION
INPUT
OUTPUT
IN FADER
IN MUTE
OUT FADER
OUT MUTE
IN EQ
OUT EQ
IN COMP
OUT COMP
IN MASTER
OUT MASTER
IN PATCH
INPUT INS
EFFECT
PATCH
DYNAMICS
EQ
EFFECT
EQ EDIT
EQ LIBRARY
IN ATT
OUT ATT
FX1 EDIT
FX2 EDIT
FX3 EDIT
FX4 EDIT
FX1 LIB
FX2 LIB
FX3 LIB
FX4 LIB
CASCADE IN
IN NAME
IN LIB
OUT PATCH
USB OUT
OUTPUT INS
DIRECT OUT
2TR OUT
OUT NAME
OUT LIB
GATE EDIT
GATE LIB
COMP EDIT
COMP LIB
P-IN EDIT
VIEW
PARAMETER
FADER
LIBRARY
1-16 AUX
17-STI AUX
PAGE NAME
INPUT PAIR
LINK
OUTPUT PAIR
INPUT FADER GROUP
INPUT MUTE GROUP
OUTPUT FADER GROUP
OUTPUT MUTE GROUP
INPUT EQUALIZER LINK
OUTPUT EQUALIZER LINK
INPUT COMP LINK
OUTPUT COMP LINK
INPUT FADER GROUP
MASTER
OUTPUT FADER GROUP
MASTER
INPUT PATCH
INPUT INSERT IN PATCH
EFFECT INPUT/OUTPUT
PATCH
CASCADE IN PATCH
INPUT CHANNEL NAME
INPUT PATCH LIBRARY
SLOT OUTPUT PATCH
USB OUT PATCH
OUTPUT INSERT IN PATCH
DIRECT OUT DESTINATION
2TR OUT DIGITAL PATCH
OUTPUT CHANNEL NAME
OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY
GATE EDIT
GATE LIBRARY
COMP EDIT
COMP LIBRARY
EQUALIZER EDIT
EQUALIZER LIBRARY
INPUT ATTENUATOR
OUTPUT ATTENUATOR
FX1 EDIT
FX2 EDIT
FX3 EDIT
FX4 EDIT
FX1 LIBRARY
FX2 LIBRARY
FX3 LIBRARY
FX4 LIBRARY
PLUG-IN EFFECT CARD
EDIT
PARAMETER VIEW
FADER VIEW
CHANNEL LIBRARY
INPUT CH1-16 AUX VIEW
INPUT CH17-ST IN AUX
VIEW
01V96i—Reference Manual
FADER MODE
BUTTON
AUX1–
AUX8
HOME
(METER)
FUNCTION
SEND
PAN
VIEW1-16
VIEW17-STI
CH1-32
ST IN
MASTER
EFFECT
STEREO
POSITION
PAGE NAME
AUX1–AUX8 SEND
AUX1–AUX8 PAN
INPUT CH1-16 AUX VIEW
INPUT CH17-ST IN AUX
VIEW
CH1-32 METER
ST IN METER
MASTER METER
EFFECT1-4 INPUT/OUTPUT
METER
STEREO METER
METER POSITION
LINK
LAYER
BUTTON
1-16
17-32
MASTER
REMOTE
FUNCTION
USER DEFINED
ProTools
Nuendo
Cubase
General DAW
USER
ASSIGNABLE
LAYER
PAGE NAME LINK
Function Tree
5
01V96i—Reference Manual
6
Control Surface & Rear Panel
Control Surface & Rear Panel
Control Surface
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CH1-4
13 15
CH5-8 CH9-12
PHANTOM +48V
L
A
B
INPUT
(BAL)
INSERT
OUT IN
(UNBAL)
INSERT I/O
A
B
INSERT I/O
A
B
INSERT I/O
A
B
INSERT I/O
A
B
INSERT I/O
A
B
INSERT I/O
A
B
INSERT I/O
A
B
INSERT I/O
A
B
INSERT I/O
A
B
INSERT I/O
A
B
INSERT I/O
A
B
INSERT I/O
PAD
20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
14 16
CH15/16
2TR IN
IN OUT
2TR
-10dBV (UNBAL)
MONITOR
2TR IN
20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB
+4
GAIN
-26
+4
GAIN
-26 0
LEVEL
10
MONITOR
OUT
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
+4
GAIN
-26
+4
GAIN
-26
13
PEAK
SIGNAL
14 15
PEAK
SIGNAL
16
R
PHONES
0
LEVEL
10
PHONES
DISPLAY ACCESS SCENE MEMORY
SCENE DIO/SETUP MIDI UTILITY
STORE RECALL
SOLO CLEAR
/ INSERT/
DELAY
PATCH
DYNAMICS EQ EFFECT
FADER MODE
VIEW
AUX
2
AUX
4
OVER
0
-3
-6
-9
-12
-15
-18
-24
-30
-36
-48
STEREO
DEC INC
AUX 5
HOME (METER)
LAYER
AUX 8
1-16 17-32 MASTER REMOTE
Q
HIGH
HIGH-MID
FREQUENCY
LOW-MID
GAIN
LOW
ENTER
ST IN
SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL
SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO
ON
1
ON
2
ON
3
ON
4
ON
5
ON
6
ON
7
ON
8
ON
9
ON
10
ON
11
ON
12
ON
13
ON
14
ON
15
ON
16
SOLO SOLO
ON ON
ST IN 1
ON
ST IN 2
15
20
30
40
50
+10
5
0
5
10
30
15
40
20
50
30
60
70
40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
30
15
40
20
50
30
60
70
40
50
30
15
40
20
50
30
60
70
40
50
30
40
50
60
70
15
20
30
40
50
30
40
50
15
20
30
60
70
40
50
30
40
50
60
70
15
20
30
40
50
30
15
40
20
50
30
60
70
40
50
30
15
40
20
50
30
60
70
40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
30
15
40
20
50
30
60
70
40
50
30
15
40
20
50
30
60
70
40
50
30
15
40
20
50
30
60
70
40
50
30
15
40
20
50
30
60
70
40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
30
15
40
20
50
30
60
70
40
50
30
15
40
20
50
30
60
70
40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0 0
5 5
10 10
15 15
20 20
30
15
40
20
50
30
60
70
40
50
30
40
50
60
70
30
40
50
60
70
1
17
AUX 1
2
18
3
19
4
20
AUX 4
5
21
AUX 5
6
22
AUX 6
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
BUS 2
11
27
BUS 3
12
28
BUS 4
13
29
BUS 5
14
30
BUS 6
15
31
16
32
STEREO
USER DEFINED
KEYS
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
Note: For details on the function of each item, refer to “Control Surface & Rear Panel” in the Owner’s Manual.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Control Surface
7
AD Input Section
1
3
4
5
6
7
1 2 3 4 5
A
B
INPUT
(BAL)
INSERT
OUT IN
(UNBAL)
INSERT I/O
A
B
INSERT I/O
A
B
INSERT I/O
A
B
INSERT I/O
A
B
INSERT I/O
PAD
20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
1
INPUT connectors A/B
2
INPUT connectors 13–16
3
INSERT I/O connectors
4
PAD switches
5
GAIN controls
6
PEAK indicators
7
SIGNAL indicators
8
AD15/16 selector
A
B
9
A
B
10
A
B
11
A
B
12
CH1-4
13 15
14 16
INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O
20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB
CH15/16
2TR IN
+4
GAIN
-26 +4
GAIN
-26
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
+4
GAIN
-26 +4
GAIN
-26
13
PEAK
SIGNAL
14 15
PEAK
SIGNAL
16
2
8
Monitor Out & Headphones
Section
1
2
3
CH5-8 CH9-12
PHANTOM +48V
L
IN OUT
2TR
-10dBV (UNBAL)
R
PHONES
MONITOR
2TR IN
0
LEVEL
10
MONITOR
OUT
0
LEVEL
10
PHONES
5
4
1
2TR IN/OUT connectors
2
Monitor Source selector
3
MONITOR LEVEL control
4
PHONES LEVEL control
5
PHONES jack
Channel Strip Section
1
[SEL] buttons
2
[SOLO] buttons
3
[ON] buttons
4
Channel faders
1
2
3
4
10
15
20
30
40
50
+10
5
0
5
30
40
50
60
70
0
15
20
5
10
1
17
AUX 1
SEL
SOLO
ON
1
01V96i—Reference Manual
8
Control Surface & Rear Panel
STEREO Section
1
[SEL] button
2
[ON] button
3
[STEREO] fader
1
SEL
2
ON
ST IN Section
1
[ST IN] button
2
[SEL] buttons
3
[SOLO] buttons
4
[ON] buttons
5
Level controls
1
2
3
4
ST IN
SEL SEL
SOLO SOLO
ON
ST IN 1
ON
ST IN 2
5
3
0
5
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
STEREO
DISPLAY ACCESS Section
1 2 3 4
DISPLAY ACCESS
6
5
/ INSERT/
DELAY
PAN/
ROUTING
PAIR/
GROUP
PATCH
DYNAMICS EQ EFFECT VIEW
9 0 A B
7
8
1
[SCENE] button
2
[DIO/SETUP] button
3
[MIDI] button
4
[UTILITY] button
5
[ /INSERT/DELAY] button
6
[PAN/ROUTING] button
7
[PAIR/GROUP] button
8
[PATCH] button
9
[DYNAMICS] button
0
[EQ] button
A
[EFFECT] button
B
[VIEW] button
LAYER Section
1
[1–16]/[17–32] buttons
2
[MASTER] button
3
[REMOTE] button
LAYER
1-16 17-32 MASTER REMOTE
1 2 3
Tip: The ST IN section is not affected by the layer settings.
FADER MODE Section
1
[AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons
2
[HOME] button
FADER MODE
1
AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AUX 8
2
HOME (METER)
01V96i—Reference Manual
Display Section
1
5 4
1
Display
2
Stereo meters
3
Contrast control
4
[F1]–[F4] buttons
5
Left Tab Scroll [ ] button
6
Right Tab Scroll [ ] button
6
OVER
0
-3
-6
-9
-12
-15
-18
-24
-30
-36
-48
STEREO
2
3
Control Surface
9
SCENE MEMORY Section
SCENE MEMORY
STORE
1 2
RECALL
3
1
[STORE] button
2
Scene Up [ ] / Down [ ] buttons
3
[RECALL] button
USER DEFINED KEYS
Section
1
[1]–[8] buttons
1
USER DEFINED
KEYS
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
Tab Scroll arrow
Data Entry Section
3 1
SELECTED CHANNEL Section
1
[PAN] control
2
[HIGH] button
3
[HIGH-MID] button
4
[LOW-MID] button
5
[LOW] button
6
[Q] control
7
[FREQUENCY] control
8
[GAIN] control
1
6
7
8
Q
FREQUENCY
GAIN
HIGH
HIGH-MID
LOW-MID
LOW
2
3
4
5
4
DEC
2
ENTER
INC
1
Parameter wheel
2
[ENTER] button
3
[DEC] & [INC] buttons
4
Left, Right, Up, Down ([ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]) cursor buttons
SOLO Section
1
[SOLO] indicator
2
[CLEAR] button
SOLO CLEAR
1 2
01V96i—Reference Manual
10
Control Surface & Rear Panel
Rear Panel
PHANTOM +48V (p. 10) AD Output Section
PHANTOM +48V
3 2
1
CH1–4 ON/OFF switch
2
CH5–8 ON/OFF switch
3
CH9–12 ON/OFF switch
1
AD Output Section
1 2
1
MONITOR OUT connectors L/R
2
OMNI OUT connectors 1–4
3
STEREO OUT connectors L/R
3
Digital I/O Section
1 2 3
1
WORD CLOCK OUT connector
2
WORD CLOCK IN connector
3
ADAT IN/OUT connectors
4
2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL
5
2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL
4 5
MIDI/USB Section
1
1
MIDI IN/THRU/OUT ports
2
TO HOST USB port
2
01V96i—Reference Manual
SLOT Section
1
SLOT
1
Power Section
1
POWER ON/OFF switch
2
AC IN connector
1 2
Rear Panel
11
01V96i—Reference Manual
12
Analog I/O & Digital I/O
Analog I/O &
Digital I/O
This chapter describes the 01V96i’s analog and digital input/output connectors as well as the basic operations involving the digital I/Os.
Analog Inputs & Outputs
Input Section
The 01V96i’s top panel features input connectors, which enable you to connect microphone and line-level sources.
• INPUT connectors A 1–12
1 2
These balanced TRS-type phone connectors accept line-level and microphone sig-
A A nals. The nominal input range is
–60 dB through +4 dB. The phantom [+48V] switches on the rear panel turn on or off the +48V phantom power feed to these inputs.
• INPUT connectors B 1–12
These balanced TRS-type connectors accept line-level and
B
INPUT
(BAL)
B microphone signals. The nominal input range is –60 dB through +4 dB.
You cannot use same-numbered INPUT A and INPUT B connectors simultaneously. (For example, you cannot use
INPUT A-2 and INPUT B-2 at the same time.) If you connect cables to A and B connectors of the same number, only the signal from INPUT B is effective (e.g., B-2 takes priority over A-2).
• INPUT connectors 13–16
13 15
These balanced TRS-type phone connectors accept line-level signals. When the AD 15/16 source selector is turned on (pushed in), signals from INPUT 15
14 16 and 16 are ignored. Instead, signals from the 2TR IN connector will be routed to AD Input Channels 15 and 16.
Tip: You can patch signals input from the INPUT connectors
to any Input Channels. (See page 43 for information on
patching input signals to Input Channels.)
• INSERT I/O connectors
INSERT
OUT IN
(UNBAL) These TRS-type phone connectors are used to insert external devices, INSERT I/O INSERT I/O such as effects processors, into AD Input Channels.
• Phantom Power
Inputs 1 through
12 feature switchable +48V phantom powering for use with condenser-type microphones and direct boxes. The phantom
[+48V] switches on the rear panel turn on or off the +48V phantom power feed to the corresponding inputs.
• PAD switches
PAD
Inputs 1 through 12 feature pad switches, which attenuate input signals by 20 dB. These switches are effective on both INPUT A and B signals.
20dB
20dB
• GAIN controls
Inputs 1 through 16 feature rotary gain controls that adjust input sensitivity. Input sensitivity for INPUT connectors 1–12
-16
GAIN
-60 ranges from –16 dB to –60 dB when the Pad is off, and from +4 dB to –40 dB when the Pad is on. Input sensitivity for INPUT connectors 13–16 ranges from +4 dB to
–26 dB.
GAIN
• PEAK & SIGNAL Indicators
The SIGNAL indicator lights up when the input signal level at
PEAK
SIGNAL
INPUTs 1–16 exceeds –34 dB.
The PEAK indicator lights up when the input signal level is 3 dB below clipping.
• 2TR IN connectors
These unbalanced RCA phono connectors accept line-level signals from devices such as CD players.
When the AD 15/16 source selector is turned on (pushed in), signals input at
IN OUT
2TR
-10dBV (UNBAL) these conductors are routed to AD
Inputs 15 and 16. When the Monitor source selector is turned on (pushed in), you can monitor these signals from the MONITOR OUT connectors.
L
R
01V96i—Reference Manual
Digital Inputs & Outputs
13
Output Section
The 01V96i top and rear panels feature output connectors that enable you to connect a monitoring system, effects processors and other line-level devices.
• MONITOR OUT connectors L/R
These balanced TRS-type phone connectors output monitoring signals or input signals routed from the 2TR IN connectors. The nominal output level is +4 dB.
Use the Monitor source selector in the Monitor Out &
Headphones section to select the signal output from these connectors.
• OMNI OUT connectors 1–4
These balanced
TRS-type phone connectors output any Bus
Outs or Input Channel
Direct Outs. The nominal output level is +4 dB.
Tip: Any signal path can be patched to the OMNI OUT con-
nectors. (See page 44 for more information on patching sig-
nals to the OMNI OUT connectors.)
• STEREO OUT connectors L/R
These balanced XLR-3-32-type connectors output the Stereo Out signals. The nominal output level is +4 dB.
• 2TR OUT connectors
These unbalanced RCA phono connectors output line-level signals to a connected recorder or other external device. These connectors always output the Stereo Out signals.
L
IN OUT
2TR
-10dBV (UNBAL)
R
Digital Inputs & Outputs
The 01V96i rear panel features digital input and output connectors that enable you to connect external digital devices.
Any signal path can be patched to these digital inputs and outputs.
You can also add analog and digital I/Os by installing an optional I/O card in the slot.
Digital I/O Connectors
• 2TR IN DIGITAL connector
2TR IN DIGITAL is an RCA phono connector and accepts consumer format (IEC 60958) digital audio. You can patch digital signals input at this connector to any Input Channel
• 2TR OUT DIGITAL connector
This RCA phono connector outputs consumer format (IEC 60958) digital audio. You can patch any Bus outs or Input channel
Direct Outs to this output (page 45).
• ADAT IN connector
This TOSLINK connector accepts 8-channel ADAT optical format signals, which can be patched to any Input
• ADAT OUT connector
This TOSLINK connector outputs an 8-channel ADAT optical format signal. You can patch any Bus Outs or
Input Channel Direct outs to this output (page 44).
SLOT
This slot allows you to install an optional mini-YGDAI
(Yamaha General Digital Audio Interface) I/O card. This card offers AD/DA conversion, and various analog I/O options and digital I/O interfaces in all the popular digital audio interconnect formats, including AES/EBU, ADAT, and Tascam.
You can patch signals input at these card connectors to any
Input Channels or Insert Ins (see page 43).
You can patch the card outputs to Bus Outs or Input Channel
For details on the mini-YGDAI I/O cards that are currently usable, refer to “I/O Slot Specifications” in the Owner’s Manual.
For the latest information about mini-YGDAI I/O cards, refer to the Yamaha Professional Audio website.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
01V96i—Reference Manual
14
Analog I/O & Digital I/O
Converting Sampling
Rates of Signals Received at I/O Card Inputs
An optional MY8-AE96S Digital I/O card features sampling rate converters, so you can easily convert the sampling frequency of digital inputs to the current 01V96i sampling rate.
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup | Format page appears.
Use the buttons in the SRC sections to turn the sampling rate converters on and off. You can turn the sampling rate converters of the digital I/O card on or off in pairs (odd & even channels, in this order).
Monitoring Digital Input
Channel Status
You can view and monitor the Channel Status (sampling rate, emphasis, etc.) of digital audio signals connected to the 2TR
Digital Inputs and Slot Inputs as follows.
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [UTILITY] button, then press the [F2] button.
The Utility | CH Status page appears.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Tip: The FS box on the Word Clock page displays the sampling frequency at which the 01V96i is currently operating.
Note: The sampling rate converter is available only on the
Yamaha MY8-AE96S Digital I/O card. If you have installed another type of I/O card in the slot, or if no card is installed in the 01V96i, the buttons in the SRC sections are disabled.
2.
Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to any two-channel button in the SRC sections, then press [ENTER].
The sampling rate converter for the selected 2-channel input turns on or off. When on, the sampling rate of the received digital audio is converted to the 01V96i’s current sampling rate.
On this page, use the following buttons to select a slot or connector for which you want to view the channel status.
1
2TR IN
This button enables you to view the Channel Status of input signals connected to the 2TR Digital Inputs.
2
SLOT
These buttons enable you to view the Channel Status of each two adjacent (odd and even, in this order) channel signals connected to the digital I/O card installed in the slot.
2.
Move the cursor to the desired input or slot button, then press [ENTER].
Channel Status information for the selected input is displayed. However, if a mini-YGDAI I/O card other than
AES/EBU format is installed, Channel Status information will be grayed out. Channel Status information includes the following items:
3
FS
Indicates the sampling rate. If no signal is being input, or if the incoming wordclock is not synching to the internal clock, “Unlock” appears.
4
EMPHASIS
Indicates the Emphasis on/off status.
5
CATEGORY
Indicates the status of “Category Code Bit” included in the IEC958 Part 2 (S/PDIF-Consumer) format. This parameter can display the following values:
01V96i—Reference Manual
Dithering Digital Outputs
15
Parameter value
General
Laser Optical
D/D Conv
Magnetic
D.Broadcast
Instruments
A/D Conv
A/D Conv with (C)
Solid Memory
Experimental
Unknown
Description
Temporarily used
Laser optical device
Digital - Digital converter and signal processing device
Magnetic tape device and magnetic disk device
Digital broadcast reception
Musical instrument, microphone, and sources that generate string signals
A/D converter (without copyright information)
A/D converter (with copyright information)
Solid memory device
Experimental device
Unknown
Note: “AES/EBU” appears in the Category row when you are monitoring IEC958 Part 3 (AES/EBU-Professional) format signals (that do not include Category Code Bit).
6
COPY
Indicates the status of copy protection information included in the IEC958 Part2 (S/PDIF-Consumer) format signals. “OK” appears if copying is allowed. “Prohibit” appears if copy-protected.
3.
If you select the SLOT button for a slot that has an MY16-AE card installed, use the 01–08 and 09–16 buttons located in the lower-right corner of the screen to select a channel group you wish to display.
Dithering Digital Outputs
When digital audio is transferred to lower-resolution systems, truncated bits may generate unpleasant noise. To cancel the audible effect of this noise, a small complement of noise is intentionally added to the digital outputs. This process is called “dithering.”
On the 01V96i, you can dither the 2TR Digital Outputs and
Slot Outputs. For example, you can apply dithering to the
01V96i stereo mix data and record to a 16-bit digital recorder.
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup | Format page appears.
The dithering settings are displayed at the bottom of the page.
2.
Move the cursor to the output or channel to which you want to apply dithering, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the
[INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the value that matches the resolution of the receiving device.
Note:
• You cannot apply dithering to outputs or channels that are set to “OFF.”
• Dithering is effective only when the resolution of the receiving device is lower than that of the 01V96i.
Tip: To copy the currently-selected setting to all channels, double-click the [ENTER] button. The copy confirmation window is displayed.
01V96i—Reference Manual
16
Analog I/O & Digital I/O
Setting the Transfer
Format for Higher
Sampling Rates
To operate the 01V96i at higher sampling frequencies
(88.2 kHz or 96 kHz) and transfer digital audio signals to and from connected external devices, you must set the data transfer format in accordance with the sampling frequencies supported by the external devices.
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup | Word
Clock page appears.
2.
Select INT88.2k or INT96k as the wordclock source.
Note: When the 01V96i operates at a high sampling rate
(88.2 kHz or 96 kHz), only two internal effects processors are available.
3.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup | Format page appears.
1
• DOUBLE SPEED
In Double Speed mode, digital audio data is received and transmitted at the current high sampling rate (i.e.,
88.2 kHz or 96 kHz). Select this mode if the devices that support the higher sampling rates transmit or receive data.
Note: You can select this setting only for slots in which a digital I/O card that inputs/outputs double-speed digital audio data (e.g., MY8-AE96, MY8-AE96S) is installed.
• SINGLE
In Single mode, digital audio data is received and transmitted at a sampling rate that is half (44.1/48 kHz) the current higher sampling rate of the 01V96i. For example, this is useful when you want to receive 44.1 kHz digital signals from an external digital device while the 01V96i is operating at 88.2 kHz.
Note: You cannot select this setting for slots in which a digital
I/O card that inputs/outputs double-speed digital audio data
(e.g., MY8-AE96, MY8-AE96S) is installed.
Tip: The parameter fields display “–” if the slot contains no
I/O card or if an AD/DA card or other I/O card that does not allow you to set the transfer format has been installed.
4.
Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to an IN/OUT parameter field ( 1 ), then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to set the data transfer format.
The IN/OUT parameters are used to set one of the following data transfer formats for each slot input and output.
• DOUBLE CHANNEL
In Double Channel mode, digital audio data is received and transmitted as mono signals at a sampling rate that is exactly half (44.1/48 kHz) the current higher sampling rate. Data is handled by two channels. This is useful when you want to transfer data between the 01V96i operating at a higher sampling rate and an external digital device that supports 44.1/48 kHz.
Note: Double Channel mode reduces the total number of inputs or outputs on the corresponding slot. The even-numbered channels are disabled.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Input Channels
17
Input Channels
This chapter describes how to adjust the 01V96i’s Input
Channel parameters.
About Input Channels
The input Channel section enables you to adjust the level and tone of the signals input to the 01V96i (and the signals output from the internal Effects processors 1–4), and route the signals to Buses 1–8, the Stereo Bus, and Aux Sends 1–8. There are two types of Input Channels, each featuring slightly different functions: monaural Input Channels 1–32 and stereo ST
IN Channels 1–4.
Input Channels
1–32
Each of these monaural Input Channels features a phase effect, gate, compressor, attenuator, and EQ for signal processing. The following diagram illustrates the Input Channel
1–32 signal flow.
• LEVEL
This section enables you to adjust the input level of the
Input Channel signal.
• PAN
This section enables you to adjust the pan setting of the signals routed from the Input Channels to the Stereo Bus.
You can also apply the pan setting to a pair of Bus channels.
• AUX (Aux Send level)
This section enables you to adjust the level of signals routed to Aux Sends 1–8. The signals can be routed to
Aux Sends from either the pre-fader or post-fader position.
• INSERT
This section enables you to patch input signals to external devices via the on-board I/O connectors or I/O card, or insert the internal effect processors. You can patch any inputs, outputs, or I/O card channels. (Note that this is different from the INSERT I/O connectors in the AD
Input section.)
• METER
This section enables you to switch the metering position of the signal levels that are displayed in the Meter page.
For more information on selecting the metering position, refer to “Viewing the Level Meters” in the Owner’s Manual (booklet).
ST IN Channels 1–4
These stereo channels enable you to process stereo signals using the phase effect, attenuator, and EQ. The following diagram illustrates the ST IN Channel 1–4 signal flow.
Input Channels 1–32 feature the following parameters:
• (Phase)
This section switches the phase of input signals.
• GATE
This dynamics processor can be used as a gate or for ducking.
• COMP (Compressor)
This dynamics processor can be used as compressor, expander or limiter. The compressor can be pre-EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader.
• ATT (Attenuator)
This section enables you to attenuate or amplify the level of signals that will be input to the EQ. The attenuator enables you to prevent post-EQ signals from clipping and to correct signal levels that are too low.
• 4 BAND EQ (4-band equalizer)
This parametric EQ features four bands (high, high-mid, low-mid, and low).
• INPUT DELAY (Input delay)
This section enables you to delay input signals. You can use this delay to fine-tune the timing between channels, or as a delay effect with feedback.
• ON (On/Off)
This section enables you to turn the channel on or off.
The channel is muted with the Off setting.
ST IN Channels 1–4 feature the following parameters:
• (Phase)
• ATT (Attenuator)
• 4 BAND EQ (4-band equalizer)
• ON (On/Off)
• LEVEL
• PAN
• AUX (Aux Send level)
• METER
For more information on each parameter, refer to the preceding section Input Channel 1–32.
Tip: You can store these channel parameter settings in the Channel library. You can also store the Gate, Compressor, and EQ parameter settings to the corresponding libraries.
01V96i—Reference Manual
18
Input Channels
Setting the Input
Channels from the
Display
To set the Input Channel parameters, you can either move the cursor to the desired parameter on the display and change the value, or operate the desired button or control on the top panel to directly change the setting.
This section explains how to set the parameters via the display.
Switching the Signal Phase
To switch the phase of each Input Channel, press the
[ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until the following
/INS/DLY | Phase page appears.
Move the cursor to the NOR/REV button of the channel for which you want to change the phase, then press the [ENTER] or [INC]/[DEC] buttons to change the setting.
Delaying Input Channels
To set the delay for each channel, press the
[ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until the page listed below that contains the desired channels appears.
• DLY 1-16 page
This page enables you to set the Delay function for Input
Channels 1–16.
• DLY 17-32 page
This page enables you to set the Delay function for Input
Channels 17–32.
The parameters on these two pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same.
3 1 2
1 2
1
NOR/REV
These buttons switch the corresponding Input Channel phase. NOR buttons indicate normal phase, and REV buttons indicate reversed phase.
2
GLOBAL
The GLOBAL NOR/REV buttons allow you to set the phase for all Input Channels simultaneously.
Tip:
• The name of the currently-selected channel is indicated in the upper-right corner of the screen.
• You can set the phase separately for each of the ST IN Channels or for each channel in a channel pair. If you selected the desired
ST IN Channel using the corresponding [SEL] button, pressing the same [SEL] button repeatedly will toggle between channels
L and R.
1
DELAY SCALE
The following buttons determine the units of the delay value shown below the msec value.
• meter ........................Units are set to meters.
• feet ............................Units are set to feet.
• sample......................Units are set to samples.
• beat ...........................Units are set to beats.
• frame........................Units are set to timecode frames.
2
GANG button
When this button is turned on (highlighted), the delay time for each channel in a channel pair can be set simultaneously. When this option is turned off, the delay time can be set for each channel in a channel pair individually.
3
Channel section
You can set individual delay parameters here. The delay parameters include the following items:
• ON/OFF
This button switches the corresponding channel delay on or off.
• msec
This parameter sets the delay time in milliseconds.
• meter/feet/sample/beat/frame
The delay time can be set using units of meters, feet, samples, beats, or frames, which you select by using the
DELAY SCALE buttons.
01V96i—Reference Manual
• MIX
This parameter sets the mix balance of dry (Input Channel) and wet (delayed) signals.
• FB.GAIN
This parameter sets the amount of delay feedback.
Tip:
• This function is unavailable for the ST IN Channels.
• The delay time range depends on the sampling rate at which the 01V96i is operating.
• If you select the DELAY SCALE meter or feet button, the distance value can be converted to the delay time based on sonic speeds (about 343.59 m/sec at 20 degrees Celsius). This option is useful if you wish to correct the timing difference between two sound sources that are far apart.
• If you select the DELAY SCALE beat button, a parameter box for setting a note that represents the beat and a parameter box for a tempo (BPM) setting appear below the DELAY SCALE parameter. Setting the note and BPM settings in these parameter boxes enables you to set a delay time that synchronizes to the song tempo.
Gating Input Channels
To set the Input Channel gates, use the [SEL] buttons to select the desired Input Channel, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS
[DYNAMICS] button, then press the [F1] button. The
Dynamics | Gate Edit page appears.
1 2 3 4 5
Setting the Input Channels from the Display
19
2
STEREO LINK
This parameter’s ON/OFF button enables you to pair gates for stereo operation even when the Input Channels are not paired.
3
CURVE
This area displays the current gate curve.
4
TYPE
This area displays the current gate type (GATE or DUCK-
ING).
Note: You cannot change the gate type on this page. To change the gate type, recall a program that uses the desired gate type from the Gate library.
5
Meters
These meters indicate the levels of the post-gate signals and the amount of gain reduction.
6
ON/OFF
The ON/OFF button turns the currently-selected Input
Channel’s gate on or off.
7
PARAMETER
These controls enable you to set the gate parameters. (See
page 148 for more information on the parameters.)
Tip:
• This function is unavailable for the ST IN Channels.
• You can store the gate settings in the Gate library, which features preset programs that can be used for various
6 7
1
KEYIN SOURCE
Select one of the following buttons to determine the trigger source for the currently-selected Input Channel’s gate.
• SELF......................... The selected channel’s own input signal is the trigger source.
• CHANNEL ............. Another Channel’s input signal is the trigger source. Select the desired channel in the parameter box below the CHANNEL button.
• AUX ......................... An Aux Send signal is the trigger source. Select the desired bus in the parameter box below the AUX button.
01V96i—Reference Manual
20
Input Channels
Compressing Input Channels
To set the Input Channel compressors, use the [SEL] buttons to select the desired Input Channel, then press the DISPLAY
ACCESS [DYNAMICS] button, then press the [F3] button to display the Dynamics | Comp Edit page.
1 2 3 4 5
Attenuating Input Channels
To set the attenuator for each Input Channel, press the DIS-
PLAY ACCESS [EQ] button, then press the [F3] button to display the EQ | In Att page.
6 7
1
POSITION
Use the Parameter wheel, or the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the position of the compressor within the channel from the following options:
• PRE EQ....................Immediately before EQ (default)
• PRE FADER ...........Immediately before the fader
• POST FADER ........Immediately after the fader
2
STEREO LINK
This ON/OFF button enables you to pair compressors for stereo operation even when channels are not paired.
3
CURVE
This area displays the current compressor curve.
4
TYPE
This field indicates the compressor type used by the currently-selected channel’s compressor
(COMP/EXPAND/COMP (H)/COMP (S)).
Note: You cannot change the Compressor type on this page.
To change the compressor type, recall a program that uses the desired compressor type from the compressor library.
5
Meters
These meters indicate the levels of the post-compressor signals and the amount of gain reduction.
6
ON/OFF
The ON/OFF button turns the currently-selected Input
Channel’s compressor on or off.
7
PARAMETER section
These controls enable you to set the compressor parame-
ters. (See page 149 for more information on the parame-
ters of each compressor type.)
Tip:
• This function is unavailable for the ST IN Channels.
• You can store the compressor settings in the compressor library, which features preset programs that can be used
for various applications (see page 80).
Move the cursor to the knob for the desired Input Channel, then rotate the Parameter wheel to set the amount of attenuation in the range of –96 dB to +12 dB.
Tip: You can also set the attenuation amount (in dB) for the currently-selected channel on the EQ | EQ Edit page.
01V96i—Reference Manual
EQ’ing Input Channels
The 01V96i’s Input Channels feature 4-band (LOW,
LOW-MID, HIGH-MID, HIGH) parametric EQ. The
LOW-MID and HIGH-MID bands are a peaking type of EQ.
The LOW and HIGH bands can be set to shelving, peaking, or HPF and LPF respectively.
1.
Press the [SEL] button of the channel for which you want to adjust EQ.
2.
Press the DISPLAY ACCEESS [EQ] button, then press the [F1] button to display the EQ | EQ
Edit page.
1 2 3 4 5
6
The parameters on this page are described below:
1
EQ ON
The ON/OFF button turns the currently-selected Input
Channel’s EQ on or off. You can press the [ENTER] button to turn the EQ on or off as long as the cursor is located on any parameter other than TYPE.
2
TYPE
Selects the type of EQ. TYPE I is the EQ type used on legacy Yamaha 02R series digital mixing consoles. The
TYPE II algorithm minimizes the interference between bands.
3
ATT
Determines the amount of pre-EQ signal attenuation in dB. It is the same Attenuator parameter that appears on the EQ | ATT In page.
4
CURVE
This area displays the current EQ curve.
5
Meters
These meters indicate the post-EQ signal levels of the currently-selected Input Channel and its available pair partner.
Setting the Input Channels from the Display
21
6
LOW, L-MID, H-MID, HIGH sections
These sections contain the Q, Frequency (F), and Gain
(G) parameters for the four bands. These parameter values range as follows:
Parameter
Q
Frequency
Gain
LOW
LOW-
MID
HIGH-
MID
HIGH
HPF, 10.0 to 0.10
(41 steps),
L.SHELF
10.0 to 0.10
(41 steps)
LPF, 10.0 to 0.10
(41 steps),
H.SHELF
21.2 Hz to 20.0 kHz
(120 steps per 1/12 octave)
–18.0 dB to +18.0 dB (0.1 dB steps)
1
1. The LOW and HIGH GAIN controls function as filter on/off controls when Q is set to HPF or LPF respectively.
Tip:
• The LOW-band EQ functions as a high-pass filter when the Q parameter in the LOW section is set to HPF. It functions as a shelving-type EQ when the Q parameter is set to L.SHELF.
• The HIGH-band EQ functions as a low-pass filter when the Q parameter in the HIGH section is set to LPF. It functions as a shelving-type EQ when the Q parameter is set to H.SHELF.
3.
Move the cursor to the desired parameter, then rotate the Parameter wheel to change the value.
Tip:
• The EQ settings for the ST IN Channels L & R are linked to each other.
• You can also press the buttons in the SELECTED CHAN-
NEL section to select the desired band and use the rotary controls to directly edit the Q, F, and G parameters (see
• You can store the EQ settings in the EQ library, which features preset programs that can be used for various appli-
01V96i—Reference Manual
22
Input Channels
Panning Input Channels
Input Channels can be panned in the range of L63 through
CENTER to R63. To pan each channel, press the
[PAN/ROUTING] button repeatedly until the Pan/Route |
Pan page appears.
1 2
Routing Input Channels
You can route each Input Channel to the Stereo Bus, Bus 1–8, or its own Direct Out. With the default setting, signals are routed only to the Stereo Bus. However, you can patch signals to a single or multiple destinations, if necessary.
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAN/ROUTING] button repeatedly until the page listed below that contains the desired channels appears.
• ROUT1-16 page
This page enables you to change the routing for Input
Channels 1–16.
• ROUT17-ST1 page
This page enables you to change the routing for Input
Channels 17–32 and ST IN Channels 1–4.
The parameters on these two pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same.
5 6 7
Move the cursor to the desired Pan control, then rotate the
Parameter wheel to set the value.
1
Pan controls
These knobs adjust the channel pan settings.
Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently-selected
Pan control to center.
2
MODE
The MODE parameter determines how paired Input
Channels are panned. There are three Pan modes as follows:
• INDIVIDUAL
In Individual mode, paired Input Channel pan controls operate independently.
• GANG
In Gang mode, paired Input Channel pan controls operate in unison, maintaining the current pan range.
• INV GANG
In Inverse Gang mode, paired Input
Channel pan controls operate in unison but move in opposite directions.
Tip:
• You can adjust the pan setting for the ST IN Channels L/R separately.
• You can also adjust the pan setting for the Input Channels using the PAN control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
• Surround Pan is available when the 01V96i is in Surround
mode. See page 52 for more information on Surround Pan.
1
2
3
4
8
1
PAN buttons
These buttons determine whether the channel’s Pan setting is applied to the Bus outs. In surround mode, they also determine whether the Surround Pan setting is applied to the Bus Outs.
2
Bus buttons 1–8
These buttons route the currently-selected Input Channel to the Bus Outs. If the 01V96i is in Surround mode, the button indicators change as follows, depending on the selected Surround mode:
Bus buttons 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Surround mode: 3-1 L R C S 5 6 7 8
Surround mode: 5.1
L R Ls Rs C E 7 8
Surround mode: 6.1
L R Ls Rs C Bs E 8
L=Left, R=Right, C=Center, S=Surround, Ls=Left Surround
Rs=Right Surround, E=Low Frequency Effect, Bs=Back
Surround
The above table shows the default assignment. The actual assignment may vary, depending on the settings on the
DIO/Setup | Surround Bus Setup page.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Setting the Input Channels from the Display
23
3
S
When this button is turned on, the currently-selected
Input Channel is routed to the Stereo Bus.
4
D
When this button is turned on, the currently-selected
Input Channel is routed to its Direct Out. See page 46 for
more information on the Direct Out.
5
ALL STEREO
This button turns on the S button for all channels on the page.
6
ALL BUS
This button turns on the Bus buttons 1–8 for all channels on the page.
7
ALL CLEAR
This button clears all routing assignments on the page.
8
SURROUND MODE
This field displays the current Surround mode.
Tip: The routings of the ST IN Channels L/R are linked. The D button is unavailable for the ST IN Channels.
1
Viewing Input Channel Settings
You can view and adjust parameter settings for the currently-selected Input Channel on the View | Parameter or
Fader pages.
■ Viewing the Gate, Compressor, and
EQ Settings
To display the View | Parameter page for a specific Input
Channel, use the corresponding [SEL] button to select the desired channel, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button repeatedly.
Move the cursor to a parameter you wish to change, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons or [ENTER] button to modify the setting.
4 3 6 5
2
7 8
The following parameters are available (sections marked with an asterisk (*) are unavailable for the ST IN Channels).
1
GATE section (*)
This section enables you to turn the gate-type dynamics
processor on or off and set the parameters. (See page 19
for more information.)
2
COMP section (*)
This section enables you to turn the compressor-type dynamics processor on or off and set the parameters. (See
page 20 for more information.)
3
INSERT section (*)
This section enables you to turn the Insert on or off and
patch the Insert In and Out. (See page 47 for more infor-
mation.)
4
EQ section
This section enables you to set various EQ parameters.
(See page 21 for more information.)
5
Meters
These meters indicate the signal levels of the currently-selected Input Channel and its available pair partner.
6
(Phase) section
You can reverse the signal phase of the currently-selected
Input Channel. (See page 18 for more information.)
01V96i—Reference Manual
24
Input Channels
7
DELAY section (*)
This section enables you to set the currently-selected
channel’s Delay function. (See page 18 for more informa-
tion.)
8
PAIR section (*)
This section indicates whether or not channels are paired.
The heart icon ( ) is in one piece when channels are paired. The heart icon is broken ( ) when channels are
not paired. (See page 26 for more information.)
■ Viewing the Pan, Fader, and Aux
Send Level Settings
To display the View | Fader page of a certain Input Channel, use the corresponding [SEL] button to select the desired channel, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button repeatedly.
Move the cursor to a parameter you wish to change, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the setting.
1 2 3 4 5
6
1
PAN/ON/Fader section
• PAN control
This control adjusts the currently-selected Input Channel’s Pan parameter.
Press the [ENTER] button to reset the Pan control to
Center.
• ON/OFF button
This button turns on or off the currently-selected Input
Channel.
• Fader
This parameter sets the fader position of the currently-selected Input Channel. The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB.
Press the [ENTER] button to reset the Fader to 0.0 dB.
2
SURROUND PAN section
• SURROUND PAN
The Surround pan parameters for the currently-selected
Input Channel are displayed only when a Surround mode
is selected. See page 52 for more information on Sur-
round pan.
3
BUS ROUTING/FOLLOW PAN section
• BUS ROUTING
This section enables you to select a destination Bus for the selected channel. When the D button is turned on, the channel signal is patched to the Direct Out selected in the parameter box below the button. (The D button is unavailable for the ST IN Channels.)
• FOLLOW PAN
This button determines whether the Input Channel’s Pan setting is applied to the paired Bus Outs (Follow Pan function). When the button is turned off, the Follow Pan function is disabled and an identical signal is sent to the paired Bus Outs. In surround mode, it also determines whether the Surround Pan setting is applied to the Bus
Outs.
4
AUX section
• AUX
These controls set the currently-selected Input Channel’s
Aux Send 1–8 levels and positions. (See page 36 for more
information on Aux Sends.)
5
Meter section
• Meters
These meters indicate the levels of the currently-selected
Input Channel.
• PRE EQ/PRE FADER/POST FADER
The metering position is displayed below the meters.
6
GROUP section
• FADER/MUTE/EQ/COMP
These buttons indicate which Fader, Mute, EQ, or Comp group, if any, the currently-selected Input Channel is in. If the channel is in a group, the group number appears. If the channel is not in a group, “—” appears. (The compressor is unavailable for the ST IN Channels.)
01V96i—Reference Manual
Setting the Input
Channels from the
Control Surface
You can use the faders, [SEL] buttons, and various buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section on the top panel to directly control most parameters for Input Channels.
Setting Input Channel Levels and Panning the Channels
■ Input Channels 1–32
1.
Press the LAYER [1–16] or [17–32] button to select a layer.
2.
Press the [SEL] button of the channel for which you want to adjust the input level and/or pan settings.
3.
Use the faders to set the Input Channel levels.
4.
Rotate the SELECTED CHANNEL [PAN] control to adjust the pan settings.
When you rotate the [PAN] control, the Pan/Route | Pan page is displayed automatically.
Setting the Input Channels from the Control Surface
25
3.
Rotate the level control of the desired channel to set the level.
You can always view the current channel level at the top of the display.
4.
Rotate the SELECTED CHANNEL [PAN] control to adjust the pan setting.
The pan setting can be applied to either ST IN channel L or R. To switch between channels L and R for the pan setting, press the same
[SEL] button repeatedly. (The channel currently being controlled is indicated in the upper-left corner of the display.)
EQ’ing Input Channels
1.
Press the [SEL] button or move the fader for the channel you wish to control.
2.
To control EQ for the currently-selected channel, press one of the following buttons to select the band you wish to adjust:
• [HIGH] button...... HIGH band
• [H-MID] button ... HIGH-MID band
• [L-MID] button .... LOW-MID band
• [LOW] button ....... LOW band
3.
Use the SELECTED CHANNEL [Q], [FRE-
QUENCY], and [GAIN] controls to adjust the
Q, frequency, and gain of the band selected in Step 2.
When the Auto EQUALIZER Display (page 109) check
box is on, the 01V96i displays the EQ/EQ Edit page.
■ ST IN Channels 1–4
1.
Use the ST IN [ST IN] button to select the desired ST IN Channels.
The indicators next to the [ST IN] button display the ST
IN Channels currently selected for control by the ST IN section.
2.
Press the [SEL] button for the channel for which you want to adjust the level and/or pan settings.
01V96i—Reference Manual
26
Input Channels
If the check box is off, the parameter value currently being adjusted pops up.
See page 21 for more information on EQ.
Tip:
• Pressing and holding down the button selected in Step 2 resets the corresponding band gain.
• Pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL [HIGH] and [LOW] buttons simultaneously resets the Q, frequency and gain for each band.
Pairing Input Channels
On the 01V96i, you can pair adjacent odd-even Input Channels or counterpart channels on Layer 1 and Layer 2 that share the same physical fader. Faders and most parameters of paired channels are linked for stereo operation. Paired channels’ linked parameters and non-linked parameters (that are available for independent control) are listed below:
Linked parameters
[SEL] buttons
Faders
Channel on/off
Insert on/off
Solo on/off
Solo Safe
Aux on/off
Aux Send level
Aux Sends as Pre or Post
Gate
Comp settings
EQ settings
Fader group
Mute group
Fade time
Recall Safe
Non-linked parameters
Input patches
Insert patches
Output patches
Comp insert position
Phase
Delay on/off
Delay time
*
Delay feedback
Delay mix
Routing
Pan, Follow Pan
Surround pan
Aux Send pan
Balance
Attenuators
**
* You can set this parameter for each channel independently if the GANG button is turned off on the
/INS/DLY | DLY page.
** You can set this parameter for each channel independently on the EQ | ATT page, but the paired channel settings are linked on the EQ | Edit and View pages.
Note: You cannot pair an ST IN channel 1–4 with an Input Channel.
To pair channels, or to cancel channel pairs, you can use the
[SEL] buttons on the top panel or access the Pair/Grup pages.
01V96i—Reference Manual
■ Pairing Channels by Using the
[SEL] Buttons
1.
While pressing and holding down the [SEL] button for one of the channels you wish to pair, press the [SEL] button for the adjacent channel. (The paired channel numbers should be odd and even in this order).
2.
When the Pair Confirmation check box is on
(see page 109), the Channel Pairing window
appears.
Pairing Input Channels
27
■ Pairing Input Channels Using the
Display
1.
Press the [PAIR/GROUP] button repeatedly until the Pair/Grup | Input page appears.
2 1
Note: You can pair only channels that are adjacent, odd-even
(in this order) channels. Pressing the [SEL] button for a non-adjacent channel will be ignored. You cannot create or cancel a pair of vertical partners.
3.
Move the cursor to the desired button in the
Channel Pairing window, then press [ENTER].
The following buttons are available in this window:
• CANCEL
Cancels the operation.
• CH x ➔ y
Copies the odd channel parameter values to the even channel.
• CH y ➔ x
Copies the even channel parameter values to the odd channel.
• RESET BOTH
Resets both channel parameters to the default settings
(same as when Channel memory #01 is recalled).
Move the cursor to the desired button, then press
[ENTER] to confirm the pair.
Tip: Pressing and holding down the first [SEL] button of the paired channels and pressing the second [SEL] button cancels the pair.
The parameters on this page are described below:
1
PAIR MODE
Determines how channels are paired.
2
STEREO/MONO x2 buttons
These buttons turn pairs on or off.
2.
Move the cursor to the PAIR MODE parameter field ( 1 ), then select the HORIZONTAL or
VERTICAL button.
The function of each mode is described below:
• HORIZONTAL
This button pairs adjacent odd-even channels (default).
• VERTICAL
This button pairs counterpart channels on Layer 1 and
Layer 2 that share the same physical fader (e.g., CH1 &
CH17, CH16 & CH32, etc.). This mode is useful when you wish to use one fader to control both stereo channels.
When you switch the Pair Mode, the combinations of channel numbers displayed on the page also change.
Note:
• When Pair mode is switched, only the channel numbers change. The mix parameters of the paired partners do not change.
• For example, if you change Pair mode from Horizontal to
Vertical, the Input Channel “2” indication changes to
Input Channel “17.” However, its parameters do not change. (If Channels 1 and 2 have been paired, switching the mode will pair Channels 1 and 17.)
3.
Move the cursor to the desired channel’s
MONOx2 button ( 2 ), then press [ENTER].
The channels are paired.
01V96i—Reference Manual
28
Input Channels
4.
To cancel a pair, move the cursor to the desired channel’s STEREO button, then press
[ENTER].
Tip: You can also create or cancel a pair of Output Channels in the same way on the Pair/Grup | Output page (see
Naming Input Channels
By default, Input Channels are named CH1, CH2, etc. You can change these names if desired. For example, it may be helpful for mixdown if you name a particular Input Channel with the type of musical instrument connected to the corresponding input jack.
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] button repeatedly until the Patch | IN Name page appears.
1 3 2
You can specify Short names in the center column (
1
) and Long (full) names in the right column (
2
).
When the Name Input Auto Copy check box (
3
) is on, the first four characters of a newly-entered Long name are automatically copied to the Short name. On the other hand, a newly-entered Short name is automatically added to the beginning of the Long name.
You can reset all channel names to their default names by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then pressing [ENTER].
2.
Move the cursor to a name you wish to change, then press [ENTER].
The Title Edit window appears, enabling you to enter a name.
3.
Edit the name, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER].
The new name is now effective.
Tip: The edited name is stored in the Input Patch library.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Bus Outs
29
Bus Outs
This chapter describes how to adjust the 01V96i’s Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 parameters.
• METER
This section enables you to switch the metering position of signal levels that are displayed on the Meter page or by the stereo meter to the right of the screen.
For more information on selecting the metering position, refer to “Viewing the Level Meters” in the Owner’s Manual (booklet).
Note: You can also patch the Stereo Out signals to other output connectors or the I/O card by using the Patch | Out Patch pages.
About Stereo Out
The Stereo Out section receives Input Channel and Bus Out
1–8 signals, mixes them into two channels, processes them using on-board EQ, compressor, etc., then routes them to the
STEREO OUT and 2TR OUT connectors. The following diagram illustrates the Stereo Out signal flow.
(Gain Reduction)
METER
(Out Meter)
METER
COMP
INSERT
ATT
METER
4BAND
EQ
INSERT
ON LEVEL
INSERT
BAL
OUTPUT
DELAY
METER
DA
Same as stereo master L DA
OUTPUT PATCH
L
(-10dBV)
R
[2TR OUT]
L
(+4dBu)
[STEREO OUT]
R
• INSERT
This section enables you to route the Stereo Out signals to external devices via the on-board connectors or I/O card, or insert internal effects processors.
• ATT (Attenuator)
This section enables you to attenuate or amplify the level of signals to be input to the EQ. The attenuator prevents post-EQ signals from clipping or corrects signal levels that are too low.
• 4 BAND EQ (4-band equalizer)
This parametric EQ features four bands (HIGH,
HIGH-MID, LOW-MID, and LOW).
• COMP (Compressor)
This dynamics processor can be used as compressor, expander, or limiter. The processor can be located pre-EQ, pre-[STEREO] fader, or post-[STEREO] fader.
• ON (On/Off)
This button turns the Stereo Out on or off.
• LEVEL
The [STEREO] fader adjusts the Stereo Out output levels.
• Balance
This section enables you to adjust the level balance between the L and R channels of the Stereo Out.
• OUTPUT DELAY (Output delay)
This section delays the output signals. It is mainly used to fine-tune the signal timing.
Bus Out 1–8
The Bus Out 1–8 section mixes signals routed from Input
Channels to the specified buses, processes them using on-board EQ, compressor, etc., then routes them to the specified output connectors or I/O card.
The following diagram illustrates the Bus Out signal flow.
BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 BUS5 BUS6 BUS7 BUS8
(Gain Reduction)
METER
(Out Meter)
METER
COMP
INSERT
ATT
METER
4BAND
EQ
INSERT
ON LEVEL
INSERT
PAN
ON
METER
OUTPUT
DELAY
LEVEL
BUS to STEREO
BUS 1(...8)
• INSERT
• ATT (Attenuator)
• 4 BAND EQ (4-band equalizer)
• COMP (Compressor)
• ON (On/Off)
• LEVEL
• OUTPUT DELAY (Output delay)
• METER
The parameters and sections listed above are identical to those for the Stereo Out. For more information, refer to the explanation of the Stereo Out.
• Bus to Stereo
Bus Out 1–8 signals are also routed to the Stereo Bus. In addition to the ON, LEVEL, and other parameters, you can also set the Send Level, On/Off, Pan, and other parameters.
Tip:
• You can also pair adjacent odd-even buses for stereo operation
• By default, Slot channels 1–8 and 9–16 and ADAT OUT channels 1–8 are patched to the Bus Out 1–8 outputs. However, you can change this patching on the Patch | Out Patch page (see
01V96i—Reference Manual
30
Bus Outs
Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the
Display
To set the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 parameters, you can either move the cursor to the desired parameter on the display and change the value, or operate the desired button or control on the top panel.
This section explains how to set the parameters on the display.
Tip:
Refer to “Input & Output Patching” on page 43 for more
information on how to set inserts.
Delaying the Stereo Out and
Bus Outs
To delay the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 signals, press the
[ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until the
/INS/DLY | Out Dly page appears.
Attenuating the Stereo Out and
Bus Out
To attenuate the Stereo Out and Bus Out signals, press the
DISPLAY ACCESS [EQ] button, then press the [F4] button to display the EQ | Out Att page. On this page, you can attenuate the Bus Out 1–8, Aux Out 1–8, and Stereo Out signals.
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input Channels, except that this page does not include the MIX/FB.GAIN parameters (see
Tip: You can also display the Out Dly page by pressing the
[ /INSERT/DELAY] button once, then press the [SEL] button to select the Stereo Out or Bus Out 1–8.
Compressing the Stereo Out and Bus Outs
To set the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 compressors, press the
[DYNAMICS] button, then the [F3] button to display the
Dynamics | Comp Edit page, and use the [SEL] buttons to select the Stereo Out or Bus Out 1–8.
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting
them) are the same as for Input Channels (see page 20).
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting
them) are the same as for Input Channels (see page 20).
01V96i—Reference Manual
1
2
3
Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Display
EQ’ing the Stereo Out and Bus
Outs
To set the EQ for the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 EQ, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [EQ] button, then press the [F1] button to display the EQ | EQ Edit page, and use the [SEL] buttons to select the Stereo Out or Bus Out 1–8.
31
2
TO ST ON/OFF
These buttons turn on and off the Bus Out 1–8 to the Stereo Bus routing.
3
TO ST Faders
These faders set the Bus Out 1–8 to Stereo Bus levels.
Viewing the Stereo Out and Bus
Out Settings
You can view and adjust parameter settings for the currently-selected Stereo Out or Bus Out on the View | Parameter and Fader pages.
■ Viewing the Compressor and EQ
Settings
To display the View | Parameter page, use the corresponding
[SEL] button to select the desired bus, then press the DIS-
PLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then press the [F1] button.
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting
them) are the same as for Input Channels (see page 21). Note
that the Stereo Out does not feature the STEREO LINK parameter.
Routing Bus Out 1–8 Signals to the Stereo Bus
You can patch Bus Out 1–8 signals to Outputs and Slot, as well as to the Stereo Bus. You can adjust the level and pan settings of the signals routed to the Stereo Bus for each bus. This is convenient when you wish to use Bus Outs (1–8) as a Group
Bus.
To patch the Bus Out 1–8 signals to the Stereo Bus, press the
DISPLAY ACCESS [PAN/ROUTING] button repeatedly to display the Pan/Route | Bus to St page.
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input Channels, except for the following items:
• The Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 Parameter pages do not contain the Gate and Phase parameters.
• The Stereo Out Parameter page does not contain the Pair parameter.
Move the cursor to the desired parameter you wish to change, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the setting.
1
TO ST PAN
These controls pan the Bus Out 1–8 signals between the left and right Stereo Out buses.
01V96i—Reference Manual
32
Bus Outs
■ Viewing Faders and Other
Parameters
To display the View | Fader page, use the corresponding [SEL] button to select the desired bus, then press the DISPLAY
ACCESS [VIEW] button, then press the [F2] button.
The Fader page layouts for Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 are slightly different.
Stereo Out Fader page
1 2
Bus Out (1–8) Fader page
1 2 3 4 5
3
1
BAL
This control adjusts the level balance between the L and R channels of the Stereo Out.
2
ON/OFF
This button turns the Stereo Out on or off, and links with the [ON] button in the STEREO section.
3
Fader
This fader adjusts the Stereo Out output levels, and links with the [STEREO] fader. The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB.
1
BUS ON/OFF
This button turns the currently-selected Bus Out (1–8) on or off, and links with the [ON] (9–16) button in the
Master layer.
2
BUS Fader
This fader sets the currently-selected Bus Out (1–8) level, and links with the fader (9–16) in the Master layer. The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB.
3
TO ST PAN
This control sets the Bus Out to Stereo Out Pan position for the currently-selected Bus Out (1–8).
4
TO ST ON/OFF
This button turns on or off the Bus Out to Stereo Out signal for the currently-selected Bus Out (1–8).
5
TO ST Fader
This fader sets the Bus Out to Stereo Out signal level for the currently-selected Bus Out (1–8).
Tip: The TO ST PAN, ON/OFF, and TO ST Fader parameters also appear on the Pan/Route | Bus to St page.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the
Control Surface
You can use the faders, [SEL] buttons, and various buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section on the top panel to directly control certain parameters for the Stereo
Out and Bus Out 1–8.
Setting the Levels
Move the [STEREO] fader to adjust the Stereo Out levels.
Press the [ON] button in the STEREO section to turn the Stereo Out on or off.
To set Bus Out 1–8 levels, press the [MASTER] button in the
LAYER section to select the Master layer, then move faders
9–16. At this time, you can turn Bus Out 1–8 on or off using the [ON] 9–16 buttons.
EQ’ing and Balancing the Stereo
Out and Bus Outs
1.
Press the [SEL] button of the bus to which you want to apply EQ or set the level balance.
2.
To adjust the EQ of the currently-selected bus, select the desired band by pressing one of the following buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL section:
• [HIGH] button...... HIGH band
• [H-MID] button ... HIGH-MID band
• [L-MID] button .... LOW-MID band
• [LOW] button ....... LOW band
3.
Use the [Q], [FREQUENCY], and [GAIN] controls to adjust the Q, frequency, and gain of the band selected in Step 2.
See page 21 for more information on EQ.
4.
To adjust the Stereo Out Balance parameter, use the [PAN] control in the SELECTED CHAN-
NEL section.
Note: If you select Aux Out 1–8 or Bus Out 1–8, the [PAN] control is disabled.
Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Control Surface
33
Pairing Buses or Aux
Sends
You can pair adjacent odd-even (in this order) buses or Aux
Sends for stereo operation. Paired bus and Aux Send linked parameters and non-linked parameters (that are available for independent controls) are listed below:
Linked parameters
[SEL] buttons
Fader
Channel on/off
Insert on/off
Solo on/off
Comp settings
Comp insert position
EQ settings
Fader group
Mute group
Fade time
Recall safe
Bus to Stereo on/off
*
Bus to Stereo fader
*
Non-linked parameters
Output Patching
Insert Patching
Delay on/off
Delay time
**
Bus to Stereo Pan
*
Attenuators
***
** You can set this parameter for each channel independently if the GANG button is turned off on the
/INS/DLY | DLY page.
*** You can set this parameter for each channel independently on the EQ | ATT page, but the paired channel settings are linked on the EQ | Edit and View pages.
Parameters marked with an asterisk * are available only for
Bus Out 1–8.
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAIR/GROUP] button repeatedly until the Pair/Grup | Output page appears.
2 1
The parameters on this page are described below.
1
STEREO/MONOx2
These buttons turn Bus or Aux Send pairs on or off.
01V96i—Reference Manual
34
Bus Outs
2
F.S
This button determines whether Aux Sends follow the
Input Channel Surround Pan when the 01V96i is in any
Surround mode other than “Stereo.” When this button is turned on, Aux Sends follow the Input Channel Surround
Pan. This is useful for feeding Surround signals to external Surround effects processors.
2.
Move the cursor to the MONOx2 button for the desired Bus or Aux Send, then press
[ENTER].
The buses or Aux Sends are paired.
3.
To cancel a pair, move the cursor to the STE-
REO button for the desired Bus or Aux Send, then press [ENTER].
Attenuating Output
Signals
To attenuate the 01V96i’s output signals, display the EQ | Out
Att page and adjust the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 attenuators individually.
If necessary, you can also select Output and I/O card channels and specify the amount of attenuation. This technique is convenient when you want to attenuate output signals quickly, regardless of the source signal patching.
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup | Output
Att page appears.
1 2
2.
Move the cursor in the left column ( 1 ), then scroll the list up or down using the Parameter wheel to select the desired output or slot channel for which you want to adjust attenuation.
The following outputs and slot channels can be selected:
• STEREO OUT L/R ................ STEREO OUT L & R channels
• MONITOR OUT L/R............ MONITOR OUT L & R channels
• OMNI OUT 1–4 ..................... OMNI OUT connectors
1–4
• SLOT OUT 1–1 through 1–16
..................... Slot channels 1–16
• ADAT OUT 1–8 ..................... ADAT OUT channels 1–8
• 2TR OUT DIGITAL L/R...... 2TR OUT DIGITAL L & R channels
3.
Move the cursor to the parameter value in the right column ( 2 ), then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to set the amount of attenuation.
The amount of attenuation can be set from 0 dB to –9 dB.
Tip: To reset the attenuation amount of all Output Channels to 0 dB, move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then press [ENTER].
01V96i—Reference Manual
Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs
You can change the default Bus names (BUS1, AUX4, STE-
REO, etc.). It may be convenient to name the buses “Monitor
Out” or “Effect Send,” for example, so that you can easily identify the signal type.
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] button repeatedly until the Patch | Out Name page appears.
3
Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs
35
1 2
You can specify Short names in the center column (
1
) and Long (full) names in the right column (
2
).
When the Name Input Auto Copy check box (
3
) is on, the first four characters of a newly-entered Long name are automatically copied to the Short name. On the other hand, a newly-entered Short name is automatically added to the beginning of the Long name.
You can reset all bus names to their default names by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then pressing [ENTER].
2.
Move the cursor to a name you wish to change, then press [ENTER].
The Title Edit window appears, which enables you to edit the name.
3.
Edit the name, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER].
The new name is now effective.
Tip: The edited name is stored in the Output Patch library.
01V96i—Reference Manual
36
Aux Outs
Aux Outs
This chapter describes how to control Aux Out 1–8.
Aux Out 1–8
The Aux Out 1–8 section mixes signals routed from the Input
Channels to the corresponding Aux Sends, processes them using on-board EQ, compressor, etc., then routes them to the specified internal effects processors, output connectors or I/O card connectors.
The 01V96i features eight Aux Sends, which can be used to send signals to the internal and external effects processors and monitors.
The following diagram illustrates the Aux Out 1–8 signal flow.
(Gain Reduction)
METER
(Out Meter)
METER
COMP
INSERT
ATT
METER
4BAND
EQ
INSERT
ON LEVEL
INSERT
OUTPUT
DELAY
METER
AUX 1(...8)
Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Display
To set Aux Out 1–8 parameters, you can either move the cursor to the desired parameter on the screen and change the value, or operate the desired button or control on the top panel.
This section explains how to set the parameters on the screen.
Tip:
Refer to “Input & Output Patching” on page 43 for more
information on how to set inserts.
Attenuating Aux Outs
To attenuate Aux Out 1–8 signals, press the [EQ] button, then press the [F4] button to display the EQ | Out Att page.
• INSERT
• ATT (Attenuator)
• 4 BAND EQ (4-band equalizer)
• COMP (Compressor)
• ON (On/Off)
• LEVEL
• OUTPUT DELAY (Output delay)
• METER
These parameters are the same as the Stereo Out and Bus Out
Tip: You can also pair adjacent odd-even Aux Sends (in this order) for stereo Aux operation.
Note: With the default setting, Aux Out 1–4 are patched to OMNI
OUT connectors 1–4 and to internal Effects processors 1–4. However, you can change this patching on the Patch | Output page.
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting
them) are the same as for Input Channels (see page 20).
01V96i—Reference Manual
Delaying Aux Outs
To delay Aux Out 1–8 signals, press the DISPLAY ACCESS
[ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until the
/INS/DLY | Out Dly page appears.
Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Display
37
EQ settings
To set the EQ for Aux Out 1–8, press the DISPLAY ACCESS
[EQ] button, then press the [F1] button to display the EQ | EQ
Edit page, then use the [SEL] buttons to select Aux Out 1–8.
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input Channels, except that this page does not include the MIX/FB.GAIN parameters (see
Tip: You can also display the Out Dly page if you select the desired
Aux Out (1–8) by pressing the corresponding [SEL] button while the DLY-related parameters are indicated on the page.
Comp settings
To set the Aux Out 1–8 compressors, press the DISPLAY
ACCESS [DYNAMICS] button, then press the [F3] button to display the Dynamics | Comp Edit page, then select the desired Aux Out 1–8 by using the corresponding [SEL] buttons.
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting
them) are the same as for Input Channels (see page 21).
Viewing Aux Out Settings
You can view and adjust the parameter settings for the currently-selected Aux Out on the View | Parameter and Fader pages.
■ Viewing the Compressor and EQ
Settings
To display the View | Parameter page, use the corresponding
[SEL] button to select the desired Aux Out (1–8), then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then press the [F1] button.
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting
them) are the same as for Input Channels (see page 20).
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input Channels, except that this page does not include the Gate and Phase parameters (see
01V96i—Reference Manual
38
Aux Outs
■ Viewing Faders and On/Off
Parameters
To display the View | Fader page, use the corresponding [SEL] button to select the desired Aux Out (1–8), then press the DIS-
PLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then press the [F2] button.
• ON/OFF
This button turns the currently-selected Aux Out (1–8) on or off. It links with the corresponding [ON] (1–8) button in the Master layer.
• Fader
This fader sets the currently-selected Aux Out (1–8) level.
It links with the corresponding fader (1–8) in the Master layer. The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB.
Setting Aux Send Levels
You can adjust the level of signals routed from Input Channels to the corresponding Aux Out (1–8).
Setting Send Levels from the
Display
You can view multiple channels’ Aux Send levels on the screen and adjust them individually.
1.
Press the FADER MODE [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select the Aux.
2.
Make sure that the 01V96i displays the Aux |
Send page.
This page enables you to adjust the level of the signals routed from each Input Channel to the Aux selected in
Step 1.
If the Send page is not displayed, repeatedly press the button that you pressed in Step 1 until the Send page appears.
Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Control Surface
You can use the faders, [SEL] buttons, and various buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section on the top panel to directly control certain parameters for Aux Out
1–8.
Setting Levels
To set Aux Out 1–8 levels, press the [MASTER] button in the
LAYER section to select the Master layer, then move faders
1–8. At this time, you can turn Aux Out 1–8 on or off using the corresponding [ON] 1–8 buttons.
EQ settings
To control Aux Out 1–8 EQ parameters, select the desired
Aux Out (1–8) using the corresponding [SEL] button or fader, then use the buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHAN-
NEL section. The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input Channels (see
• Aux Send rotary controls
These controls adjust the Aux Send level of the Input
Channels. The current numeric levels appear below the rotary controls.
• PRE/POST
These buttons enable you to specify the Aux signal source points. The PRE buttons send pre-fader signals, and the
POST buttons send post-fader signals.
• MODE
Aux Sends have two operating modes that determine how signals are sent: Fixed (Aux Send levels are fixed); and
Variable (Aux Send levels are variable).
• GLOBAL
The GLOBAL PRE and POST buttons enable you to set all Input Channels for the selected Aux to pre-fader or post-fader simultaneously.
• PRE POINT
The PRE POINT PRE ON and POST ON buttons enable you to set the pre-fader channels to pre-on (before the
[ON] button) or post-on (after the [ON] button).
01V96i—Reference Manual
Note: In Fixed mode, Aux Send ON/OFF buttons appear instead of the Aux Send rotary controls, PRE/POST buttons,
GLOBAL PRE/POST buttons, and PRE POINT PRE
ON/POST ON. These ON/OFF buttons turn on or off each
Input Channel for the currently-selected Aux Send.
3.
Move the cursor to the FIXED or VARIABLE button in the MODE section for the currently-selected Aux Send to select a mode.
• Fixed Mode
In this mode, Aux Send levels are fixed at nominal
(0.0 dB). Also, channel ON/OFF buttons appear instead of the Send level rotary controls and PRE/POST buttons.
Setting Aux Send Levels
39
4.
If you switched to Fixed mode in Step 3, the
ON/OFF buttons turn each Input Channel on or off for the currently-selected Aux Send.
Note: In Fixed mode, the Aux On/Off parameters for paired
Input Channels are not linked to each other.
5.
If you switched to Variable mode in Step 3, the PRE/POST buttons and Send level rotary controls enable you to adjust the signal source points and Send levels.
• Variable Mode
In this mode, Aux Send levels are variable and the signal source point can be either pre-fader or post-fader. Channel Send level rotary controls and PRE/POST buttons appear on the screen.
Tip: You can select Variable or Fixed mode individually for each of the eight Aux.
Note:
• In Fixed mode, all ON/OFF buttons are turned OFF.
• When you switch to Variable mode, the signal source points are set to post-fader (PRE/POST buttons are set to
POST), and Send level rotary controls are reset to –
.
You can turn each Input Channel on or off for the currently-selected Aux Send even in Variable mode. To do this, move the cursor to the desired Send level control, then press [ENTER]. (The rotary controls for Off channels are grayed out.)
Tip:
• In Variable mode, Aux Send levels, Aux On/Off, and
Pre/Post parameters for paired Input Channels are linked to each other.
• GLOBAL PRE/POST buttons enable you to set all Input
Channels simultaneously (including those not displayed on the current page) to pre-fader or post-fader.
01V96i—Reference Manual
40
Aux Outs
Note:
• Do not raise the level of the Aux Sends (patched to the effects processor) on the effects return channels.
• For example, by default, Aux 1 is routed to the input of the internal Effects processor 1, and L and R of ST IN Channel
1 are patched to the processor’s output. Under these conditions, if you raise the level of the send signals from ST IN
Channel 1 to Aux 1, the signals are returned to ST IN
Channel 1, creating a signal loop and possibly damaging your speakers.
Viewing Aux Send
Settings for Multiple
Channels
You can view and set parameters for all Aux Send 1–8, including setting levels and Pre/Post parameters.
This is convenient when you wish to visually check all Aux
Send settings or simultaneously adjust the levels of certain channels routed to Aux 1–8.
1.
Press one of the FADER MODE [AUX 1]–[AUX
8] buttons repeatedly until the page listed below that contains the desired channels appears.
• View1-16 page
This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels
1–16.
• View17-STI page
This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels
17–32 and ST IN Channels 1–4.
These pages display the source Input channels and the corresponding Aux Sends in a matrix. The parameters on these two pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same.
2 1
3
1
DISPLAY
Use the following buttons to display the desired parameters.
• LEVEL......................Select the LEVEL button to display
Send level bar graphs for Input
Channels routed to Aux 1–8.
• PRE/POST ..............Select the PRE/POST button to display signal source points for Input
Channels routed to Aux 1–8.
2
FIX/VARI
These buttons indicate the Aux mode (Fixed or Variable) for Aux Out 1–8 and are only for display purposes.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Panning Aux Sends
41
3
LEVEL
This field displays in dB the level of the Aux Send currently-selected by the cursor.
2.
Move the cursor to either the DISPLAY LEVEL or PRE/POST button, then press [ENTER] to display the Level or Pre/Post parameters.
3.
If you selected the PRE/POST button in Step
2, move the cursor to the desired Input Channel and Aux intersection, then press the
[ENTER] button to change the signal source point.
Panning Aux Sends
You can pair adjacent odd-even (in this order) Aux Sends for stereo operation. This enables you to pan signals from Input
Channels to paired Aux Sends.
1.
Pair the desired two Aux Sends. (See page 33
for more information on pairing channels.)
2.
Use the FADER MODE [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select one of the paired Aux Sends.
3.
Repeatedly press the button you pressed in
Step 2 to display the Aux | Pan page.
1 2 3
Note: You can switch between Pre and Post only for Aux
Sends that are set to Variable mode. The “FIX” indication appears for Aux Sends that are set to Fixed mode, and you cannot switch Pre/Post.
4.
If you selected the LEVEL button in Step 2, move the cursor to the desired Input Channel and Aux intersection, then edit the Send level or turn the currently-selected AUX Send on or off.
Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to set the Send level, then press the [ENTER] button to turn the currently-selected Aux Send on or off.
One of the following indicators appears, depending on the current Aux mode.
• Aux Sends in Fixed mode
A “FIX” indicator appears for On Aux Sends, and a dot
“ .” appears for Off Aux Sends.
• Aux Sends in Variable mode
The current Send levels are displayed by the bar graphs. If the level is set to nominal (0.0 dB), “N” appears in the bar.
The bars for Aux Sends that are turned off are highlighted.
1
Aux pan controls
These controls adjust the pan setting of signals routed from Input Channels to paired Aux buses.
2
MODE
The MODE parameter determines how paired Input
Channels are panned.
3
INPUT PAN LINK
When this parameter is turned on, Aux Sends follow the
Input Channel Pan.
4.
Move the cursor to the Aux pan control of the desired Input Channel, the rotate the Parameter wheel to set the pan value.
5.
If necessary, move the cursor to the MODE parameter box, then rotate the Parameter wheel to select INDIVIDUAL, GANG, or INV
GANG, then press [ENTER].
If the INPUT PAN LINK ON/OFF button is turned off, this Mode setting is independent of the Mode parameter
on the Pan page. (See page 22 for more information on
Mode options.)
01V96i—Reference Manual
42
Aux Outs
6.
To link the Input Channel Pan setting with the
Aux Send Pan setting, move the cursor to the
INPUT PAN LINK ON/OFF button, then press
[ENTER].
The pan positions on the Pan page are copied to the Aux pan setting, and the pan controls on both pages are linked.
Tip:
• If paired Aux Sends are in Variable mode, the Aux Send levels, Aux On/Off, and Pre/Post parameters for paired
Input Channels are linked to each other.
• If paired Aux Sends are in Fixed mode, the Aux On/Off parameters for paired Input Channels are not linked to each other.
Copying Channel Fader
Positions to Aux Sends
While Aux Sends are in Variable mode, you can copy all Input
Channel fader positions on one layer to the corresponding
Aux Sends.
This is convenient when you wish to send to the musicians monitor signals that have the same balance setting as the Stereo Out signals.
1.
Press and hold down the copy source layer
(LAYER [1–16] or [17–32]) button.
Note: If you release the button in the LAYER section before you proceed to Step 2, you will be unable to complete the Copy operation.
2.
Press one of the FADER MODE
[AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select the desired Aux Send copy destination.
The confirmation window for the Copy operation appears.
3.
To execute the Copy operation, move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER].
To cancel the Copy operation, move the cursor to the NO button, then press [ENTER].
Tip: If the copy destination Input Channel has been paired with a vertical partner in another Layer, the fader position will be copied to the partner’s Aux Send.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Input & Output
Patching
This chapter describes how to patch (assign) signal paths within the 01V96i to its inputs, outputs, and slot channels
Input & Output Patching
43
Input Patching
Follow the steps below to change the Input Patch.
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] button repeatedly until the Patch | In Patch page appears.
Input Patching
Signals input at INPUT connectors 1–16, ADAT IN connector, 2TR IN DIGITAL connectors, and Slot I/O card are patched to Input Channels for use.
Patch example:
Input Patching
INPUT connector 1
INPUT connector 2
INPUT connector 3
INPUT connector 4
INPUT connector 5
INPUT connector 6
INPUT connector 7
INPUT connector 8
Input Channel 1
Input Channel 2
Input Channel 3
Input Channel 4
Input Channel 5
Input Channel 6
Input Channel 7
Input Channel 8
By default, the Input Channels are patched as follows:
Input Channels Input connectors and Slot channels
1–16
17–24
25–32
ST IN Channels
1–4
INPUT connectors 1–16
ADAT IN Input Channels 1–8
Slot Channels 1–8
Internal Effects Processor 1–4 Outputs
1–2
You can change these patches, if you desire.
1
Inputs, ADAT IN channels, TO HOST USB channels, and slot channels that are currently assigned to Input Channels are shown in the parameter boxes (
1
) below the channel numbers. The parameter indicators are explained below:
Parameter value
–
AD1–AD16
ADAT1–ADAT8
SL-01–SL-16
FX1-1 & FX1-2
FX2-1 & FX2-2
FX3-1 & FX3-2
FX4-1 & FX4-2
2TD-L & 2TD-R
USB1–USB16
Description
No assignment
INPUT connectors 1–16
ADAT IN Input Channels 1–8
Slot Channels 1–16
Outputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects
Processor 1
Outputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects
Processor 2
Outputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects
Processor 3
Outputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects
Processor 4
2TR DIGITAL IN (L/R)
TO HOST USB port input channels
1–16
2.
Move the cursor to an input patch parameter you wish to change, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching.
1
2
The long name of the currently-selected channel is indicated in the upper-right corner of the screen (
1
). Below the channel name is the long name of the selected input channel (
2
). (See page 28 for information on changing
channel names.)
01V96i—Reference Manual
44
Input & Output Patching
3.
Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
Tip:
• You can patch an input signal to multiple Input Channels.
• You can store the Input Patch settings to the Input Patch library.
Refer to “Libraries” on page 74 for more information.
Output Patching
The 01V96i’s Stereo Out, Bus Out 1–8, Aux Out 1–8 signals can be patched to any outputs, ADAT OUT output channels, and slot output channels.
Patch example:
Output Patching
Aux Out 1
Aux Out 2
Aux Out 3
Aux Out 4
Aux Out 5
Aux Out 6
Aux Out 7
Aux Out 8
OMNI Out connector 1
OMNI Out connector 2
OMNI Out connector 3
OMNI Out connector 4
OMNI Out connector 1
OMNI Out connector 2
OMNI Out connector 3
OMNI Out connector 4
Changing the Signal Path to the
ADAT OUT Connector, Slot, or
OMNI OUT connectors
Follow the steps below to change the signal path patched to the ADAT OUT connector, the optional mini-YGDAI card installed in the slot, or the OMNI OUT connectors.
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] button repeatedly until the Patch | Out Patch page appears.
Each parameter box displays the currently-patched signal path.
1
By default, the following signal paths are patched to outputs,
ADAT OUT output channels, and slot output channels:
Output connectors and slot channels
ADAT OUT output channels 1–8
Slot Channels 1–8
Slot Channels 9–16
OMNI OUT connectors 1–4
2TR OUT DIGITAL (L)
2TR OUT DIGITAL (R)
Signal flow
Bus Outs 1–8
Bus Outs 1–8
Bus Outs 1–8
Aux Outs 1–4
Stereo Out L
Stereo Out R
Tip:
• You can patch a signal to multiple outputs.
• You can store the Output Patch settings to the Output Patch
library. Refer to “Libraries” on page 74 for more information.
You can change these patches, if you desire. The procedure for patching signals to output varies depending on the output connectors and slots.
2
3
1
SLOT 1–16
These parameter boxes set the routing of Slot Channel
1–16 signals.
2
ADAT 1–8
These parameter boxes set the routing of ADAT OUT connector output channel 1–8 signals.
3
OMNI 1–4
These parameter boxes set the routing of OMNI OUT connector 1–4 signals.
The parameter indicators are explained below:
Parameter value Description
–
BUS1–BUS8
AUX1–AUX8
ST L/R
INS CH1–INS CH32
INS BUS1–INS BUS8
INS AUX1–INS AUX8
INS ST-L/ST-R
CAS BUS1–BUS8
No assignment
Bus Out 1–8 signal
Aux Out 1–8 signal
Stereo Out signal
Input Channel 1–32 Insert
Out
Bus Out 1–8 Insert Out
Aux Out 1–8 Insert Out
Stereo Out Insert Out
Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs
CAS AUX1–AUX8
CAS ST-L/ST-R
Aux Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs
Stereo Bus Cascade Outs
CASSOLOL/CASSOLOR Solo Bus Cascade Outs
2.
Move the cursor to a patch parameter you wish to change, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Output Patching
45
3.
Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
Tip: You can store the Output Patch settings to the Output Patch
library. Refer to “Libraries” on page 74 for more information.
Patching the 2TR Digital
Outputs
Follow the steps below to change the signal path patched to the 2TR OUT DIGITAL connector.
Patching the USB Outputs
By default, the following output signals are assigned to USB
OUT.
Outputs Signals
USB OUT1–8
USB OUT9–16
Bus Out 1–8 signals
Bus Out 1–8 signals
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] button repeatedly until the Patch | 2TR Out page appears.
If you want to change or verify this patching, proceed as follows.
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] button repeatedly until the Patch | USB Out page appears.
Signals assigned on the Out Patch page can also be assigned on this page.
2.
Move the cursor to a patch parameter you wish to change, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching.
3.
Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
The parameter boxes underneath each number indicate the currently-assigned signal routing. The meaning of these indicators are explained below.
Parameter value
–
BUS1–BUS8
AUX1–AUX8
ST L/R
INS CH1–INS CH32
INS BUS1–INS BUS8
INS AUX1–INS AUX8
INS ST-L/ST-R
Description
No assignment
Bus Out 1–8 signals
Aux Out 1–8 signals
Stereo Out signals
Input Channels 1–32 Insert
Outs
Bus Out 1–8 Insert Outs
Aux Out 1–8 Insert Outs
Stereo Out Insert Outs
2.
Move the cursor to a parameter box, and use the Parameter wheel (or [INC]/[DEC]) to modify the patching.
3.
Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
01V96i—Reference Manual
46
Input & Output Patching
Patching Direct Outs
Input Channel 1–32 signals can be directly patched to any outputs or slot outputs, as well as Bus Out 1–8 and Stereo Out.
This patching is convenient when you want to record the input signal of each Input Channel to an individual track on a connected DAW.
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] button repeatedly until the Patch | Direct Out page appears.
4.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAN/ROUTING] button repeatedly until one of the following pages containing the channels you want to patch to the Direct Out appears.
• Rout1-16 page........This page enables you to change the
Input Channel 1–16 routings.
• Rout17-STI page...This page enables you to change the
Input Channels 17–32 and ST IN
Channel 1–4 routings.
Tip:
Refer to page 22 for more information on these pages.
5.
Move the cursor to the D button for the channel you want to patch to the Direct Out, then press [ENTER].
The Direct Out patching is now effective, and the signals are routed to the assigned outputs, ADAT OUT channels, or slot output channels.
1 2
The parameters on this page are described below.
1
1–32
These boxes indicate the Direct Out destination (outputs,
ADAT OUT output channels, and slot output channels) for Input Channels 1–32.
2
DIRECT OUT
Determines the Direct Out signal source position from the following three options:
• PRE EQ....................Immediately before Input Channel
EQ
• PRE FADER ...........Immediately before Input Channel fader
• POST FADER ........Immediately after Input Channel fader
2.
Move the cursor to a patch parameter (1–32) you want to change, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the destination.
If necessary, specify the signal source position using the
DIRECT OUT parameter.
3.
Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
Note: If you select a destination that is already used by an
Output Patch setting and turn on the Direct Out, the Output
Patch setting will be disabled. To restore the Output Patch setting, select another Direct Out destination or turn off the
Direct Out.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Insert Patching
47
Insert Patching
The 01V96i’s Input Channels and Output Channels (Stereo
Out, Bus Out 1–8, Aux Out 1–8) feature independent Insert
Ins and Outs. Inputs, outputs, ADAT connector channels, slot channels, and internal effects processor inputs and outputs can be patched to the Output Channel Insert Ins and Outs. In this way, you can send the signals to external effects processors for processing, or insert internal effects.
Individual Insert Patching
You can patch the 01V96i’s inputs, outputs, ADAT connector channels, slot channels, and effects processor inputs and outputs to the Insert Ins and Outs. The same procedure applies to both Input Channels and Output Channels.
Input
Effects
Output
Output connector
Channel
Insert Out
Input connector
1.
Press the [SEL] button of an Input Channel or
Output Channel for Insert patching.
2.
Press the [ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until the /INS/DLY | Insert page appears.
1
2
Insert In
3
This page contains the following parameters:
1
POSITION
This parameter determines the insert position of the
Insert patch or compressor. The insert position is indicated by highlighted COMP or INSERT buttons.
2
INSERT section
• ON/OFF
This button turns the Insert on or off.
• OUT
This parameter enables you to select outputs, ADAT
OUT channels, slot output channels, or internal effects inputs as the Insert Out destination.
• IN
This parameter enables you to select inputs, ADAT IN channels, slot input channels, or internal effects outputs as the Insert In source.
3
COMP section
• ON/OFF
This button turns the compressor on or off.
• ORDER
This parameter determines the order of Insert patch and compressor when they are inserted at the same signal path point. With the “COMP → INS” setting, signals pass through the compressor first, then the Insert. With the
“INS → COMP” setting, signals pass through the Insert first, then the compressor.
3.
Move the cursor to the OUT parameter box, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the
[INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the desired outputs, slot channels, or internal effects inputs to be patched to Insert Out.
The parameter indicators are explained below:
Parameter values Description
– No assignment
ADAT 1–ADAT 8 ADAT OUT Output Channels 1–8
SL-01–SL-16 Slot Channels 1–16
OMNI1–OMNI4 OMNI OUT connectors 1–4
2TD-L/2TD-R 2TR OUT DIGITAL (L/R)
FX1-1/FX1-2
FX2-1/FX2-2
Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects
Processor 1
Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects
Processor 2
FX3-1/FX3-2
FX4-1/FX4-2
USB1–USB16
Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects
Processor 3
Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects
Processor 4
TO HOST USB port output channels 1–16
4.
Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
If you move the cursor to another parameter box or display another page before you press the [ENTER] button, all settings on this page will be cancelled.
01V96i—Reference Manual
48
Input & Output Patching
5.
Move the cursor to the desired IN parameter box, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the inputs, ADAT IN channels, or slot input channels to be patched to the Insert In.
Refer to the explanation regarding the Input Patch for
more information on the parameter values (see page 43).
6.
Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
Tip: Move the cursor to an empty OUT or IN parameter box and press the [ENTER] button. The Patch Select window appears. Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the cursor buttons to select an item to be patched, then press [ENTER].
Move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER]. The selected item is now patched.
7.
To enable the specified Insert patch, move the cursor to the ON/OFF button in the
INSERT section, and press [ENTER] to turn it on or off.
Viewing and Changing Insert In
Patch
You can view and also change the items patched to the Insert
Ins of all Input Channels (or all Output Channels). This is useful when you wish to find out if multiple channels have the same patch.
1.
To view the Input Channels’ Insert Ins, press the [PATCH] button repeatedly until the
Patch | Input Ins page appears.
This page displays Input Channels 1–32 Insert In Patches.
2.
Move the cursor to a channel patch parameter box you wish to change, then rotate the
Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching.
3.
Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
4.
To view the Output Channels’ Insert Ins, press the [PATCH] button repeatedly until the
Patch | Output Ins page appears.
5.
Move the cursor to a channel patch parameter box you wish to change, then rotate the
Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching.
6.
Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Monitoring
This chapter explains how to set up monitoring and use the
Solo function on the 01V96i.
Monitoring
49
Monitor and Solo Setup
For monitoring and solo setup, press the DISPLAY ACCESS
[DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup | Monitor page appears.
5 1 6 2 3 4
Monitor
The 01V96i features the stereo signal path to feed the monitors. The monitoring signal source is patched to MONITOR
OUT connectors L & R and the PHONES connector.
The following diagram illustrates the monitoring signal flow.
SOLO TRIM
SOLO L
SOLO R
BUS1-8
AUX1-8
OUTPUT SOLO
8
8
SOLO LOGIC
MONITOR TRIM
[2TR IN]
RCA
L
R
DA
DA
MONITOR
/2TR IN
MONITOR OUT
LEVEL
PHONES
LEVEL
L
R
[MONITOR OUT]
[PHONES]
• SOLO bus
This special bus routes soloed Input Channels to the
Monitor outputs, bypassing Bus 1–8 and the Stereo Bus.
• OUTPUT SOLO
This section routes soloed Output Channels (Aux Out
1–8, Bus Out 1–8) to the Monitor outputs.
Note: Input and Output Channels cannot be solo-monitored simultaneously. The solo function for the most-recently soloed channels is enabled.
• MONITOR TRIM
This section adjusts the monitoring signal level in the digital domain.
• MONITOR OUT LEVEL
Use the MONITOR [MONITOR OUT] control on the top panel to adjust the monitoring signal level in the analog domain.
• MONITOR/2TR IN
As a monitoring signal, you can select either the 01V96i internal signals or 2TR IN digital inputs.
• PHONES
The Monitor signal is also fed to the PHONES jack. You can set the level independently.
7 8 9
This page contains the following parameters:
1
SOLO
This parameter turns the Solo function on or off. By default, it is set to Enabled.
2
MODE
This parameter determines how the Solo function works.
There are two options. The setting affects only Input
Channels.
• RECORDING
In Recording Solo mode, soloed Input Channel signals are fed to the Solo bus and output via the Monitor outputs. Other buses (Stereo bus and Bus 1–8) are unaffected by this mode.
• MIXDOWN
In Mixdown Solo mode, soloed Input Channel signals are fed to the Stereo bus and output via the Monitor outputs.
Unsoloed Input Channels are not fed to the Stereo bus while the Solo function is enabled.
Tip:
• Recording Solo mode is convenient when you wish to monitor certain Input Channels while recording, since the Stereo bus and Bus 1–8 signals are unaffected.
• Mixdown Solo mode is useful when you wish to mute unsoloed Input Channels and feed soloed Input Channel signals to the Stereo bus during mixdown.
01V96i—Reference Manual
50
Monitoring
3
SEL MODE
This parameter determines how the Input Channels will be soloed when you press the [SOLO] button of each
Channel. There are two options.
• MIX SOLO
In Mix Solo mode, any number of channels can be soloed simultaneously.
• LAST SOLO
In Last Solo mode, only one channel can be soloed at a time by pressing the [SOLO] button. The Solo function that was previously enabled for channels is automatically cancelled.
4
LISTEN
This parameter determines the source of the Input Channel Solo signal: Pre Fader or Post Pan. When Pre Fader is selected, turning on the PAN button below the Pre Fader option will solo the channel with the pan position specified by the Pan setting even if the source precedes the fader. This parameter is effective only in Recording Solo mode.
5
SOLO TRIM
This parameter enables you to trim the level of the Solo signal in the range of –96 dB to +12 dB.
6
FADER/SOLO RELEASE
If this check box is checked, you can unsolo the channels by raising the channel faders that were at the level of – when the Solo function was turned on. If the faders were set to higher than –, the channels cannot be soloed. This setting is not effective in Mixdown Solo mode and for
Output Channels.
Note: When you check the FADER/SOLO RELEASE check box, the Solo setting is temporarily cancelled.
7
SOLO SAFE CHANNEL
For Mixdown Solo mode, Input Channels can be configured individually so that they are not muted when other
Input Channels are soloed (Solo Safe function). Signals from Input Channels with the SOLO SAFE CHANNEL button turned on are always fed to the Stereo bus, regardless of the channels’ Solo function status. You can clear all
Solo Safe settings by turning on the ALL CLEAR button.
Tip: For example, if you set the internal effects processor’s return signal to Solo Safe, you can monitor the soloed “processed (or wet)” signals.
8
MONITOR TRIM
This parameter enables you to trim the level of the monitoring signal in the range of –96 dB to +12 dB.
9
MONO
This button switches the Monitor signal into mono.
Using the Monitor
1.
Connect a monitoring system to the MONI-
TOR OUT connectors.
To monitor the signal via headphones, connect headphones to the PHONES jack.
2.
Press the Monitor Source selector in the
MONITOR section to select the monitoring signal source.
PHONES
MONITOR
2TR IN
0
LEVEL
10
MONITOR
OUT
0
LEVEL
10
PHONES
To monitor the 01V96i’s internal signals, turn off the selector (the button should be raised). To monitor the signals at the 2TR IN connectors, turn on the selector (the button should be pushed in).
3.
Adjust the monitoring level using the MONI-
TOR [MONITOR LEVEL] control while playing the sound sources.
To adjust the level of the monitoring signal via headphones, turn the [PHONES LEVEL] control.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Using the Solo Function
You can solo and monitor Input Channels, Aux Out 1–8, and
Bus Out 1–8 using the [SOLO] buttons on the top panel.
1.
Press the [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup | Monitor page appears.
2.
Set the SOLO parameter to On.
Set other parameters on the page, if necessary.
3.
To solo and monitor Input Channels, press the corresponding LAYER button to select a
Layer that contains the desired channels, then press the channel [SOLO] buttons.
The channel [SOLO] button indicators and the SOLO
[SOLO] indicator light up. Only the soloed Input Channel signals are fed to the Monitor outputs.
Tip: If the SEL MODE parameter is set to Mix Solo on the
DIO/Setup | Monitor page, you can solo multiple Channels simultaneously.
4.
To solo and monitor Output Channels, press the LAYER [MASTER] button, then press the channel [SOLO] buttons.
Input and Output Channels (Aux Out 1–8, Bus Out 1–8) cannot be solo-monitored simultaneously. For example, if you solo an Input Channel, then solo an Output Channel, the first solo channel is cancelled.
If you solo an Output Channel first, then solo an Input
Channel, canceling the Input Channel’s solo will activate the Output Channel’s solo.
5.
You can unsolo all soloed channels by pressing all illuminated channel [SOLO] buttons.
The button indicators turn off. You can also unsolo all soloed channels by pressing the SOLO [CLEAR] button.
Using the Solo Function
51
01V96i—Reference Manual
52
Surround Pan
Surround Pan
This chapter describes surround panning, which determines how Input Channel signals are panned within and across the stereo field.
About Surround Pan
The Surround Pan function places a sound image within a two-dimensional field using a multi-channel playback system, and pans the image to the front, rear, left, and right in relation to the listening position. To pan the stereo image, you can use the Parameter wheel, or [INC]/[DEC] buttons.
If each channel’s follow pan (see page 24) is turned off, you
can route the signals to the corresponding Bus Outs regardless of the Surround Pan setting. This is convenient when you wish to assign the surround source or surround effect returns to the Buses.
If “Nominal Pan” (see page 109) in the Prefer1 page is
checked, the level of the Input Channels that are panned hard left or right will be used as the nominal level. If the check box is not checked, the nominal level will be +3 dB.
You can also store the surround pan settings in a Scene. In addition to a normal Stereo mode, the 01V96i features the following three Surround modes:
• 3-1
This mode uses four channels that include front left, front right, front center, and rear.
Front L Center Front R
• 5.1
This mode uses six channels that include front left, front right, rear left, rear right, front center, and subwoofer.
Subwoofer
Front L Center Front R
Rear L Rear R
• 6.1
This mode uses seven channels that include six channels of 5.1 mode plus rear center.
Subwoofer
Front L Center Front R
Rear L Rear center Rear R
Surround
When you select one of these Surround modes, each surround channel signal is output as the Bus Out signal specified on the
DIO/Setup | Surr Bus page (see page 54).
The following table shows the factory-default Surround Channel to Bus Out assignment in each Surround mode.
Surround Mode BUS5 BUS6 BUS7
3-1
5.1
6.1
BUS1
L
Front left
L
Front left
L
Front left
BUS2
R
Front right
R
Front right
R
Front right
BUS3
C
Center
Ls
Rear left
Ls
Rear left
BUS4
S
Surround
Rs
Rear right
Rs
Rear right
—
C
Center
C
Center
—
LFE
Subwoofer
Bs
Rear center
—
—
LFE
Subwoofer
Tip: You can set the surround pan either independently of normal panpots or in unison with them.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Setting Up and Selecting Surround Pan Modes
53
Setting Up and Selecting
Surround Pan Modes
To configure the surround environment, select 3-1, 5.1, or 6.1
Surround mode on the 01V96i and connect a DAW or multi-channel monitoring system to the 01V96i.
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAN/ROUTING] button repeatedly until the Pan/Route | Surr
Mode page appears.
1 2
• 3-1 Surround
• 5.1 Surround
• 6.1 Surround
3
1
SURROUND MODE
This parameter enables you to select a Surround mode by using the following buttons. The button that is turned on
(highlighted) indicates the currently-selected Surround mode.
• STEREO.................. The 01V96i uses normal stereo mode (default).
• 3-1............................. Selects 3-1 Surround mode.
• 5.1 ............................. Selects 5.1 Surround mode.
• 6.1 ............................. Selects 6.1 Surround mode.
2
PAN/SURR LINK
When this button is turned on, Input Channel panpots and stereo surround panning are linked.
3
Press this button to display the Surr/Bus Setup page, which enables you to change the Surround Channel to
Bus Out assignment.
2.
Move the cursor to the Surround mode button you want to use.
When you move the cursor to one of these buttons, speaker icons appear, indicating a typical listening position and the Surround Channel to Bus Out configuration.
3.
Press the [ENTER] button.
The confirmation window for changing the Surround mode appears.
4.
Move the cursor to the YES button, then press
[ENTER].
The 01V96i enters the selected Surround mode.
5.
To link the Input Channel Pan setting with the stereo surround panning, move the cursor to the PAN/SURR LINK button, then press
[ENTER].
When the PAN/SURR LINK button is turned on, adjusting the Input Channel pan settings will also change the stereo surround panning accordingly, and vice versa.
6.
To change the Surround Channel to Bus Out assignment, move the cursor to the
SURR/BUS SETUP button, then press [ENTER].
01V96i—Reference Manual
54
Surround Pan
The DIO/Setup | Surr Bus page appears.
3 1 2
1
BUS1–BUS8
These parameters select channels to be assigned to the
Bus Outs in 3-1, 5.1, and 6.1 Surround modes.
2
INIT
These buttons reset the channel assignment to the default setting.
3
Surround LR to Stereo
When this check box is on, the left and right front signals of the surround channels are output from the STEREO
L/R connectors.
7.
To change the assignment, move the cursor to the desired Bus parameter, rotate the
Parameter wheel to select a channel, then press [ENTER].
The channels are swapped between the selected Bus and the Bus to which the channel assigned to the selected Bus was assigned previously.
Tip:
• Pressing the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly also displays the Surr Bus page.
• Available Bus Outs vary depending on the Surround mode. For example, in 3-1 Surround mode, Bus Outs 1–4 are available. In 5.1 Surround mode, Bus Outs 1–6 are available, and in 6.1 Surround mode, Bus Outs 1–7 are available.
8.
Depending on the selected Surround mode or applications, patch the Bus Out signals to the outputs, ADAT OUT channels, or slot output channels. Connect a playback device or
MTR to the output connectors.
■ Surround Pan Recording
To record surround pan movement to a DAW, patch the corresponding bus outs to the TO HOST USB port’s output channels, sending them to the DAW’s tracks.
The following diagram illustrates an example of recording each channel’s signal into a DAW when using 5.1 Surround mode.
01V96i
Input Channel 1
Input Channel 2
Input Channel 3
SURROUND
PAN
LFE LEVEL
SURROUND
PAN
LFE LEVEL
SURROUND
PAN
LFE LEVEL
BUS1 (L) BUS2 (R) BUS3 (Ls) BUS4 (Rs) BUS5 (C) BUS6 (LFE)
USB
USB 1
USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
USB 5
USB 6
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
Track 5
Track 6
DAW
01V96i—Reference Manual
Setting Up and Selecting Surround Pan Modes
55
■ Surround Pan Monitoring
To monitor surround pan movement, patch the Bus Outs to the analog outputs, to which a monitoring system is connected.
The following diagram illustrates an example in which Bus Out 1/2 (left and right front channel) signals are output from the STE-
REO OUT L/R connectors and Bus Out 3–6 signals are output from the OMNI OUT 1–4 connectors in 5.1 Surround mode.
01V96i
Input Channel 1
Input Channel 2
Input Channel 3
SURROUND
PAN
LFE LEVEL
SURROUND
PAN
LFE LEVEL
SURROUND
PAN
LFE LEVEL
BUS1 (L) BUS2 (R) BUS3 (Ls) BUS4 (Rs) BUS5 (C)
Subwoofer
Front L Center Front R
STEREO OUT L
STEREO OUT R
OMNI OUT 1
OMNI OUT 2
OMNI OUT 3
OMNI OUT 4
Front L
Front R
Rear L
Rear R
Center
Subwoofer
Multi-channel amplifier
Rear L Rear R
Tip: To output left and right front signals of the surround channels from the STEREO OUT L/R connectors, turn on the Surround LR to Stereo checkbox on the Surr Bus page.
01V96i—Reference Manual
56
Surround Pan
Surround Panning
You can set the surround pan parameters for each Input
Channel.
1.
Make sure that the 01V96i is in any Surround mode except Stereo, then press the [SEL] button of the channel for which you want to set surround pan.
2.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAN/ROUTING] button repeatedly until the Pan/Route | Ch
Edit page appears.
The Ch Edit page displays the selected Input Channel, and its surround pan setting and available pair partner.
The following display page is an example in 6.1 Surround mode.
2 3 1
4 5 6 7 9 8
The following parameters are available on this page:
1
Surround pan graph
This graph indicates the pan positions in a two-dimensional field, with the listening position in the center. A small diamond ( ) indicates the current surround pan position. You can move the current surround pan position ( ) directly to one of the speaker icons by selecting its icon, then pressing [ENTER].
2
Trajectory patterns
These buttons represent seven trajectory patterns that determine how the surround pan moves when you operate the Parameter wheel or the [INC]/[DEC] buttons.
3
FAST
Turning on this button increases the speed of sound images panned via the Parameter wheel.
4
Trajectory pattern parameters
These parameters fine-tune the surround pan trajectory pattern.
• WIDTH ............This parameter sets the left-to-right width of the selected trajectory pattern.
• DEPTH .............This parameter sets the front-to-rear width of the selected trajectory pattern.
• OFFSET ............This parameter offsets the left-to-right direction of the selected trajectory pattern.
• OFFSET ............This parameter offsets the front-to-rear direction of the selected trajectory pattern.
5
LFE
This parameter control sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) Channel signal routed to the subwoofer, and appears only in 5.1 and 6.1 Surround modes.
6
F/R
In 6.1 Surround mode, F and R parameter controls appear. The F parameter control determines how the
Front Center signal is fed to the Left and Right channels, and the R parameter control determines how the rear surround signal is fed to the Left and Right surround channels.
6
DIV
This parameter control, instead of the F/R parameter control, appears in 3-1 or 5.1 Surround mode, and determines how the Center signal is fed to the Left, Right, and
Center channels. It is expressed as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100%. When you set the parameter to 100, the
Center signal is fed to only the Center channel. When you set the parameter to 0, the Center signal is fed to only the
Left and Right channels. When you set the parameter to
50, the Center signal is fed equally to the Left, Right, and
Center channels.
7
LINK
This button is available only in 6.1 Surround mode. When you turn on this button, the F and R controls are set to the same value, and linked together.
8
ST LINK
Turning on this button links the surround pan parameters of two Input Channels that are currently displayed on the page (Stereo Link function). You can link the surround pan parameters of two channels regardless of whether they are paired.
9
PATTERN
When Input Channels are linked by the Stereo Link function, the seven patterns selectable here determine how the linked surround pan moves via the Parameter wheel and the [INC]/[DEC] buttons.
01V96i—Reference Manual
3.
Select one of seven trajectory patterns by turning on the corresponding trajectory pattern button.
The following patterns are available:
• ......The sound image moves between left and right.
Surround Panning
57
• ......The sound image moves while tracing a circle or oval. With this pattern, you can also fine-tune the radius and shape of the circle or oval using the
WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET ( ), and OFFSET
( ) parameters.
•
36 40 40 56
......The sound image moves between front and rear.
•
36 40 40 56
......The sound image moves from front left to rear right. With this pattern, you can also fine-tune the trajectory by using the WIDTH, DEPTH,
OFFSET ( ), and OFFSET ( ) parameters.
•
36 36 36 12 8 8 44 16 20 16
......The sound image moves from front right to rear left. With this pattern, you can also fine-tune the trajectory using the WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET
( ), and OFFSET ( ) parameters.
•
36 36 36 12 8 8 44 16 20 16
......The sound image moves between left and right while tracing an arc. With this pattern, you can also fine-tune the radius and shape of the arc using the WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET ( ), and
OFFSET ( ) parameters.
44 48 32 24 24 24 60 40 52 40
4.
If necessary, fine-tune the trajectory by editing the WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET ( ), and
OFFSET ( ) parameter values.
5.
To move the sound image, move the cursor to anywhere outside the parameter boxes, then rotate the Parameter wheel.
The sound image of the selected channel moves along the selected trajectory pattern.
Tip: You can also adjust the front and rear or left and right movement, the trajectory pattern and other parameters from an external MIDI device by assigning the surround param-
eters to MIDI Control Changes (see page 104).
6.
To link the surround pan settings of two channels displayed on the page, turn on the ST
LINK button.
Use the PATTERN parameter box below the ST LINK button to specify how you want the linked surround pan to move.
The following table shows how the sound images on two linked channels move when different trajectory patterns and stereo link patterns are combined. A solid line indi- cates the movement of the selected channel, and a dotted line indicates the movement of the linked partner .
Trajectory
Patterns
•
40 48 44 44 20 32 28 56 32 24
......The sound image moves between front and rear while tracing an arc. With this pattern, you can also fine-tune the radius and shape of the arc using the WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET ( ), and
OFFSET ( ) parameters.
40 48 44 44 20 32 28 56 32 24
01V96i—Reference Manual
58
Surround Pan
7.
To list multiple-channel surround pan settings, press the [PAN/ROUTING] button repeatedly until the Pan/Route | Surr1-16,
Surr17-32, or Surr ST IN page appears.
These pages display and enable you to edit the surround pan settings for 16 channels.
1
2
3
1
Surround pan graphs
These graphs display the trajectory patterns and the current pan positions for the Input Channels.
2
parameter box
This parameter box enables you to move the surround pan setting of the selected channel left and right.
3
parameter box
This parameter box enables you to move the surround pan setting of the selected channel front and rear.
8.
To move the sound image of each channel on these pages, move the cursor to the desired channel, then rotate the Parameter wheel.
The pan setting of the channel changes along the trajectory pattern. Press [ENTER] to display the currently-selected channel’s CH Edit page.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters
59
Grouping
Channels &
Linking
Parameters
This chapter describes how to group faders or [ON] buttons for multiple channels and link the EQ or compressor parameters for simultaneous operation.
• Compressor Link
Input or Output Channel compressor parameters can be linked. There are four compressor links for Input Channels and Output Channels respectively.
All channels in a compressor link share the same compressor parameter settings. When you change a compressor parameter value for one of the linked channels, the change is applied to all other linked channels.
Tip: Compressor Link is not available for the ST IN Channels, since they do not feature compressors.
Grouping & Linking
On the 01V96i, you can group faders or [ON] buttons for multiple Input Channels (Input Channels 1–32, ST IN Channels 1–4) or multiple Output Channels (Bus Outs 1–8, Aux
Outs 1–8, Stereo Out) and link the EQ or compressor parameters.
The following elements can be grouped or linked within
Input Channels or Output Channels.
• Fader group
Input Channel or Output Channel faders (or level controls) can be grouped. There are eight Input Channel
Fader groups and four Output Channel Fader groups.
When channel faders or level controls are grouped, operating any one of them enables you to control the level of the other grouped faders or level controls while maintaining the relative level differences.
Also, the 01V96i features a Fader Group Master function that enables you to control the level of all grouped channels using the Group Master level while maintaining the relative level balance between channels.
• Mute group
Input Channel or Output Channel [ON] buttons can be grouped. There are eight Input Channel mute groups and four Output Channel mute groups. When channel [ON] buttons are grouped, pressing any one of them turns the
[ON] buttons for all the grouped channels on or off. A mute group can include On channels and Off channels at the same time, which turn off or on respectively when you press any one of the grouped [ON] buttons.
Also, the 01V96i features a Mute Group Master function that enables you to mute grouped channels using the
Master Mute buttons.
• EQ Link
Input or Output Channel EQ parameters can be linked.
There are four EQ links for Input Channels and Output
Channels respectively.
All channels in an EQ link share the same EQ parameter settings. When you change an EQ parameter value for one of the linked channels, the change is applied to all other linked channels.
Using Fader Groups and
Mute Groups
Follow the steps below to group faders or [ON] buttons for
Input Channels or Output Channels.
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAIR/GROUP] button repeatedly until one of the pages that contains the desired group and channels appears.
• In Fader page
This page enables you to set Fader groups (A–H) for
Input Channels 1–32 and ST IN Channels 1–4.
• Out Fader page
This page enables you to set Fader groups (Q–T) for Bus
Outs (1–8), Aux Outs (1–8) and Stereo Out.
In Fader page
• In Mute page
This page enables you to set Mute groups (I–P) for Input
Channels 1–32 and ST IN Channels 1–4 respectively.
01V96i—Reference Manual
60
Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters
• Out Mute page
This page enables you to set Mute groups (U–X) for Bus
Outs (1–8), Aux Outs (1–8) and Stereo Out.
In Mute page
2.
Press the up ( ) or down ( ) button to select a group.
5.
To turn a group on or off, move the corresponding button in the ENABLE column, then press [ENTER].
When the group Enable button is turned off, the corresponding group is temporarily cancelled.
6.
To use a fader group, operate one of the faders or level controls for the grouped channels.
Note:
• If you wish to change the relative level balance between the grouped channels while this page is displayed, first turn off the Enable button or remove the channels for which you want to change the level from the group.
• If other pages are displayed, press and hold down the [SEL] button for the desired channels to temporarily remove them from the group, then change the level balance.
7.
To use a mute group, press one of the [ON] buttons for the grouped channels.
All channels in the group switch their on/off status.
Note:
• While a mute group is enabled, you cannot turn a subset of the grouped channels on or off.
• If you wish to turn a subset of the grouped channels on or off, first turn off the Enable button, or remove the channels you wish to turn on or off from the group.
3.
Press the [SEL] button for a channel you wish to add to the group.
The selected channel is marked with “ ” and the channel is added to the group.
Example: Input Channels 1–4, 7, 8, and 15, 16 have been added to Fader group C.
Tip:
• If you add one channel from a pair to a group, the pair partner is automatically added to the group.
• You can also select a channel on another layer by switching layers.
4.
In the same way, press the [SEL] button for other channels you wish to add to the group.
The relative level of the faders for the grouped channels is determined by the position of the faders when the channels were added to the group.
The On/Off status of the grouped channels is determined by the [ON] button status when the channels were added to the group.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Using Fader Group Master
The 01V96i features a Fader Group Master function that enables you to control the level of all channels using the Group
Master level while maintaining the relative balance between channels, much like a VCA group on an analog mixing console.
While this function is enabled, channel fader operation does not affect channel levels in the corresponding Fader group.
1.
After you perform Step 5 in “Using Fader
Groups and Mute Groups” on page 59, use
the cursor buttons to select the INPUT FADER
MASTER check box or the OUTPUT FADER
MASTER check box, then press [ENTER] to turn on the Fader Group Master function.
2.
When the Fader Master check box is checked, you can set channel levels of the Fader groups in the Master column.
When the Master column is selected, repeatedly pressing the [ENTER] button turns the Fader group on and off.
You can also make these settings in the In Master page or
Out Master page, as shown below.
3.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button repeatedly until the Group | In Master or
Group | Out Master page appears.
Using Fader Group Master
61
4.
Use the cursor buttons to select parameters, then use the Parameter wheel, [INC]/[DEC] buttons, or [ENTER] button to set the parameters.
• INPUT/OUTPUT FADER MASTER
When this check box is checked, you can set the master levels for the Fader groups. The resultant Channel level equals the corresponding Channel fader level plus the
Group Master level.
• ALL NOMINAL
This button resets the master levels for all Fader groups to nominal.
• ON/OFF
This turns each Input Fader group on or off. This function works like a VCA mute on an analog mixing console.
• Faders
These faders adjust the master levels of the Fader groups.
Fader knobs are highlighted when faders are set to 0.0 dB.
Press the [ENTER] button to set the currently-selected fader to 0.0 dB.
You can also control the parameters from the channel strips on the control surface as described below by using the User Assignable Layer of the Remote Layers. See
page 110 for information on the User Assignable Layer.
• [SEL] buttons
These buttons move the cursor on the In Master page or
Out Master page.
• [SOLO] buttons
These buttons turn the Solo function of each Fader group on and off. You can monitor all the channels in each Fader group.
• Channel Faders
The channel faders enable you to set the master level for each Fader group.
01V96i—Reference Manual
62
Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters
Using Mute Group Master
In addition to the Mute Group function that links the operation of channel [ON] buttons, the 01V96i features a Mute
Group Master function that enables you to mute grouped channels using the Master Mute buttons in a manner similar to using a mute group on an analog mixing console. While this function is enabled, the [ON] buttons for grouped channels will not be linked.
1.
After you perform Step 5 in “Using Fader
Groups and Mute Groups” on page 59, use
the cursor buttons to select the INPUT MUTE
MASTER check box or OUTPUT MUTE MAS-
TER check box, then press [ENTER] to turn on the Mute Group Master function.
Linking EQ and
Compressor Parameters
Follow the steps below to link EQ or compressor parameters for Input Channels or Output Channels. This function enables you to set EQ or compressor parameters for multiple channels to the same values simultaneously.
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAIR/GROUP] button repeatedly until one of the following pages appears.
• In EQ page
This page enables you to set EQ links (a–d) for Input
Channels 1–32 and ST IN Channels 1–4.
2.
When the Mute Master check box is checked, use the group MASTER MUTE buttons to mute or unmute the groups.
If channels are muted via the Mute Master function, the channel [ON] button indicators flash. It is useful if you assign the MASTER MUTE buttons to USER DEFINED
KEYS buttons.
• Out EQ page
This page enables you to set EQ links (e–h) for Bus Outs
(1–8), Aux Outs (1–8) and Stereo Out.
01V96i—Reference Manual
• In Comp page
This page enables you to set Compressor links (i–l) for
Input Channels 1–32.
Linking EQ and Compressor Parameters
63
2.
Press the up ( ) or down ( ) cursor button to select a link to which you want to add channels.
• Out Comp page
This page enables you to set Compressor links (m–p) for
Bus Outs (1–8), Aux Outs (1–8) and Stereo Out.
3.
Press the [SEL] button for a channel you wish to add to the EQ or Compressor link.
The selected channel is marked with “ ” and the channel is added to the link.
Example: Input Channels 1–4, 7, 8, 12 and 14 have been added to EQ link b.
Tip:
• If you add one channel from a pair to a link, the pair partner is automatically added to the link.
• You can also select a channel on another layer by switching layers.
4.
In the same way, press the [SEL] button for other channels you wish to add to the link.
The EQ or compressor settings for the first channel added to the link are applied to all subsequently-added channels.
5.
After all desired channels are added to the link, edit the EQ or compressor parameters for one of the linked channels.
The edits for the EQ or compressor parameters are applied to the rest of the linked channels.
01V96i—Reference Manual
64
Internal Effects
Internal Effects
This chapter describes how to use the 01V96i’s internal effects processors.
About the Internal Effects
The 01V96i features four internal multi-effects processors.
These effects processors offer numerous types of effects, including reverbs, delays, modulation-based effects, and combination effects designed especially for use with surround sound.
Note: When the 01V96i operates at a high sampling frequency
(88.2 kHz or 96 kHz), you can use only Effects processors 1 and 2.
Processor inputs and outputs can be patched to various sources. For example, effects processor inputs can be fed from the Aux Sends and output to ST IN Channels (effects send/return). Effects processors can also be inserted into
Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Outs, or the Stereo Out.
Effects processors 1 through 4 create 1-in/2-out or
2-in/2-out effects.
AUX1-8
INSERT OUT
1
2
EFFECT 1
1
2
1
2
EFFECT 2
1
2
1
2
EFFECT 3
1
2
1
2
EFFECT 4
1
2
The 01V96i also features the Effects library, which contains 56 preset programs (including Add-On Effects) and 72 user programs.
Using Effects Processors via Aux Sends
You can use effects processors via Aux Sends by patching effects processor inputs to Aux Outs, and effects processor outputs to ST IN Channels.
1.
Recall an effect program you wish to use.
Refer to page 76 for more information on recalling effect
programs.
2.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] button repeatedly until the Patch | Effect page appears.
This page enables you to patch all inputs and outputs of
Effects processors 1–4.
1 3 2
This page contains the following parameters:
1
IN
These parameter boxes select the signals to be fed to the effects processors.
2
OUT
These parameter boxes select the destination of the signals output from the effects processors.
3 button
This button recalls the FX1 Edit–FX4 Edit pages, which enable you to adjust the effect parameters.
01V96i—Reference Manual
3.
To select a signal to be input to the effects processor, move the cursor to the desired In parameter box, select a signal from the following options, then press [ENTER].
• – ................................ No assignment
• AUX1–8 .................. Aux Sends 1–8
• INS CH1–32........... Input Channel 1–32 Insert Out
• INS BUS1–8 ........... Bus 1–8 Insert Out
• INS AUX1–8 .......... Aux Send 1–8 Insert Out
• INS ST-L/R............. Stereo Out Insert Out
To use the internal effects processors via Aux Sends, select Aux 1–8 (in most cases).
You can patch a different signal to the other input of
2-in/2-out effect programs.
Tip:
• You can patch a signal to multiple effect inputs.
• Move the cursor to an IN parameter box and press the
[ENTER] button. The Patch Select window appears. This window enables you to select the input source quickly.
4.
To patch a signal output from the effects processor, move the cursor to the desired OUT parameter box, select the signal destination from the following options, then press
[ENTER].
• – ...............................................No assignment
• CH1–32..................................Input Channels 1–32
• ST IN 1L–ST IN 4R.............ST IN Channels 1L–4R
• INS CH1–32..........................Input Channel Insert In
• INS BUS1–8 ..........................Bus 1–8 Insert In
• INS AUX1–8 .........................Aux 1–8 Insert In
• INS ST-L & INS ST-R .........Stereo Bus Insert In
To use the internal effects processors via Aux Sends, select CH 1–32 or ST IN 1–4 (in most cases). The channels you assign here will become the effects return channels.
You can patch a different channel to the other output of a
1-in/2-out or 2-in/2-out effect program to create stereo effects.
Tip:
• If you select an ST IN Channel as the destination, you can patch the L and R channel signals separately.
• You can also use the Patch Select window to set the OUT parameter boxes, as explained in Step 3.
• The number of inputs available for each effect varies depending on the type of effect programs initially recalled.
Note: You cannot select a channel as the destination of multiple effect signals. If you select a channel that is already selected in another OUT parameter box, that OUT parameter box switches its indicator to “–” (not assigned).
Inserting the Internal Effects into Channels
65
5.
Adjust the level of Aux Sends patched to the effects processor.
Refer to “Aux Outs” on page 36 for information on setting
the Aux Sends.
Note: Do not raise the level of the Aux Sends (patched to the effects processor’s input) on the effects return channels. Otherwise, the signal will return to the same channel, creating a signal loop and possibly damaging your speakers.
Tip: Use the Master layer fader to adjust the final Aux Send output level. At this time, you can view the level on the Meter
| Master page.
6.
Adjust the level, pan, and EQ of the Input
Channels patched to the effect outputs.
Tip: To mix the effects sound returned via the Aux sends with the original dry sound, set the effect’s MIX BALANCE parameter to 100% (only the effects sound will be output).
Inserting the Internal
Effects into Channels
You can insert the internal effects into certain Input Channels or Output Channels (Bus 1–8, Aux Bus 1–8, or the Stereo
Bus).
Note:
• You cannot use Insert In and Out for ST IN Channels.
• If effects are inserted in channels, you cannot use those effects via Aux Sends or insert them into other channels.
1.
Select an internal Effects processor (1–4), then recall the desired effect programs.
2.
Press the [SEL] button of the Input Channel or Output Channel into which you want to insert the selected effects.
Tip: Repeatedly pressing the STEREO [SEL] button toggles between the left and right Stereo Bus channels.
3.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS
[ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until the /Ins/Dly | Insert page appears.
01V96i—Reference Manual
66
Internal Effects
4.
Select the effect insertion position using the
INSERT button in the POSITION section.
5.
Move the cursor to the OUT parameter box in the INSERT section, then select the inputs of the effects processor selected in Step 1.
• FX1-1 & FX1-2 ......Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 1
• FX2-1 & FX2-2 ......Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 2
• FX3-1 & FX3-2 ......Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 3
• FX4-1 & FX4-2 ......Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 4
6.
Press [ENTER] to confirm the setting.
7.
Move the cursor to the IN parameter box in the INSERT section, select the outputs of the effects processor selected in Step 1, then press [ENTER] to confirm the setting.
8.
Move the cursor to the ON/OFF button in the
INSERT section, then press [ENTER] to turn on the button.
Effect insertion is now enabled.
Tip:
• After inserting effects to channels, adjust the MIX BAL-
ANCE parameter for the effects, according to the purpose and effects type.
• Move the cursor to an empty IN or OUT parameter box and press the [ENTER] button. The Patch Select window appears, which enables you to quickly select available signal paths.
Editing Effects
To edit effect programs recalled to the internal Effects processors 1–4, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [EFFECT] button repeatedly until the Edit page for the effects processor you wish to edit appears.
Effects processors 1–4 correspond to the following pages:
• Effects Processor 1 ............. FX1 Edit page
• Effects Processor 2 ............. FX2 Edit page
• Effects Processor 3 ............. FX3 Edit page
• Effects Processor 4 ............. FX4 Edit page
These Edit pages contain the following effect parameters.
3 124 7
5 6
1
EFFECT NAME
This parameter displays the name of the effect program currently used by the effects processor.
2
TYPE
This parameter displays the type of effect program currently used by the effects processor. The I/O configuration of the effect program is displayed below this parameter.
3 button
Move the cursor to this parameter, then press [ENTER] to display the Library page for the selected effects processor.
4 button
Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to display the Patch | Effect page, which enables you to assign signals to the inputs and outputs of Effects processors 1–4.
5
MIX BALANCE
This parameter knob enables you to set the balance between wet and dry signals. When the parameter is set to 0%, only the dry signal is heard. When set to 100%, only the wet signal is heard. Turn on the BYPASS button to bypass the currently-selected effects processor.
6
TEMPO
This section enables you to set the tempo and interval of the selected effects, and displays certain parameters only when certain effect types are selected. Use the parameter control on the left side of this section to adjust the value between 25 BPM and 300 BPM. When the MIDI CLK
01V96i—Reference Manual
About Add-On Effects
67
button is on, the 01V96i updates the TEMPO data
(BPM) based on the MIDI Clock information received at the MIDI IN port. You can also specify the tempo by moving the cursor to the TAP TEMPO button and double-clicking the [ENTER] button. The 01V96i calculates the tempo based on the time interval between your two taps (clicks) on the [ENTER] button.
Tip: If the Freeze effect is selected, the TEMPO section displays the record and playback buttons for using the effect, the recording data condition, and a progress bar that indicates the current status.
7
Meters
These meters indicate the input or output levels of the currently-selected effects processor. Select the IN button or OUT button to display the input levels or output levels respectively.
Tip: You can also view the input and output levels of the effects processors on the Meter | Effect 1–4 pages.
Move the cursor to a parameter you wish to change, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to adjust the setting. You can store the edited settings as a new program in the Effects library (see
Note: You cannot change the effects type on this page. To change the effects type, recall a program that uses the desired effects type from the Effects library.
About Plug-Ins
If you installed a mini-YGDAI card that supports the Effects function into Slot, you can use plug-in effects in addition to the internal effects processors.
You can patch Bus signals or channel insert outs to the plug-in input. The plug-in output can be patched to Input Channels or channel insert ins.
To use the plug-in effects, press the [EFFECT] button repeatedly until the Effect | P-In Edit page appears.
For details on using plug-ins, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the plug-in card.
About Add-On Effects
The 01V96i comes with pre-installed Add-On Effects created with VCM technology to faithfully simulate analog circuits using digital processing. Add-On Effects will be stored in and recalled from preset #45 and the subsequent preset programs.
You can also store edited effects in user program #57 and the subsequent user programs.
01V96i—Reference Manual
68
Scene Memories
Scene Memories
This chapter describes Scene memories, which store 01V96i mix and effects settings.
Note:
• Scenes take a snapshot of Input and Output Patch library numbers that are in use at the time the Scene is stored, but exclude current (edited) Input and Output patching.
• If you do not store the edited Input and Output patching to the libraries, recalling a Scene may change the current patching.
About Scene Memories
Scene memories enable you to store a snapshot of 01V96i channel mix settings and internal effects processor settings as a “Scene” in a special memory area.
There are 99 Scene memories, and you can recall any Scene using the display pages or the controls on the top panel.
Tip:
• You can recall Scenes by transmitting Program Changes from
external MIDI devices (see page 103).
• You can back up Scene memories to external MIDI devices by
using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 107).
What is Stored in a
Scene?
The following parameter settings are stored in a Scene:
Scene
Mix parameters
Effects parameters
Remote Layer
Scene settings
Input Patching
Output Patching
Parameters
All channel faders (and level controls)
Channel to Aux Out 1–8 Send levels
Aux Out 1–8 & Bus Out 1–8 levels
All channel [ON] button settings
All channel Phase settings
All channel Attenuator settings
All channel Delay settings (excluding
ST IN Channels)
All channel Compressor settings
(excluding ST IN Channels)
Input channel Gate settings (excluding ST IN Channels)
All channel EQ settings
All channel Pan settings
All channel routings
Fader groups, Mute groups, Fader group Masters, Mute group Masters,
EQ links, and Compressor links
All channel pair settings
Effect programs recalled for Effects processors 1–4 and their parameter settings
Fader and [ON] button status (only when Remote Control Target is set to
USER DEFINED)
Scene titles and Fade Time settings
Currently-selected Input Patch library number
Currently-selected Output Patch library number
About Scene Numbers
Scene memories are numbered with #U or from #00 through
#99. You can store Scenes in Scene memories #01–99. When you recall a Scene, the Scene memory number appears at the top of the display page.
Scene memory #00 is a special read-only memory that contains the default settings of all mix parameters. To reset all mix parameters on the 01V96i to their initial or default values, recall Scene memory #0.
Also, the Initial Data Nominal check box on the Setup |
Prefer1 page (see page 109) enables you to specify whether
Input Channel faders are set to either 0 dB or – dB when
Scene memory #0 is recalled.
Scene memory “Ud” is a special read-only memory that contains the mix settings in effect immediately before the most recently recalled or stored Scene.
To undo or redo
Scene memory recall and store operations, recall Scene memory #U.
When you adjust parameters after recalling a Scene, the Edit indicators appear (“EDIT” at the top of the display), indicating that the mix settings no longer match those of the Scene that was most recently recalled. The contents of the Edit Buffer (where the current mix settings are stored) are retained while the 01V96i is turned off. This allows the 01V96i to restore the edited mix settings when you turn on the power.
Display
Edit indicator
The contents of recalled Scene memory #2 match the current settings on the 01V96i, and the Edit indicator remains off.
The parameters of recalled
Scene memory #2 were edited.
Therefore, the Edit indicators appear, indicating that the current settings on the 01V96i do not match Scene memory #2.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Storing and Recalling Scenes
69
Storing and Recalling
Scenes
You can store and recall Scenes by pressing the buttons on the top panel or using the dedicated Scene memory page on the display.
Note:
• When you store Scenes, make sure that there are no settings in the Edit Buffer that you do not want to store. Make sure that no settings, especially faders, have been adjusted unintentionally.
• If you are not sure of the Edit Buffer’s contents, recall the last
Scene, make the adjustments you want, then store the Scene.
You may wish to store the current Scene to an unused Scene memory, just in case.
Storing and Recalling Scenes
Using the Scene Memory Page
On the Scene Memory page, you can store, recall, write-protect, delete, and edit the titles of Scenes.
1.
Adjust the mix parameters on the 01V96i to the conditions you wish to store as a Scene.
2.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly until the Scene | Scene page appears.
Storing and Recalling Scenes
Using the SCENE MEMORY
Buttons
You can use the SCENE MEMORY buttons to store and recall
Scenes.
1.
Adjust the mix parameters on the 01V96i to the conditions you wish to store as a Scene.
2.
Press the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] or Down
[ ] buttons to select a Scene memory number.
If you select a Scene memory other than the currently-recalled Scene, its number flashes at the to of the display.
Scene memories #U (“Ud”) and #0 (“00”) are special read-only memories, to which you cannot store Scenes.
Also, you cannot store Scenes to write-protected Scene memories.
3.
Press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] button.
The Title Edit window appears, which enables you to name the Scene to be stored.
Tip: You can disable this window by turning the Store Confirmation parameter to Off on the DIO/Setup | Prefer1 page
(see page 109). In this case, the stored Scene will hve the same
name as the one recalled most-recently.
4.
Enter the title, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER].
The Title Edit window closes and the current Scene is stored to the selected Scene memory.
5.
To recall a Scene, press the SCENE MEMORY
Up [ ] or Down [ ] buttons to select a Scene memory number, then press the SCENE
MEMORY [RECALL] button.
Tip: If you turn the Recall Confirmation parameter to On on the DIO/Setup | Prefer1 page, a Scene recall confirmation window for Scene recalls appears before the Scene is recalled
1
2
3
4
5
6 7 8
3.
Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the
[INC]/[DEC] buttons to select a Scene memory, move the cursor to one of the following buttons, then press [ENTER].
1
TITLE EDIT
Select this button to display the Title Edit window, which enables you to edit a selected Scene title.
2
RECALL
This button recalls the contents of the selected Scene memory.
3
STORE
This button stores the current Scene to the selected Scene memory. By default, a confirmation window appears before you store the Scene.
4
CLEAR
This button deletes the contents of the selected Scene memory.
5
PROTECT ON/OFF
This button switches on and off the write-protection of the contents of the selected Scene memory. A padlock icon ( ) appears next to the title of a Scene memory that is write-protected.
6
Library list
Scene memories 01–99 are listed in the library memory title list. The titles of stored Scenes are indicated in the title column. The message “No Data!” appears in the title column of empty library memories. The selected memory appears inside the dotted box between the and marks.
01V96i—Reference Manual
70
Scene Memories
7
PATCH LINK INPUT
This indicates the Input Patch library number that is linked to each scene. When you store a scene, the number of the input patch that was most recently recalled or stored will automatically be linked with that scene. When you recall that scene, this library number will also be automatically recalled. You can also move the cursor to the parameter boxes and change the library numbers.
8
PATCH LINK OUTPUT
This indicates the Output Patch library number that is linked to each scene. When you store a scene, the number of the output patch that was most recently recalled or stored will automatically be linked with that scene. When you recall that scene, this library number will also be automatically recalled. You can also move the cursor to the parameter boxes and change the library numbers.
Auto Scene Memory
Update
If the Scene MEM Auto Update check box on the Setup |
Prefer1 page (see page 109) is turned on, parameter edits are
stored automatically in a Shadow memory, which is available for each Scene. This is called the Auto Update function.
If the Auto Update function is enabled, parameter edits made after the Scene was recalled are stored in the Scene’s Shadow memory. When you again recall the Scene, the contents of the
Original and Shadow memories are recalled alternately.
Therefore, even after you recall the Original Scene mem- ory, you can recall the edited version from Shadow memory to restore the most recent edits .
If the “EDIT” indicator appears at the top of the display, the edited version from Shadow memory has been recalled.
Original Scene
Display
Shadow memory
Edit indicator
If a Shadow memory is recalled, the edited version is stored when you store the Scene. (The contents of the Original and
Shadow memories then become identical.)
01V96i—Reference Manual
Fading Scenes
You can specify the time it takes the Input and Output Channel faders (or level controls) to move to their new positions when a Scene is recalled. This is called Fade Time, and it can be set for each channel in the range of 00.0 through 30.0 seconds (in 0.1 second steps). You can set the Fade Time for each
Scene individually or for all Scenes globally.
Fading Input Channels
To set the Fade Time for Input Channels 1–32 and ST IN
Channels 1–4, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly until the Scene | In Fade page appears. Move the cursor to the desired channel parameter box, then rotate the
Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the Fade Time setting.
1 3 2
1
2
3
4
5
Fading Scenes
71
Fading Output Channels
To set the Fade Time for the Output Channels (Stereo Out,
Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8), press the DISPLAY ACCESS
[SCENE] button repeatedly until the Scene | Out Fade page appears.
The basic operation is the same as on the In Fade page.
1
Global Fade Time
When this check box is checked, a Scene is recalled using the currently-specified Fade Time. (The Fade Time setting stored in the recalled Scene is temporarily ignored.)
This check box setting works in unison with the Out Fade page.
2
ALL INPUT CLEAR
This button resets all channel Fade Times on the page to
00.0 second.
3
INPUT CH1–32/ST IN 1–4
These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for each Input Channel in the range of 00.0 through 30.0 seconds. The Fade Time setting for one channel in a pair works in unison with its partner.
Tip:
• If you operate a fader while fading channels, the fader’s Fade
Time setting is temporarily ignored.
• You can copy the currently-selected Input Channel Fade Time to all Input Channels by double-clicking the [ENTER] button to display a window for copying. This is convenient when you wish to set the Fade Time for all channels simultaneously.
1
BUS1–8
These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for each Bus Out (1–8) in the range of 00.0 through 30.0 seconds.
2
AUX1–8
These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for Aux
Outs 1–8.
3
STEREO
This parameter enables you to set the Fade Time for the
Stereo Out.
4
INPUT MASTER A–H
These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for
Input Fader Group Master A–H.
5
OUTPUT MASTER Q–T
These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for
Output Fader Group Master Q–T.
Tip: You can copy the currently-selected Output Channel Fade
Time setting to all Output Channels by double-clicking the
[ENTER] button.
01V96i—Reference Manual
72
Scene Memories
Recalling Scenes Safely
When a Scene is recalled, all mix parameters are set accordingly. However, in some situations, you can retain the cur- rent settings of certain parameters on certain channels by using the Recall Safe function. You can set the Recall Safe function parameters for each Scene individually or for all
Scenes globally.
To set the Recall Safe function, press the DISPLAY ACCESS
[SCENE] button repeatedly until the Scene | Rcl Safe page appears.
2 1 4
4
RECALL SAFE CHANNEL section
This section enables you to select which channels will remain unaffected by Scene recalls, including Input
Channels 1–32, ST IN Channels 1–4, Bus Outs 1–8, Aux
Outs 1–8, Stereo Out, internal effects, USER DEFINED
Remote layers, and plug-in effects. The Recall Safe function is effective on channels and functions for which the buttons are turned on.
Sorting Scenes
You can sort Scenes in Scene memories.
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly until the Scene | Sort page appears.
1 2
3
1
Global Recall Safe
When this check box is checked, Recall Safe settings stored in Scene memories are ignored and the current settings are retained.
2
SAFE
This parameter enables or disables the Recall Safe function.
3
MODE
The following MODE buttons determine which Safe channel parameters will remain unaffected by Scene recalls. The MODE buttons correspond to the following parameters:
• ALL ...........................All parameters
• FADER.....................Channel faders (or level controls)
• ON.............................Channel On/Off parameters
• PAN ..........................Channel Pan parameters, Stereo Out balance
• EQ .............................Channel EQ parameters
• COMP......................Channel Comp parameters
• GATE........................Channel Gate parameters
• AUX..........................Channel Aux Send levels, Pre/Post
• AUX ON ..................Aux Send On/Off parameters
• DELAY.....................Channel Delay parameters
• ROUTING ..............Channel Routing parameters
Tip: The ALL button is mutually exclusive of the other buttons.
2.
Move the cursor to the SOURCE list ( 1 ) in the left column, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the
Scene memory you wish to move.
3.
Move the cursor to the DESTINATION list ( 2 ) in the right column, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the position to which you want to move the source Scene memory.
4.
Press [ENTER] to move the source Scene memory to the specified destination.
The Scene memory numbers are updated accordingly.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Copying and Pasting a
Scene (Global Paste)
Any channel or parameter settings for the current scene can be copied and pasted into one or more scenes. This function is useful when you want to apply edited parameter settings in the current scene to other scenes.
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly until the Paste SRC page appears.
Copying and Pasting a Scene (Global Paste)
73
5.
Use the Parameter wheel or [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the destination scene(s).
Scenes specified between FROM and TO (inclusive) become the paste destination. You can paste up to 10 scenes at a time.
6.
Use the cursor buttons to select the PASTE button, then use the [ENTER] button to paste the settings.
You cannot paste the settings to write-protected scenes.
To restore the previous settings that existed before the paste operation, click the UNDO button, then press
[ENTER] button. However, if the settings in the scene are changed after the paste operation (such as by saving, clearing, or sorting the scene, or receiving scene data via
MIDI Bulk Dump), the UNDO function is disabled. Also, note that you will not be able to undo the operation after you turn off the power to the console.
2.
Use the cursor buttons, [SEL] buttons, or
Parameter wheel to select the channel category, then use the [ENTER] button or the
[INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the copy source channel.
The number of the source channel is highlighted.
You can also select Group Masters, internal Effects, and a
User Defined Remote layer as copy sources.
3.
Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the copy source parameter, then press the [ENTER] button.
4.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly until the Paste DST page appears.
01V96i—Reference Manual
1
2
3
4
74
Libraries
Libraries
This chapter describes the 01V96i’s various libraries.
About the Libraries
The 01V96i features seven libraries that enable you to store
Channel, Input Patch, Output Patch, Effects, and other data.
You can also quickly recall this data from the libraries to restore previous parameter values.
The 01V96i offers the following libraries:
• Channel Library
• Input Patch Library
• Output Patch Library
• Effects Library
• Gate Library
• Compressor Library
• EQ Library
Tip:
• You can store library data to a computer hard disk using the included Studio Manager software. Be sure to back up your important data.
• You can also store library data to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, by using MIDI Bulk Dump (see
General Library Operation
Most library functions are the same for each library.
1.
Use the buttons on the top panel to locate the desired library pages.
The procedure for locating library pages varies depending on the library. Refer to the latter part of this chapter for more information on how to display the desired library page.
The example below assumes you have located the Input
Patch library page.
An “ ” icon is displayed next to the name of read-only preset memories. You cannot store, clear, or edit the titles of these memories.
Memories #0 and #U are special read-only memories.
Recall memory #0 to reset the parameter settings to their initial values. Recall #U to undo memory recall and store operations.
2.
Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the
[INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the desired memory.
The selected memory appears inside the dotted box.
3.
Move the cursor to one of the following function buttons, then press [ENTER].
1
TITLE EDIT
This button displays the Title Edit window, which enables you to edit the title of the selected memory. Move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER] to confirm the edited title. Refer to “Title Edit Window” in the Owner’s
Manual (booklet) for more information on entering characters.
2
RECALL
This button recalls the contents of the selected library memory. If you turn on the Recall Confirmation parameter on the DIO/Setup | Prefer1 page, the 01V96i displays a memory recall confirmation window.
3
STORE
This button stores the settings to the selected memory.
Before you store the settings, you can enter or edit the title using the Title Edit window.
You can disable the Title Edit window by turning off the
Store Confirmation parameter on the DIO/Setup |
Prefer1 page. If you bypass the Edit Title window, the name “New Data” will be used as a title for the Scene memory.
4
CLEAR
This button deletes the contents of the selected memory.
After you press [ENTER], the 01V96i displays a confirmation window. To execute the delete operation, move the cursor to the YES button in the confirmation window, then press [ENTER].
Note: If you select a memory that already contains settings and execute the delete operation, the settings will be lost.
Make sure that you do not accidentally delete important settings.
The library memory title list is displayed in the middle of the page. The message “No Data!” appears in the title column of empty library memories.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Using Libraries
75
Using Libraries
Channel Library
Channel library enables you to store and recall Input Channel and Output Channel parameter settings. The library contains two preset memories and 127 user (readable & writable) memories.
You can recall only the settings for the currently-selected channels from the Channel library. For example, you cannot recall Input Channel 1–32 settings to ST IN Channels 1–4,
Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8, or Stereo Out, with the exception that memories #0 and #1 can be recalled to any channels.
Follow the steps below to use the Channel library.
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button repeatedly until the View | Library page appears.
1 2 3
If the selected memory’s channel type does not match the type of the destination channel, an alarm mark ( ) and the word “CONFLICT” appear next to the STORED
FROM parameter. These alarms indicate that you tried to recall unrecallable channel settings to the currently-selected channel.
The alarm indicators also appear when the Surround mode, Aux pair, and other non-channel parameter settings originally stored in the memory do not match those for the destination channel. However, if the channel type of the memory and that of the destination channel match, you can recall the settings even with the alarm indicators displayed. (For unmatched parameter settings, the
01V96i will use the settings in the memory that is to be recalled.)
The following preset memories are available for the
Channel library.
No.
0 Reset (– dB)
1
Preset Name
Reset (0 dB)
Description
This preset memory resets all parameters of the currently-selected channel to their initial values and sets the channel fader level to (– dB).
This preset memory resets all parameters of the currently-selected channel to their initial values and sets the channel fader level to 0 dB (i.e., nominal).
4
1
SEL CH
This parameter indicates the currently-selected channel.
2
CURRENT CONFIGURATION section
If the currently-selected channel is an Input Channel
(1–32) or ST IN Channels (1–4), its Surround mode and
Aux configuration information is displayed here.
3
Level meters
These meters indicate the levels of the currently-selected channel and the available partner.
4
STORED FROM
This parameter indicates the channel for which the settings were originally stored in the selected library memory. If the currently-selected library memory contains
Input Channel 1–32 and ST IN Channels 1–4 settings, its
Surround mode and Aux pairing information are also displayed below this parameter.
2.
Use the LAYER buttons to select layers, then press the [SEL] buttons to select channels.
For details on the Store and Recall functions, see “General
Library Operation” on page 74.
Input Patch Library
The Input Patch library enables you to store and recall all
Input Patch settings. The library contains one preset memory and 32 user (readable & writable) memories.
To access the Input Patch library, press the DISPLAY ACCESS
[PATCH] button repeatedly until the Patch | IN LIB page appears. For details on storing and recalling memories, see
“General Library Operation” on page 74.
Input Patch preset memory #0 contains the following settings:
Input Channels 1–16 INPUT connectors 1–16
Input Channels 17–24 ADAT IN Channels 1–8
Input Channels 25–32 Slot Channels 1–8
ST IN Channels 1–4
Internal Effects Processor 1–4
Outputs 1 & 2
01V96i—Reference Manual
76
Libraries
Output Patch Library
The Output Patch library enables you to store and recall all
Output Patch settings. The library contains one preset memory and 32 user (readable & writable) memories.
To access the Output Patch library, press the DISPLAY
ACCESS [PATCH] button repeatedly until the Patch | Out
LIB page appears.
For details on storing and recalling memories, see “General
Library Operation” on page 74.
Effects Library
The Effects library enables you to store and recall Effects processor 1–4 programs. The library contains 56 preset programs
(including Add-On Effects) and 72 user (readable & writable) programs.
Note: The Effects library is shared by Effects processors 1–4. However, only Effects processors 1 and 2 enable the recall of Effect 19
“HQ Pitch” and Effect 42 “Freeze.”
To store and recall settings to and from the library, you must locate the corresponding Effects processor’s page.
To access the Effects library, press the DISPLAY ACCESS
[EFFECT] button repeatedly until the library page for the desired Effects processor appears.
Each Effects processor features the library pages listed below:
• Internal Effects Processor 1 Library ... FX1 Lib page
• Internal Effects Processor 2 Library ... FX2 Lib page
• Internal Effects Processor 3 Library ... FX3 Lib page
• Internal Effects Processor 4 Library ... FX4 Lib page
3 124 5
The Output Patch preset memory #0 contains the following settings:
Slot output channels 1–8
Slot output channels 9–16
ADAT OUT channels 1–8
OMNI OUT connectors 1–4
Bus Outs 1–8
Bus Outs 1–8
Bus Outs 1–8
Aux Outs 1–4
1
EFFECT NAME
This parameter displays the name of the Effects program currently selected by the Effects processor.
2
TYPE
This parameter displays the effects type currently used by the Effects processor. The number of input and output channels for the currently-used effects appears below the
TYPE parameter.
3
Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to display the Effect | FX1 Edit, FX2 Edit, FX3 Edit, or FX4
Edit page to adjust the Effects parameters.
4
Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to display the In Patch | Effect page to assign the input and output signals of Effects processors 1–4.
5
Level meters
These meters indicate the input or output levels of the currently-selected Effects processor. Select the IN button or OUT button to display the input levels or output levels respectively.
01V96i—Reference Manual
For details on storing and recalling programs, see “General Library Operation” on page 74.
The following tables list the preset effects programs in the Effects library:
• Reverbs
No.
Preset Name
1 Reverb Hall
2 Reverb Room
3 Reverb Stage
4 Reverb Plate
5 Early Ref.
6 Gate Reverb
7 Reverse Gate
Type
REVERB HALL
REVERB ROOM
REVERB STAGE
REVERB PLATE
EARLY REF.
GATE REVERB
REVERSE GATE
Description
Concert hall reverberation simulation with gate
Room reverberation simulation with gate
Reverb designed for vocals, with gate
Plate reverb simulation with gate
Early reflections without the subsequent reverb
Gated early reflections
Gated reverse early reflections
Using Libraries
77
• Delays
No.
Preset Name
8 Mono Delay
9 Stereo Delay
10 Mod.delay
11 Delay LCR
12 Echo
Type
MONO DELAY
STEREO DELAY
MOD.DELAY
DELAY LCR
ECHO
Description
Simple mono delay
Simple stereo delay
Simple repeat delay with modulation
3-tap (left, center, right) delay
Stereo delay with crossed left/right feedback
• Modulation-based Effects
No.
Preset Name
13 Chorus
14 Flange
Type
CHORUS
FLANGE
15 Symphonic
16 Phaser
17 Auto Pan
18 TREMOLO
19 HQ.Pitch
20 Dual Pitch
21 Rotary
22 Ring Mod.
23 Mod.Filter
SYMPHONIC
PHASER
AUTO PAN
TREMOLO
HQ.PITCH
DUAL PITCH
ROTARY
RING MOD.
MOD.FILTER
Description
Chorus
Flanger
Proprietary Yamaha effect that produces a richer and more complex modulation than normal chorus
16-stage stereo phase shifter
Auto-panner
Tremolo
Mono pitch shifter, producing stable results (Available for internal effects 1 and 2.)
Stereo pitch shifter
Rotary speaker simulation
Ring modulator
Modulated filter
• Guitar Effects
No.
Preset Name
24 Distortion
25 Amp Simulate
Type
DISTORTION
AMP SIMULATE
Distortion
Guitar amp simulation
Description
• Dynamic Effects
No.
Preset Name
26 Dyna.Filter
27 Dyna.Flange
28 Dyna.Phaser
Type
DYNA.FILTER
DYNA.FLANGE
DYNA.PHASER
Description
Dynamically controlled filter
Dynamically controlled flanger
Dynamically controlled phase shifter
01V96i—Reference Manual
78
Libraries
• Combination Effects
No.
Preset Name
29 Rev+Chorus
30 Rev->Chorus
31 Rev+Flange
32 Rev->Flange
33 Rev+Sympho.
34 Rev->Sympho.
35 Rev->Pan
36 Delay+ER.
37 Delay->ER.
38 Delay+Rev
39 Delay->Rev
40 Dist->Delay
Type
REV+CHORUS
REV->CHORUS
REV+FLANGE
REV->FLANGE
REV+SYMPHO.
REV->SYMPHO.
REV->PAN
DELAY+ER.
DELAY->ER.
DELAY+REV
DELAY->REV
DIST->DELAY
Description
Reverb and chorus in parallel
Reverb and chorus in series
Reverb and flanger in parallel
Reverb and flanger in series
Reverb and symphonic in parallel
Reverb and symphonic in series
Reverb and auto-pan in series
Delay and early reflections in parallel
Delay and early reflections in series
Delay and reverb in parallel
Delay and reverb in series
Distortion and delay in series
• Others
No.
Preset Name
41 Multi.Filter
42 Freeze
43 Stereo Reverb
44 M.Band Dyna.
Type Description
MULTI.FILTER
FREEZE
3-band parallel filter (24 dB/octave)
Simple sampler (Available for internal effects 1 and 2.)
ST REVERB Stereo reverb
M.BAND DYNA.
3-band dynamics processor
• Add-On Effects
No.
Preset Name
45 Comp276
46 Comp276S
47 Comp260
48 Comp260S
49 Equalizer601
50 OpenDeck
51 REV-X Hall
52 REV-X Room
53 REV-X Plate
54 Max100
Type
COMP276
COMP276S
COMP260
COMP260S
EQUALIZER601
OPENDECK
REV-X HALL
REV-X ROOM
REV-X PLATE
MAX100
55 Vintage Phaser
56 Dual Phaser
VNTG PHASER
DUAL PHASER
Description
This emulates the characteristics of an analog compressor that has become a standard in recording studios.
This is a stereo model of Comp276.
This emulates the characteristics of a compressor/limiter of the mid-1970s that has now become a standard for live sound reinforcement.
This is a stereo model of Comp260.
This emulates the characteristics of an analog equalizer of the 1970s.
This is a mastering effect that emulates the tape compression produced by two open-reel tape recorders, a recording deck and a reproduction deck.
REV-X reverb provides a high-density, richly reverberant sound quality, with smooth decay, spaciousness and depth that enhance the original sound.
Three types are available: hall, room, and plate.
This emulates a vintage phaser effect that was manufactured only during the second half of the 1970s.
Rather than limiting itself to reproducing any particular model, this phaser offers an extremely high level of freedom in creating phaser sounds.
This phaser emulates a vintage effect manufactured during the mid-1970s.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Using Libraries
79
Gate Library
The Gate library enables you to store and recall Input Channel gate settings. The library contains four preset memories and
124 user (readable & writable) memories.
Follow the steps below to use the Gate library.
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DYNAMICS] button, then press the [F2] button.
The Dynamics | Gate Lib page appears.
1 2 3 4
Compressor Library
This library enables you to store and recall settings for the compressors on Input Channels, Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8, and Stereo Out. The library contains 36 preset memories and
92 user (readable & writable) memories.
Follow the steps below to use the Compressor library.
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DYNAMICS] button, then press the [F4] button.
The Dynamics | Comp Lib page appears.
1 2 3 4
1
CURRENT TYPE
This parameter displays the currently-selected channel gate type (Gate or Ducking).
2
CURRENT CURVE
This graph displays the current channel gate curve.
3
GR meters
These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction being applied by the gate, and the post-gate levels of the currently-selected channel and its available pair partner.
4
Type & Curve section
The type (Gate or Ducking) and curve of the currently-selected memory is displayed here.
Tip: If you selected an ST IN Channel (1–4), Aux Out (1–8),
Bus Out (1–8), or Stereo Out that does not feature a gate, the
01V96i indicates “XXX has no Gate!” (in which XXX represents a channel name).
2.
Use the LAYER buttons to select layers, then press the [SEL] buttons to select channels.
You can now store the selected channel gate settings or recall the gate library memories to channels. For details
on storing and recalling memories, see “General Library
The following table lists the preset memories in the Gate library:
No. Preset Name
1 Gate
2 Ducking
3
4
A. Dr. BD
A. Dr. SN
Type Description
GATE Gate template
DUCKING Ducking template
GATE
GATE
Gate preset for use with acoustic bass drums
Gate preset for use with acoustic snare drums
1
CURRENT TYPE
This parameter displays the currently-selected channel comp type (Compressor, Expander, Compander Soft,
Compander Hard).
2
CURRENT CURVE
This graph displays the current compressor curve.
3
GR meters
These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction being applied by the compressor, and the post-comp levels of the currently-selected channel and its available pair partner.
4
Type & Curve section
The type and curve of the currently-selected memory is displayed here.
2.
Use the LAYER buttons to select layers, then press the [SEL] buttons to select channels.
You can now store the selected channel comp settings and recall the compressor library memories to channels. For
details on storing and recalling memories, see “General
Library Operation” on page 74. Since ST IN Channels do
not feature compressors, if you select an ST IN Channel, the message “Stereo in has no Comp!” appears on the display.
01V96i—Reference Manual
80
Libraries
The following table lists the preset memories in the Compressor library:
No.
Preset Name Type Description
1 Comp COMP
Compressor for reducing the overall volume level. Use it on the stereo output during mixdown, or with paired Input or Output Channels.
2 Expand EXPAND Expander template.
3 Compander (H) COMPAND-H Hard-kneed compressor template.
4 Compander (S) COMPAND-S Soft-kneed compressor template.
5 A. Dr. BD COMP Compressor for use with acoustic bass drum.
6 A. Dr. BD
7 A. Dr. SN
COMPAND-H
COMP
Hard-kneed compander for use with acoustic bass drum.
Compressor for use with acoustic snare drum.
8
9
10
11
A. Dr. SN
A. Dr. SN
A. Dr. Tom
A. Dr. OverTop
EXPAND Expander for use with acoustic snare drum.
COMPAND-S Soft-kneed compander for use with acoustic snare drum.
EXPAND
COMPAND-S
Expander for use with acoustic tom toms, which automatically reduces the volume when the tom toms are not played, improving mic separation.
Soft-kneed compander for emphasizing the attack and ambience of cymbals recorded with overhead mics. It automatically reduces the volume when the cymbals are not played, improving mic separation.
12 E. B. Finger
13 E. B. Slap
14 Syn. Bass
15 Piano1
16 Piano2
17
18
19
E. Guitar
A. Guitar
Strings1
20 Strings2
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
Compressor for leveling the attack and volume of a finger-picked electric bass guitar.
Compressor for leveling the attack and volume of a slapped electric bass guitar.
Compressor for controlling or emphasizing the level of a synth bass.
Compressor for brightening the tonal color of a piano.
A variation on preset 15, using a deep threshold to change the overall attack and level.
Compressor for electric guitar “cutting” or arpeggio-style backing. The sound color can be varied by playing different styles.
Compressor for acoustic guitar “stroke” or arpeggio-style backing.
Compressor for use with strings.
21
22
23
Strings3
BrassSection
Syn. Pad
COMP
COMP
COMP
A variation on preset 19, intended for violas or cellos.
A variation on preset 20, intended for string instruments with a very low range, such as cellos or contrabass.
Compressor for brass sounds with a fast and strong attack.
Compressor for musical instruments that feature gentle sounds which, depending on the tones, could diffuse, such as synth pad. Intended to prevent diffusion of the sound.
24 SamplingPerc
25 Sampling BD
26 Sampling SN
27 Hip Comp
28 Solo Vocal1
29 Solo Vocal2
30 Chorus
31
32
33
34
35
36
Click Erase
Announcer
Limiter1
Limiter2
Total Comp1
Total Comp2
COMPAND-S Compressor for making sampled percussion sound like real acoustic percussion.
COMP A variation on preset 24, intended for sampled bass drum sounds.
COMP A variation on preset 25, intended for sampled snare drum sounds.
COMPAND-S A variation on preset 26, intended for sampled loops and phrases.
COMP
COMP
COMP
EXPAND
Compressor for use with main vocals.
A variation on preset 28.
A variation on preset 28, intended for choruses.
Expander for removing a click track that may bleed through from a musician’s headphones.
COMPAND-H Hard-kneed compander for reducing the level of the music when an announcer speaks.
COMPAND-S A soft-kneed compander with a slow release.
COMP
COMP
A “peak-stop” compressor.
Compressor for reducing the overall volume level. Use it on the stereo output during mixdown, or with paired Input or Output Channels.
COMP A variation on preset 35, but with more compression.
01V96i—Reference Manual
EQ Library
This library enables you to store and recall EQ settings for
Input Channels, Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8, and Stereo Out.
The library contains 40 preset memories and 160 user (readable & writable) memories.
Follow the steps below to use the EQ library.
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [EQ] button, then press the [F2] button.
The EQ | EQ Library page appears.
1 2 3 4
Using Libraries
81
1
CURRENT TYPE
This parameter displays the currently-selected channel
EQ type (TYPE I or II).
2
CURRENT CURVE
This graph displays the current EQ curve.
3
Level meters
These meters indicate the post-EQ levels of the currently-selected channel and its available pair partner.
4
Type & Curve section
The type and curve of the currently-selected EQ program are displayed here.
2.
Use the LAYER buttons to select layers, then press the [SEL] buttons to select channels.
You can now store the selected channel EQ settings or recall the EQ library memories to channels. For details on
storing and recalling memories, see “General Library
The following table lists the preset memories in the EQ library:
No.
Preset Name Description
1 Bass Drum 1
2 Bass Drum 2
Emphasizes the low range of a bass drum and the attack created by the beater.
Creates a peak around 80 Hz, producing a tight, stiff sound.
3 Snare Drum 1 Emphasizes “snappy” and rimshot sounds.
4 Snare Drum 2 Emphasizes various ranges for that classic rock snare drum sound.
5 Tom-tom 1
6 Cymbal
7 High Hat
8 Percussion
Emphasizes the attack of tom-toms, and creates a long, “leathery” decay.
Emphasizes the attack of crash cymbals, extending the “sparkling” decay.
Use on a tight high-hat, emphasizing the mid to high range.
Emphasizes attack and adds clarity to the high-range of instruments, such as shakers, cabasas, and congas.
9 E. Bass 1
10 E. Bass 2
11 Syn. Bass 1
12 Syn. Bass 2
Produces a tight electric bass sound by cutting very low frequencies.
Unlike preset 9, this preset emphasizes the low range of an electric bass.
Use on a synth bass with emphasized low range.
Emphasizes the attack that is peculiar to synth bass.
13 Piano 1
14 Piano 2
Makes pianos sound brighter.
Used in conjunction with a compressor, this preset emphasizes the attack and low range of pianos.
15 E. G. Clean Use for line-level recording of an electric or semi-acoustic guitar to get a slightly harder sound.
16 E. G. Crunch 1 Adjusts the tonal quality of a slightly distorted guitar sound.
17 E. G. Crunch 2 A variation on preset 16.
18 E. G. Dist. 1 Makes a heavily distorted guitar sound clearer.
19 E. G. Dist. 2
20 A. G. Stroke 1
A variation on preset 18.
Emphasizes the bright tones of acoustic guitars.
21 A. G. Stroke 2 A variation on preset 20. You can also use it with an acoustic-electric nylon string guitar.
22 A. G. Arpeg. 1 Ideal for arpeggio playing on acoustic guitars.
23 A. G. Arpeg. 2 A variation on preset 22.
24 Brass Sec.
Use with trumpets, trombones, or saxes. When used with a single instrument, try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH-MID frequency.
25 Male Vocal 1
An EQ template for male vocals. Try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH-MID parameters according to the voice quality.
01V96i—Reference Manual
82
Libraries
No.
Preset Name Description
26
27
Male Vocal 2
Female Vo. 1
A variation on preset 25.
An EQ template for female vocals. Try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH-MID parameters according to the voice quality.
28 Female Vo. 2 A variation on preset 27.
29 Chorus&Harmo An EQ template for brightening choruses.
30 Total EQ 1
31 Total EQ 2
Use on a stereo mix during mixdown. Sounds even better when used with a compressor.
A variation on preset 30.
32 Total EQ 3
33 Bass Drum 3
A variation on preset 30. Can also be used with paired Input or Output Channels.
A variation on preset 1, with low and mid range reduced.
34 Snare Drum 3 A variation on preset 3, creating a thicker sound.
35 Tom-tom 2 A variation on preset 5, emphasizing the mid and high ranges.
36 Piano 3
37 Piano Low
38 Piano High
39 Fine-EQ Cass
40 Narrator
A variation on preset 13.
Emphasizes the low range of pianos recorded in stereo.
Emphasizes the high range of pianos recorded in stereo.
Add clarity when recording to or from cassette tape.
Ideal for recording narration.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Remote Control
This chapter describes the Remote function, which enables you to control external equipment directly from the 01V96i top panel.
About Remote Function
The 01V96i’s Remote function enables you to control external
DAW (Digital Audio Workstation) equipment, MIDI devices, etc.
There are two types of Remote functions (Remote and
Machine Control):
■ REMOTE (Remote Layer)
To use these types of Remote functions, you must connect the
01V96i to a target device via USB or an optional
MY16-mLAN card installed in the slot, and operate the faders and [ON] buttons on the top panel to control the external device remotely.
You can specify a target device and parameter values on the
DIO/Setup | Remote page. This layer is enabled when you turn on the LAYER [REMOTE] button. During Remote operation, the controls on the top panel enable you to control the external device. (You cannot adjust the 01V96i’s parameters unless you select a different layer.)
You can assign functions of a target device to the controls on the top panel of the 01V96i by using Remote layer. The following targets are available for remote control:
• ProTools
You can remotely control Digidesign Pro Tools.
• Nuendo
You can remotely control Steinberg Nuendo.
• Cubase
You can remotely control Steinberg Cubase.
• General DAW
You can remotely control DAW software that supports the protocol used by Pro Tools.
• User Defined
You can also assign MIDI messages to the faders or [ON] buttons to remotely control a connected MIDI device, such as a synthesizer.
• User Assignable Layer
You can combine the 01V96i channels to create a custom layer. (See Owner’s Manual for more information on this function.)
Remote Control
83
■ Machine Control
By using MIDI Machine Control commands and the
DIO/Setup | Machine page, you can control an external recording machine that is connected to the 01V96i MIDI port, USB port, or optional MY16-mLAN card installed in the slot.
Tip: To control external devices from the 01V96i, you can also use
the User Defined buttons. Refer to “Other Functions” on page 109
for more information.
Pro Tools Remote Layer
The 01V96i features Remote Layer target especially designed for controlling Pro Tools.
Connections and Configuring
Pro Tools
Follow the steps below to connect the 01V96i to your computer via the USB port so that you can control Pro Tools from the 01V96i.
Note: You cannot control Pro Tools via MIDI connections. Be sure to connect your computer via the USB or an optional
MY16-mLAN card installed in the 01V96i slot.
■ Configuring Windows Computers
1.
Download the Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver from the following URL.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
2.
Install the driver in your computer as described in the installation guide included in the downloaded file.
3.
Connect the 01V96i TO HOST USB port to a
USB port on your PC using a USB cable.
4.
Make the necessary settings in Pro Tools.
Refer to the Pro Tools Owner’s Manual for more information about Pro Tools settings.
01V96i—Reference Manual
84
Remote Control
■ Configuring Macintosh Computers
1.
Download the Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver from the following URL.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
2.
Install the driver in your computer as described in the installation guide included in the downloaded file.
3.
Connect the 01V96i TO HOST USB port to a
USB port on your Mac using a USB cable.
4.
Make sure that the 01V96i is powered-on.
5.
Launch Pro Tools.
6.
Choose Peripherals from the Setups menu to open the Peripherals window.
7.
Double-click the MIDI Controllers tab.
8.
Refer to the screen below to set the Type,
Receive From, Send To, and #Ch’s parameters.
The 01V96i can emulate up to two MIDI controllers.
Configuring the 01V96i
Follow the steps below to set up the 01V96i so that you can remotely control Pro Tools from the 01V96i Remote Layer.
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears.
2.
Move the cursor to the first DAW parameter box in the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section, then rotate the Parameter wheel to select USB as the port.
3.
Press [ENTER] to confirm the setting.
4.
Move the cursor to the adjacent parameter box (on the right), then rotate the Parameter wheel to specify the port ID.
Tip: To control Pro Tools remotely, you need one port for every eight audio channels.
9.
When you finish setting the parameters, close the window.
Note: If you select an incorrect port, you will be unable to use the Remote function. Be sure to match the port ID with that specified in the Peripherals window in Pro Tools.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Pro Tools Remote Layer
85
5.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup | Remote page appears.
1
Display
While the Pro Tools layer is selected, you can use the
[F2]–[F4] buttons as well as the left and right [ ]/[ ] Tab
Scroll buttons to select display modes. You can select the following display modes using these buttons:
■ Insert Display mode ( [F2] button)
Press the [F2] button to select Insert Display mode. In this mode, you can assign and edit plug-ins.
2 1 34
6.
Select ProTools (as the target device) for the
Target parameter ( 1 ) located in the upper-right corner of the page.
By default, the Remote layer target is set to ProTools. If another target has been selected, rotate the Parameter wheel to select ProTools.
7.
Press the LAYER [REMOTE] button.
The Remote Layer is now available for control, enabling you to remotely control Pro Tools.
Note: When the Pro Tools Remote layer is selected, the
01V96i’s top panel faders and other channel buttons are available for remote control. To control the 01V96i, you need to select an Input Channel Layer or the Master Layer.
5
1
TARGET
This parameter enables you to select the remote control target device.
2
COUNTER
This counter indicates the current position. This counter works in unison with the timecode counter on Pro Tools.
The display format of the counter is specified in Pro
Tools. The following three check boxes in the COUNTER section indicate the currently-selected format.
• TIME CODE
Pro Tools timecode format is set to “Time Code.”
• FEET
Pro Tools timecode format is set to “Feet:Frames.”
• BEATS
Pro Tools timecode format is set to “Bars:Beats.”
• If no check boxes are selected
Pro Tools timecode format is set to “Minutes:Seconds” or
“Samples.”
3
SELECT ASSIGN
This parameter indicates the current parameter, which can be adjusted via the parameter controls on the page.
For example, Pan, PanR, SndA, SndB, SndC, SndD, or
4
P.WHEEL MODE
This parameter indicates the function currently assigned
to the Parameter wheel (see page 87).
01V96i—Reference Manual
86
Remote Control
5
INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section
This section enables you to insert plug-ins into Pro Tools channels and adjust plug-in settings. Use the left and right
[ ]/[ ] Tab Scroll buttons to change the parameters displayed in this section.
■ Channel Display mode ( [F3]
button)
Press the [F3] button to select this display mode, in which the parameter controls for tracks 1–16 are displayed.
• ASSIGN
Turn on this button to insert plug-ins into Pro Tools channels. (If you are using the TDM system, you can also assign outboard effects processors.)
• COMPARE
You can compare your edits with the original settings by turning on this button. This button works in unison with the Compare button in the Pro Tools Inserts and Sends windows.
• BYPASS
Turning on this button bypasses the plug-ins (see
• INSERT/PARAM
Switching this button to INSERT enables you to assign plug-ins using four rotary controls on the page. Switching this button to PARAM enables you to adjust the plug-in
parameters using the four rotary controls (see page 91).
• Information box
This box displays plug-in parameter names, values, alarm messages from Pro Tools, etc.
• Rotary controls 1–4
These controls enable you to select plug-ins or adjust the selected plug-in parameters.
• Parameter controls 1–16
Channel parameter controls, such as channel 1–16 panpots, Send A–E send levels, etc. are displayed.
■ Meter Display mode ( [F4] button)
Press the [F4] button to select this display mode, in which the level meters for tracks 1–16 are displayed.
• Channels 1–16
The channel 1–16 levels or Send levels are displayed.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Control Surface Operation
When the Pro Tools Remote layer is selected, the 01V96i controls on the top panel engage the following functions:
■ Channel Strip section
• [SEL] buttons
These buttons select Pro Tools channels, inserts, and
Automation mode.
• [SOLO] buttons
These buttons solo Pro Tools channels. The button indicators for the soloed channels light up.
• [ON] buttons
These buttons mute Pro Tools channels.
• Faders
The faders set Pro Tools channel levels, including the audio tracks, MIDI tracks, master fader, Aux Ins, etc. If 16 or fewer channels are displayed in Pro Tools, faders are assigned starting from the left-most channel.
■ FADER MODE Section
• [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] buttons
These buttons select Sends A–E so that you can adjust the corresponding Pro Tools channel send level.
• [AUX 6] button
Press and hold down this button and press the desired
[SEL] button to reset the corresponding channel fader level.
Move the cursor to the parameter control on the display, then press and hold down this button and press [ENTER] to reset the corresponding channel panpot to center.
While you are holding down the [AUX 6] button, the
SELECT ASSIGN parameter indicates “DFLT.”
• [AUX 7] button
When this button is turned on, you can adjust the selected channel panpot using the SELECTED CHANNEL [PAN] control. If you turn on this button while a Channel Display mode page is selected, you can adjust each channel panpot using parameter controls 1–16.
To adjust the stereo channel panpots, press this button repeatedly to toggle between L and R channels.
• [AUX 8] button
Use this button along with the desired [SEL] button to assign a plug-in to the corresponding Pro Tools channel
• [HOME] button
This button turns Flip mode (see page 90) on or off. Flip
mode enables you to adjust the Aux Send parameters using the faders, [ON] buttons, and the [PAN] control.
Pro Tools Remote Layer
87
■ DISPLAY ACCESS section
• [PAIR/GROUP] button
Press this button while a Channel Display mode or Meter
Display mode page is selected to display a Group ID to which each channel belongs.
• [EFFECT] button
Press this button to display or hide the Insert window in
Pro Tools.
■ Display section
• [F1] button
Press this button to reset the Clipping and Peak Hold indicators on Meter Display mode pages.
• Tab Scroll buttons ([ ]/[ ])
These buttons switch the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT parameter settings on Insert Display mode pages.
■ Data Entry section
• [ENTER] button
This button switches the on/off status of the buttons on the display.
• Left, Right, Up, Down ([ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]) cursor buttons
These buttons move the cursor on the display.
• [INC] & [DEC] buttons
The [INC] button works the same as the Enter key on your computer keyboard. The [DEC] button works the same as the Esc key on your computer keyboard.
• Parameter wheel
The Parameter wheel enables you to adjust the currently-selected parameter, or execute the shuttle and scrub operation. By default, it adjusts the value of the currently-selected parameter (The P.WHEEL MODE parameter indicates “Prm.”).
■ USER DEFINED KEYS section
• [1]–[8] buttons
You can assign one of 194 parameters to each of these buttons. In particular, if you assign any of 54 Remote Control parameters to these buttons, you can operate the transport section and select various Pro Tools modes from the
01V96i top panel. For more information on assigning functions to keys, refer to “Using the User Defined Keys” in the Owner’s Manual (separate booklet).
Parameter
DAW REC
DAW PLAY
DAW STOP
DAW FF
Function
Places Pro Tools in Record Enabled mode. The button indicator flashes while the transport section is stopped. The indicator lights up when recording starts.
Starts playback from the current cursor position.
Stops playback and recording.
Fast forwards the cursor position.
01V96i—Reference Manual
88
Remote Control
Parameter Function
DAW REW
DAW SHUTTLE
DAW SCRUB
DAW AUDITION
DAW PRE
DAW IN
DAW OUT
Fast rewinds the cursor position.
Switches the Wheel mode to Shuttle.
Switches the Wheel mode to Scrub
(Jog).
You can audition the pre-roll, post-roll, in-point area, or out-point area by holding down the button to which this function is assigned and pressing a button to which DAW
PRE, DAW POST, DAW IN, or DAW
OUT is assigned.
Plays back from the pre-roll point up to the beginning of the selected area.
Plays back from the beginning of the selected area for a duration specified as the pre-roll.
Plays back to the end of the selected area for a duration specified as the post-roll.
DAW POST
DAW RTZ
DAW END
Plays back from the end of the selected area for a duration specified as the post-roll.
Moves the playback cursor to the beginning of the session.
Moves the playback cursor to the end of the session.
Toggles between on-line and off-line.
Toggles Loop Playback on and off.
DAW ONLINE
DAW LOOP
DAW
QUICKPUNCH
DAW AUTO FADER
DAW AUTO MUTE
DAW AUTO PAN
DAW AUTO SEND
Toggles QuickPunch on and off.
DAW AUTO
SUSPEND
DAW AUTO
STATUS
Correspond to the Automation Overwrite (Auto Enable) functions.
DAW AUTO
PLUGIN
DAW AUTO
SENDMUTE
DAW AUTO READ
DAW AUTO
TOUCH
DAW AUTO LATCH
DAW AUTO WRITE
Select Automation modes.
DAW AUTO TRIM
DAW AUTO OFF
Cancels Automation recording and playback for all channels. When
Automation is interrupted, the LED flashes, and channel strip controls maintain the current settings.
Displays the channel Automation mode (Read, Tch, Ltch, Wrt, or Off).
The mode setting appears at the bottom of each channel on a Channel or
Meter Display page when you press and hold the button to which this function is assigned.
Parameter Function
DAW GROUP
STATUS
DAW MONI
STATUS
DAW CREATE
GROUP
Displays a Group ID (to which each channel belongs) below each channel number on a Channel or Meter
Display page (in all caps for a main group and in lowercase letters for a sub-group).
Pressing the key (to which this function is assigned) enables you to view the current monitoring mode and the channel strip type.
Pressing the key (to which this function is assigned) enables you to execute the function specified in the menu of the Pro Tools Group list.
DAW SUSPEND
GROUP
DAW WIN
TRANSPORT
Suspends all mix groups temporarily.
Press the button again to undo suspension.
Shows or hides the Transport window.
DAW WIN INSERT Shows or hides the Insert window.
DAW WIN
MIX/EDIT
Toggles between the Mix window and Edit window. (Both windows are not displayed at the same time.)
DAW WIN
MEM-LOC
Shows or hides the Memory Locations window.
DAW WIN STATUS Shows or hides the Status window.
DAW UNDO
DAW SAVE
Executes the Edit menu’s Undo/Redo command.
Executes the Edit menu’s Save command.
DAW EDIT MODE
DAW EDIT TOOL
Pressing the button (to which this function is assigned) repeatedly selects Shuffle, Slip, Spot, or Grid edit mode in this order.
Pressing the button (to which this function is assigned) repeatedly selects one of seven edit tools
(Zoomer, Trimmer, Selector, Grabber, Smart Tool, Scrubber, and Pencil, in this order).
DAW SHIFT/ADD Functions in the same way as Macin-
DAW OPTION/ALL tosh keyboard keys (Shift, Option,
Control, and Alt). Pressing one of the
DAW buttons (to which these functions
CTRL/CLUCH are assigned) along with another button enables you to execute vari-
DAW ALT/FINE ous commands.
DAW BANK +
DAW BANK –
Executes the Bank Swap operation.
Pressing the button (to which this function is assigned) switches the entire 16-channel bank.
DAW Channel +
DAW Channel –
Executes the Channel Scroll operation. Pressing the buttons (to which these functions are assigned) enables you to scroll channels horizontally.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Parameter
DAW REC/RDY 1
DAW REC/RDY 2
DAW REC/RDY 3
DAW REC/RDY 4
DAW REC/RDY 5
DAW REC/RDY 6
DAW REC/RDY 7
DAW REC/RDY 8
DAW REC/RDY 9
DAW REC/RDY 10
DAW REC/RDY 11
DAW REC/RDY 12
DAW REC/RDY 13
DAW REC/RDY 14
DAW REC/RDY 15
DAW REC/RDY 16
Function
Pressing the buttons (to which these functions are assigned) places the corresponding channel strips in
Record Ready mode. At this time, the indicator of the button you pressed flashes. It lights up when recording starts.
DAW REC/
RDY ALL
If no channel strips are in Record
Enabled mode, pressing the button
(to which this function is assigned) places all channel strips in Record
Enabled mode. The button indicator flashes if any channel strip in any bank is in Record Enabled mode.
Pressing the button while the button indicator is flashing cancels Record
Enabled mode for all channel strips.
Selecting Channels
To select a single Pro Tools channel, press the [SEL] button that corresponds to the desired channel.
To select multiple Pro Tools channels simultaneously, while holding down one [SEL] button, press the [SEL] buttons of the other channels you wish to add. Press the [SEL] buttons again to cancel the selection.
Setting Channel Levels
1.
Make sure that the FADER MODE [HOME] button indicator is lit steadily.
If the indicator is flashing, press the [HOME] button to turn on the button indicator.
2.
Operate the faders to set channel levels.
Press and hold down the [AUX 6] button and press the desired [SEL] button to reset the corresponding channel fader level.
Pro Tools Remote Layer
89
Muting Channels
To mute Pro Tools channels, press the [ON] buttons. The
[ON] button indicators of muted channels turn off. Grouped channels are muted together.
Press the [ON] buttons again to unmute channels. The [ON] button indicators of unmuted channels light up.
There are two mute modes in Pro Tools: Implicit mute and
Explicit mute. You can check the mute mode by viewing the
[ON] button indicators.
• Implicit mute
This is a forced mute mode in which the channels are muted because other channels are soloed. In this mode, the [ON] button indicators flash.
• Explicit mute
In this mode, the channels are turned off manually. In this mode, the [ON] button indicators turn off.
Panning Channels
You can adjust the Pro Tools channel pan settings.
1.
Press the FADER MODE [AUX 7] button.
The button indicator lights up.
2.
Press the [F3] button to select Channel Display mode.
On a Channel Display mode page, parameter controls
1–16 indicate the pan settings.
3.
Press the [SEL] button of the channel for which you want to adjust the pan setting.
To adjust the stereo channel panpots, press the STEREO
[SEL] button, then press the [AUX 7] button to select the
L or R channel. Pressing the [AUX 7] button repeatedly toggles between the left and right channels. When the left channel is selected, the [AUX 7] button indicator lights up and the SELECT ASSIGN parameter on the display indicates “Pan.” When the right channel is selected, the
[AUX 7] button indicator flashes and the SELECT
ASSIGN parameter indicates “PanR.”
Note: Before you adjust monaural channel panpots, first be sure the [AUX 7] button indicator is illuminated steadily. If the indicator is flashing, operating the [PAN] control will be ineffective.
4.
Adjust the selected channel panpot using the
SELECTED CHANNEL [PAN] control.
5.
To reset the corresponding channel panpot to center, move the cursor to the parameter control on the display, then press and hold down the [AUX 6] button and press [ENTER].
You can reset the pan settings only when the [AUX 7] button indicator is lit steadily.
01V96i—Reference Manual
90
Remote Control
Soloing Channels
To solo Pro Tools channels, press the [SOLO] buttons of the desired channels. Grouped channels are soloed together, and other channels are muted.
Press the [SOLO] buttons again to unsolo the channels.
Configuring Sends A–E as Pre or
Post
You can set Pro Tools channels for the selected Sends (A–E) to pre or post.
1.
Press the [F3] button to select Channel Display mode.
2.
Press the FADER MODE [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] buttons to select the desired Sends (A–E).
3.
To toggle between pre and post, move the cursor to the parameter control on the display, then press [ENTER].
Pressing [ENTER] repeatedly toggles between pre and post.
Setting Send Levels
You can adjust Pro Tools Send (A–E) send levels as follows.
1.
Press the [F3] button to select Channel Display mode.
2.
Press the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] buttons to select the desired Sends (A–E).
3.
Move the cursor to the parameter control of the channel for which you want to adjust the
Send level, then rotate the Parameter wheel.
You can set Send levels by operating the faders if faders,
[ON] buttons, and the [PAN] control are in Flip mode.
Refer to “Flip Mode” for more information.
Muting Sends A–E
You can mute Sends by pressing the [ON] buttons if faders,
[ON] buttons, and the [PAN] control are in Flip mode. Refer
to “Flip Mode” for more information.
Panning Sends A–E
You can pan channel signals sent to stereo Aux Sends by rotating the SELECTED CHANNEL [PAN] control if faders, [ON] buttons, and the [PAN] control are in Flip mode. Refer to the next section for more information.
Flip Mode
In Flip mode, you can use the faders, [ON] buttons, and the
[PAN] control to control send levels, pre/post positions, and mute settings as shown in the following table.
Control
Faders
[ON] buttons
[PAN] control
Normal mode
Channel level
Channel mute
Channel pan
Flip Mode
AUX Send level
AUX Send mute
AUX Send pan
1.
Press the FADER MODE [HOME] button repeatedly so that the button indicator flashes.
The SELECT ASSIGN parameter on the display indicates
“FLIP.”
2.
Press the FADER MODE [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] buttons to select the desired Aux Sends (A–E).
The button indicator of the selected send lights up.
3.
Use the faders, [ON] buttons, and the [PAN] control to control the currently-selected Aux send.
For stereo Aux input channels, you can set the left and right panpots individually. To do this, press the FADER
MODE [AUX 7] button repeatedly. When the button indicator is lit continuously, you can set the left panpot.
When the button indicator is flashing, you can set the right panpot.
Assigning Plug-ins to Pro Tools
Channels
You can assign plug-ins to five inserts available for Pro Tools channel strips as follows.
1.
Press the [F2] button to select Insert Display mode.
2.
Press the FADER MODE [AUX 8] button.
The [AUX 8] button indicator flashes. You can now select a channel to which you want to insert plug-ins.
3.
Press the [SEL] button of each desired channel.
4.
Make sure that the INSERT/PARAM button
( 1 ) is selected in the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Pro Tools Remote Layer
91
If the PARAM button is selected instead, move the cursor to the button, then press [ENTER] to select INSERT.
2 1
5.
Move the cursor to the ASSIGN button ( 2 ), then press [ENTER] to turn on the button.
You can now select plug-ins. If you press another channel’s [SEL] button after you turn on the ASSIGN button, the button turns off. If you wish to assign plug-ins to other channels, turn on the ASSIGN button again.
6.
Move the cursor to one of the four parameter controls, then rotate the Parameter wheel to select a plug-in.
By default, the parameter controls enable you to select plug-ins to be assigned to channel inserts #1–#4. To assign a plug-in to insert #5, press the Tab Scroll button
[ ] to change the indication in the INSERT
ASSIGN/EDIT section.
If you are using the TDM system, you can also assign outboard effects processors.
Editing Plug-ins
You can edit plug-ins inserted in the channel strips as follows:
1.
Press the [F2] button to select Insert Display mode.
2.
Press the corresponding [SEL] button to select the channel that was assigned the plug-in you want to edit.
3.
In the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section, move the cursor to the parameter control (Insert
1–4) that was assigned the parameter you want to edit.
Note: To adjust a plug-in assigned to insert #5, press the Tab
Scroll button [ ] to change the parameter indication in the
INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section, then select a parameter control.
4.
Press [ENTER] to display the parameters.
In the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section, the PARAM button is automatically selected and the Information box indicates the selected plug-in parameters.
You can now use parameter controls 1–4 and the
[ENTER] button to adjust the parameters.
7.
Press [ENTER] to confirm the assignment.
Repeat Steps 6 and 7 to assign more plug-ins to other insert positions in the channel strip.
8.
In the same way, assign plug-ins to other channels.
9.
When you finish assigning plug-ins, press the
[AUX 8] button.
The button indicator turns off.
5.
Use the Tab Scroll buttons to display the parameter value you wish to change.
Most plug-ins feature five or more parameters. To edit the fifth or subsequent parameters, use the Tab Scroll buttons to display the desired parameters and their values in the
INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section. The current page number and the plug-in name appear for a moment immediately after you press the Tab Scroll buttons.
01V96i—Reference Manual
92
Remote Control
6.
Move the cursor to a parameter control, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the
[ENTER] button to adjust the value.
One or two parameters are assigned to a single parameter control. To turn the parameter setting on or off, press
[ENTER]. To modify the parameter variable, rotate the
Parameter wheel.
7.
When you finish adjusting the parameters, move the cursor to the INSERT/PARAM button, then press [ENTER] to switch it to INSERT.
Bypassing Plug-ins
You can bypass plug-ins assigned to Pro Tools channels.
Before bypassing plug-ins, you must press the corresponding
[SEL] button to select a channel to which the plug-ins have been assigned, then press the [F2] button to select Insert Display mode.
To bypass plug-ins, display the parameters of the plug-in you wish to bypass in the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section, then turn on the BYPASS button.
Scrub & Shuttle
By assigning the DAW SCRUB parameter to one of the User
Defined buttons [1]–[8], you can scrub Pro Tools tracks back and forth by turning the Parameter wheel. By assigning the
DAW SHUTTLE parameter to one of the User Defined buttons [1]–[8], you can shuttle back and forth by turning the
Parameter wheel.
1.
Assign the DAW SCRUB or DAW SHUTTLE parameter to one of the User Defined buttons
[1]–[8].
Before assigning parameters to these buttons, you must switch layers to cancel the Remote function. For more information on assigning the user defined keys, refer to
“Using the User Defined Keys” in the Owner’s Manual
(separate booklet).
2.
Press the LAYER [REMOTE] button to enable remote control of Pro Tools.
3.
Make sure that Pro Tools is stopped.
4.
Press the User Defined button to which you assigned the DAW SCRUB or DAW SHUTTLE parameter in Step 1.
You can now use the Scrub or Shuttle function.
5.
Rotate the Parameter wheel.
Rotate the Parameter wheel clockwise to scrub or shuttle forwards. Turn it counterclockwise to scrub or shuttle backwards.
The minimum scrub playback step varies depending on the zoom setting in the Pro Tools Edit window.
6.
To cancel the Scrub or Shuttle function, press the User Defined button or DAW SHUTTLE to which you assigned the DAW SCRUB parameter in Step 1.
Alternatively, you can cancel the Scrub or Shuttle function by pressing the User Defined button to which the
DAW STOP parameter is assigned. The Scrub function is automatically cancelled if you commence playback or fast forward.
Note: The Scrub/Shuttle operation might be stopped unexpectedly by Pro Tools. Therefore, whenever you use the Scrub or Shuttle function, make sure that the P.WHEEL MODE parameter indicates “SCRUB” or “SHUTTLE.” You can check the Scrub/Shuttle function status by viewing the corresponding User Defined button indicator.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Nuendo/Cubase Remote Layer
93
Automation
If you assign a parameter that controls Pro Tools Automation mode (such as DAW Auto Read, DAW Auto Touch, etc.) to one of the User Defined buttons, you can control the Automation settings for each channel by using that User Defined button. For more information on assigning functions to the user defined keys, refer to “Using the User Defined Keys” in the
Owner’s Manual (separate booklet).
Press the STEREO OUT channel [SEL] button. The button indicator lights up, and the Channel 1–16 [SEL] buttons become available for the Automation mode setting.
Press the desired channel [SEL] buttons while pressing the programmed User Defined button to switch the corresponding channels’ Automation settings.
While the channel [SEL] buttons are available for the Automation mode setting, pressing the [SEL] buttons will cause the Fader Touch or Untouch command to be transmitted to
Pro Tools. This is useful for Automation punch in and out recording.
Note: Operating a fader also causes the Fader Touch command to be transmitted. Also, whenever the transport mode changes
(such as Play and Stop), the Fader Untouch command is transmitted.
Depending on the currently-selected Automation mode, the channel [SEL] button indicators operate as follows:
User Defined Keys
Function
Pro Tools
Automation
Mode
DAW AUTO WRITE Auto write
DAW AUTO TOUTCH Auto touch
DAW AUTO LATCH Auto latch
[SEL] Button
Indicators
Flashing red
(Record Ready)
Red (Recording)
DAW AUTO READ
DAW AUTO OFF
Auto read
Auto off
Illuminated steadily
Off
Nuendo/Cubase Remote
Layer
You can remotely control Nuendo and Cubase using the
Remote Layer.
■ Configuring Computers
1.
Download the Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver from the following URL, and install the driver as described in the included installation guide.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
2.
Use a USB cable to connect the 01V96i.
3.
Make sure that the 01V96i is powered-on.
4.
Launch Nuendo/Cubase, select the Device
Setup menu, and set up Nuendo/Cubase so that the 01V96i can communicate with the software.
Refer to the Nuendo/Cubase User’s Manual for more information on setting up the software.
■ Configuring the 01V96i
1.
Refer to page 84 to configure the DIO/Setup
| MIDI/HOST page.
2.
Press the LAYER [REMOTE] button to set the
TARGET parameter to Nuendo/Cubase.
You can now remotely control Nuendo/Cubase using the
Remote Layer.
01V96i—Reference Manual
94
Remote Control
Other DAW Remote Layer
You can remotely control DAW software that supports the
Pro Tools protocol.
■ Configuring Computers
1.
Download the Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver from the following URL, and install the driver as described in the included installation guide.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
2.
Launch and set up the DAW software so that the 01V96i communicates with the software.
Refer to the DAW software’s user’s manual for more information on setting up the software.
■ Configuring the 01V96i
1.
Refer to page 84 to configure the DIO/Setup
| MIDI/HOST page.
2.
Use a USB cable to connect the 01V96i.
3.
Press the LAYER [REMOTE] button to set the
TARGET parameter to General DAW.
You can now remotely control the DAW software using the Remote Layer.
MIDI Remote Layer
If you select USER DEFINED as the target for the Remote
Layer, you can remotely control the parameters of external
MIDI devices (such as synthesizers and tone generators) by operating the channel [ON] buttons, and faders to output various MIDI messages. (This is called MIDI Remote function.)
You can store MIDI messages assigned to the channel controls in four banks. When the 01V96i is shipped from the factory, it includes MIDI settings in these banks, which you can quickly recall to use the MIDI Remote function.
If necessary, you can also assign other MIDI messages to the faders or [ON] buttons to remotely control the parameters of a connected MIDI device.
Using the MIDI Remote
Function
This section describes how to recall and use the factory-preset
MIDI Remote settings stored in the banks.
By default, the 01V96i’s four MIDI Remote banks (Banks
1–4) contain the following MIDI messages.
Bank Usage
1
2
Panning and setting GM sound levels
Setting GM sound effect send levels
3 Setting XG sound levels
4
Adjusting mute, and levels for Cubase series mixer
Control Function
[ON] buttons
Faders
— Volume
—
—
Mute
Effect Send
Volume
Volume
1.
Connect the 01V96i’s MIDI OUT port to the
MIDI IN port of the MIDI device.
REC
SONG SCENE
MIDI IN
MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER
Integrated Sampling Sequencer Real-time External Control Sur face
Modular Synthesis Plug-in System
MIDI OUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A
B
INPUT
(BAL)
INSERT
OUT IN
(UNBAL)
INSERT I/O
A
B
INSERT I/O
A
B
INSERT I/O
A
B
A
B
INSERT I/O INSERT I/O
A
B
INSERT I/O
A
B
INSERT I/O
A
B
INSERT I/O
A
B
INSERT I/O
A
B
A
B
INSERT I/O INSERT I/O
A
B
INSERT I/O
CH1-4
13
14
15
CH5-8 CH9-12
PHANTOM +48V
L
16
R
CH15/16
2TR IN
IN
2TR
OUT
-10dBV (UNBAL)
MONITOR
2TR IN
PHONES
PAD
20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB
-16
GAIN
-60 -16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
DISPLAY ACCESS
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60 -16
GAIN
-60 -16
GAIN
-60 -16
GAIN
-60 -16
GAIN
-60 -16
GAIN
-60 -16
GAIN
-60 -16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
SCENE MEMORY
+4 GAIN -26 +4 GAIN -26 0 LEVEL 10
MONITOR
OUT
0 LEVEL 10
PHONES
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
+4
GAIN
-26 +4
GAIN
-26
13 PEAK
SIGNAL
14 15 PEAK
SIGNAL
16
SCENE DIO/SETUP MIDI UTILITY
/ INSERT/
DELAY
PAN/
ROUTING
PAIR/
GROUP
PATCH
DYNAMICS EQ EFFECT
FADER MODE
VIEW
AUX 2 AUX 3
OVER
-3
-6
-9
-12
-15
-18
-24
-30
-36
0
-48
STEREO
STORE
DEC
RECALL
INC
SOLO CLEAR
AUX 5 AUX
HOME (METER)
LAYER
6 AUX 7
1-16 17-32 MASTER REMOTE
Q
HIGH
FREQUENCY
HIGH-MID
LOW-MID
GAIN
LOW
ENTER
ST IN
SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL
SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO
ON
1
ON
2
ON
3
ON
4
ON
5
ON
6
ON
7
ON
8
ON
9
ON
10
ON
11
ON
12
ON
13
ON
14
ON
15
ON
16
SEL SEL SEL
SOLO SOLO
ON ON
ST IN 1
ON
ST IN 2
10
15
20
30
40
50
0
5
+10
5
30 15
40
20
50
60
70
30
40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
40
50
60
70
30 15
20
30
40
50
30 15
40
20
50 30
60
70 40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
30 15
40
20
50 30
60
70 40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
30 15
40
20
50 30
60
70 40
50
30 15
40
20
50 30
60
70 40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
30 15
40
20
50 30
60
70 40
50
30 15
40
20
50 30
60
70 40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
30 15
40
20
50 30
60
70 40
50
30 15
40
20
50 30
60
70 40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
30 15
40
20
50 30
60
70 40
50
30 15
40
20
50 30
60
70 40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
30 15
40
20
50 30
60
70 40
50
30 15
40
20
50 30
60
70 40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
30 15
40
20
50 30
60
70 40
50
0 0
5 5
10 10
15 15
20 20
30 30
40 40
50
60
70
50
60
70
17
1
18
2
19
3
AUX 3
20
4
AUX 4
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
31
16
32
STEREO
USER DEFINED
KEYS
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
Synthesizer
01V96i—Reference Manual
5
6
2.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears.
1
3.
Move the cursor to the REMOTE parameter box ( 1 ) in the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section, rotate the Parameter wheel to select MIDI, then press [ENTER].
If the MIDI port is already in use, a window confirming the assignment change appears. Move the cursor to the
YES button, then press [ENTER].
Tip: If the REMOTE parameter box is grayed out, proceed to
Steps 4 and 5 to set the TARGET parameter, then return to
Steps 2 and 3.
4.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup | Remote page appears.
5.
Move the cursor to the TARGET parameter box, rotate the Parameter wheel to select
USER DEFINED, then press [ENTER].
The confirmation window for changing the setting appears. Move the cursor to the YES button, then press
[ENTER]. The display changes as follows:
4 1 2 3
MIDI Remote Layer
95
1
TRANSMIT ENABLE/DISABLE
This button switches the MIDI Remote function between enable and disable.
2
INITIALIZE
This button resets the settings stored in the bank selected by the BANK parameter their default settings.
3
BANK
This parameter enables you to select one of four banks.
4
ID, SHORT, LONG
These parameters display the channel names. The ID parameter displays the channel ID (RM01–RM16) for the currently-controlled MIDI device.
5
ON section
This section displays the type of MIDI messages (in hexadecimal or alphabet) assigned to the [ON] buttons for the currently-selected channels (RM01–RM16).
• LATCH/UNLATCH
This button toggles between Latch and Unlatch for [ON] button operation.
• LEARN
When you turn on this button, MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN port are assigned to the DATA parameter boxes.
• DATA parameter boxes
These boxes display the type of MIDI messages (in hexadecimal or alphabets) assigned to the [ON] button).
6
FADER section
This section displays the type of MIDI messages (in hexadecimal or alphabet) assigned to the faders for the currently-selected channels (RM01–RM16).
6.
Move the cursor to the desired bank button
(BANK parameter buttons 1–4), then press
[ENTER].
7.
Press the LAYER [REMOTE] button to select
Remote layer.
You can now use the MIDI Remote function.
8.
Use the faders and [ON] buttons to control the MIDI device.
01V96i—Reference Manual
96
Remote Control
Assigning MIDI Messages to
Channel Controls
You can quickly use the MIDI Remote function if you use the factory presets in the banks. However, you can also assign the desired MIDI messages to the faders or [ON] buttons.
This section describes how to assign MIDI messages to the channel controls, using the example of assigning Hold
On/Off messages (Control Change #64; Values 127 & 0) to the
Channel 1 [ON] button.
1.
Connect the 01V96i’s MIDI IN port to the
MIDI OUT port of a MIDI keyboard to which a Hold On/Off controllable foot switch is connected. Enable the MIDI Remote function on the 01V96i.
5.
Move the cursor to the LEARN button in the
ON section, then press [ENTER].
MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN port of the
01V96i will be assigned to the DATA parameter boxes in the ON section.
6.
Press and hold down the MIDI keyboard foot switch.
The MIDI Hold On message is assigned in the DATA parameter box.
MIDI OUT MIDI IN
MIDI OUT MIDI IN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CH1-4
13
CH5-8 CH9-12
15
PHANTOM +48V
L
A
B
INPUT
(BAL)
INSERT
OUT IN
(UNBAL)
INSERT I/O
A
B
A
B
INSERT I/O INSERT I/O
A
B
A
B
INSERT I/O INSERT I/O
A
B
A
B
INSERT I/O INSERT I/O
A
B
A
B
INSERT I/O INSERT I/O
A
B
A
B
INSERT I/O INSERT I/O
A
B
INSERT I/O
PAD
20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB
-16
GAIN
PEAK
-60
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
-60 -16
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
-60 -16
GAIN
PEAK
-60
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
PEAK
-60
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
PEAK
-60
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
PEAK
-60
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
PEAK
-60
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
PEAK
-60
SIGNAL
14 16
CH15/16
2TR IN
IN
2TR
OUT
-10dBV (UNBAL)
MONITOR
2TR IN
20dB 20dB
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
20dB
+4
GAIN
-26 +4
GAIN
-26 0
LEVEL
10
MONITOR
OUT
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL 13
+4 GAIN -26 +4 GAIN -26
PEAK
SIGNAL 14 15
PEAK
SIGNAL 16
R
PHONES
0
LEVEL
10
PHONES
DISPLAY ACCESS SCENE MEMORY
SCENE DIO/SETUP MIDI UTILITY
STORE RECALL SOLO CLEAR
/ INSERT/
DELAY
DYNAMICS
AUX
FADER MODE
1
PAN/
ROUTING
EQ
PAIR/
GROUP
EFFECT
AUX 3
PATCH
VIEW
AUX 4
AUX 7 AUX 8
OVER
0
-3
-6
-9
-12
-15
-18
-24
-30
-36
-48
STEREO
Q HIGH
HIGH-MID
FREQUENCY
LOW-MID
DEC INC
HOME (METER)
LAYER
1-16 17-32 MASTER REMOTE
GAIN LOW
ENTER
ST IN
SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL
SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO
ON
1
ON
2
ON
3
ON
4
ON
5
ON
6
ON
7
ON
8
SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO
ON
9
ON
10
ON
11
ON
12
ON
13
ON
14
ON
15
ON
16
SOLO SOLO
ON ON
ST IN 1
ON
ST IN 2
15
20
30
40
50
0
5
+10
5
10
0
+10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0
+10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0
+10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0
+10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0
+10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0
+10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0
+10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0
+10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0
+10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0
+10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0
+10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0
+10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0
+10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0
+10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0
+10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0 0
5 5
10 10
15 15
20 20
30
40
50
60
70
15
20
30
40
50
30
40
50
60
15
20
30
40
70
50
30
40
50
60
15
20
30
40
70
50
30
40
50
60
15
20
30
40
70
50
30
40
50
60
15
20
30
40
70
50
30
40
50
60
15
20
30
40
70
50
30
40
50
60
15
20
30
40
70
50
30
40
50
60
15
20
30
40
70
50
30
40
50
60
15
20
30
40
70
50
30
40
50
60
15
20
30
40
70
50
30
40
50
60
15
20
30
40
70
50
30
40
50
60
15
20
30
40
70
50
30
40
50
60
15
20
30
40
70
50
30
40
50
60
15
20
30
40
70
50
30 15
40 20
50
60
40
30
70
50
30 30
40 40
50
60
70
50
60
70
1
17
AUX 1
2
18
AUX 2
3
19
4
20
AUX 4
5
21
AUX 5
6
22
AUX 6
7
23
AUX 7
8
24
AUX 8
9
25
BUS 1
10
26
BUS 2
11
27
BUS 3
12
28
BUS 4
13
29
BUS 5
14
30
BUS 6
15
31
BUS 7
16
32
BUS 8
STEREO
USER DEFINED
KEYS
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
MIDI keyboard
Foot switch
MIDI messages are described below:
• 00–7F
MIDI messages are expressed in hexadecimal.
• END
This message indicates the end of MIDI messages. Subsequent messages assigned in the DATA parameter boxes will be ignored.
• –
This message indicates that no messages are assigned to the DATA parameter boxes.
Tip: When you click the LEARN button to assign MIDI messages, the 01V96i automatically recognizes the end of the messages and assigns END and “–.”
7.
While continuing to hold down the foot switch, turn off the LEARN button.
8.
Move the cursor to the third parameter box
(“7F” in this example), then rotate the Parameter wheel to change the value to SW.
2.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup | Remote page appears, then set the TARGET parameter to USER DEFINED.
You can now use the MIDI Remote function. Refer to the previous section for more information on using the MIDI
Remote function.
3.
Move the cursor to the desired bank button
(BANK parameter buttons 1–4), then press
[ENTER].
4.
Press the [SEL] buttons for the desired channels.
Currently-assigned MIDI messages appear in the ON and
FADER sections.
Tip: You can also choose the desired channels using the ID,
SHORT, and LONG parameters.
“SW” is a variable that changes depending on the [ON] button’s on/off status. You can use the following variables in MIDI messages.
• SW
This variable is selectable only in the DATA parameter boxes of the ON section. When the [ON] buttons are turned on, “7F” (127 in decimal) is output. When the
[ON] buttons are turned off, “00” (0 in decimal) is output.
• FAD
This variable is selectable only in the DATA parameter boxes of the FADER section. When you operate the faders, continuously changing values in the range of 00 to 7F
(0–127 in decimal) are output.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Tip: If “SW” is not assigned in the DATA parameter boxes of the ON section, the current MIDI messages are output.
Note: Be sure to set one of the DATA parameter boxes of the
FADER section to “FAD.” If no “FAD” is assigned, fader operation is ignored.
9.
Move the cursor to the LATCH/UNLATCH button, then press [ENTER] to select LATCH or
UNLATCH depending on how you want the
[ON] buttons to function.
• LATCH.................... Pressing the [ON] buttons repeatedly transmits alternating On and
Off messages.
• UNLATCH............. Pressing and holding down the [ON] buttons transmits On messages, and releasing the [ON] buttons transmits
Off messages.
Tip: Refer to the diagrams below for information on how the
[ON] buttons behave when Latch or Unlatch is selected.
■ When “SW” is assigned:
• LATCH
MIDI data transmission
(SW=7F)
MIDI data transmission
(SW=00)
Off Illuminated Off
MIDI Remote Layer
97
■ When “SW” is not assigned:
• UNLATCH
MIDI data transmission
Off Illuminated Off
Tip: In most situations, select Unlatch if SW is not assigned.
10.
To change the channel name, move the cursor to the ID LONG parameter box, then press
[ENTER] to display the Title Edit window.
For more information on entering names, refer to “Title
Edit Window” in the Owner’s Manual (separate booklet).
Tip:
• Move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then press
[ENTER]. A window is displayed that enables you to reset the parameter settings in the currently-selected bank.
• You can also assign MIDI messages to the parameter boxes manually without using the LEARN button.
• UNLATCH
Off
MIDI data transmission
(SW=7F)
MIDI data transmission
(SW=00)
Illuminated Off
01V96i—Reference Manual
98
Remote Control
Machine Control Function
The 01V96i can control the transport functions and select tracks on external recording machines that support MMC by transmitting commands via the MIDI OUT port or USB port.
Note: Controllable parameters vary depending on the connected devices. Refer to the User’s Manual for the external device for more information on controllable parameters.
1.
Refer to the diagram below for information on connecting the 01V96i to an external device.
• MIDI .................MIDI port
• USB....................USB port
• SLOT .................Slot with an MY16-mLAN (mLAN card) installed
If USB is selected, move the cursor to the adjacent parameter box (on the right), and select one of eight ports.
4.
Move the cursor to the DEVICE ID parameter box, then rotate the Parameter wheel to set the 01V96i MMC Device ID to the same ID number as the external device.
MMC commands are effective on devices that use the same Device ID. Therefore, the MMC Device ID needs to match the ID of the devices you wish to control.
5.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup | Machine page appears.
2 1
MIDI OUT MIDI IN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CH1-4
13 15
CH5-8 CH9-12
PHANTOM +48V
L
A
B
INPUT
(BAL)
INSERT
OUT IN
(UNBAL)
A
B
INSERT I/O INSERT I/O
A
B
A
B
INSERT I/O INSERT I/O
PAD
A
B
INSERT I/O
A
B
INSERT I/O
A
B
A
B
INSERT I/O INSERT I/O
-16
20dB
GAIN
PEAK
-60
SIGNAL
-16
20dB
GAIN
PEAK
-60
SIGNAL
A
B
INSERT I/O
A
B
INSERT I/O
A
B
INSERT I/O
A
B
INSERT I/O
14
16
CH15/16
2TR IN
IN
2TR
OUT
-10dBV (UNBAL)
MONITOR
2TR IN
R
PHONES
20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB
+4 GAIN -26 +4 GAIN -26 0
LEVEL
10
MONITOR
OUT
0
LEVEL
10
PHONES
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
+4 GAIN -26 +4 GAIN -26
13
PEAK
SIGNAL 14 15
PEAK
SIGNAL 16
DISPLAY ACCESS SCENE MEMORY
SCENE DIO/SETUP MIDI UTILITY
STORE RECALL SOLO CLEAR
/ INSERT/
DELAY
DYNAMICS
1
AUX
PAN/
ROUTING
EQ
AUX
2
PAIR/
GROUP
EFFECT
FADER MODE
AUX
3
PATCH
VIEW
4
AUX
OVER
-3
0
-6
-9
-24
-30
-36
-12
-15
-18
-48
STEREO
Q HIGH
DEC INC
AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7
HOME (METER)
LAYER
FREQUENCY
HIGH-MID
LOW-MID
ENTER
GAIN LOW
1-16 17-32 MASTER REMOTE ST IN
SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL
SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO
SEL SEL SEL
SOLO SOLO
ON
1
ON
2
ON
3
ON
4
ON
5
ON
6
ON
7
ON
8
ON
9
ON
10
ON
11
ON
12
ON
13
ON
14
ON
15
ON
16
ON ON
ST IN 1
ON
ST IN 2
0
5
+10
5
10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
15
20
30
40
50
30
15
40 20
50
60
70 40
30
50
30
15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
30
15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
30
15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
30
15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
30
15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
30
15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
30
15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
30
15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
30
15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
30
15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
30
15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
30
15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
30
15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15
5
20 10
30
15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
0 0
5 5
10 10
15 15
20 20
30 30
40 40
50
60
70
50
60
70
17
1
18
2
AUX 2
19
3
AUX 3
20
4
AUX 4
21
5
AUX 5
22
6
AUX 6
23
7 8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
31
16
32
STEREO
USER DEFINED
KEYS
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
MIDI OUT MIDI IN
MMC-supported machine
2.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears.
1
3.
Move the cursor to the PORT parameter box in the MACHINE CONTROL section ( 1 ), then rotate the Parameter wheel to select the
MMC destination.
The following ports and slot are available as the MMC destination.
4 3
This page contains the following parameters:
1
LOCATE/TIME section
This section enables you to set the locate points.
• LOCATE 1–8..........These buttons locate the positions
(specified by the TIME values) on external machines.
• RTZ...........................This Return To Zero button locates the zero timecode position on external machines.
• TIME ........................Locate points are specified in hour/minute/second/frame format.
• CAPTURE ..............These buttons capture the current position on external machines and import the information into the
TIME column.
2
TRACK ARMING section
This section controls the tracks on external machines.
• 1–24 buttons...........These buttons turn external tracks
1–24 on or off, and set or cancel their
Record Ready mode.
• ALL CLEAR............Turning on this button switches all buttons (1–24) simultaneously.
01V96i—Reference Manual
3
TRANSPORT section
This section enables you to control the transport functions on external machines.
• REW......................... This button starts rewind on external machines.
• FF.............................. This button starts fast forward on external machines.
• STOP........................ This button stops external machines.
• PLAY........................ This button starts playback on external machines.
• REC .......................... This button is used in conjunction with the PLAY button to start recording on external machines.
4
FRAMES
This parameter selects the timecode frame rate from 24,
25, 30D (drop frame), and 30.
6.
To control the transport functions, move the cursor to the desired button in the TRANS-
PORT section, then press [ENTER].
7.
If you desire, move the cursor to the buttons and parameters in the LOCATE/TIME section and the TRACK ARMING section, then press the [ENTER] button or rotate the Parameter wheel to control the transport functions on external machines.
Tip: You can also use the programmed User Defined buttons to control Machine Control functions. For more information on assigning functions to the user defined keys, refer to “Using the User Defined Keys” in the Owner’s Manual (separate booklet).
Machine Control Function
99
01V96i—Reference Manual
100
MIDI
MIDI
This chapter describes the 01V96i’s MIDI-related functions.
MIDI & the 01V96i
Using Control Changes, Program Changes, and other MIDI messages enables you to recall Scenes and edit parameters on the 01V96i, and store 01V96i internal data on external MIDI devices.
The 01V96i supports the following MIDI messages. Each of these MIDI messages can be individually turned on or off for transmission and reception.
• Program Changes
If you assign the 01V96i’s Scenes to Program Change numbers, the 01V96i transmits Program Changes when it recalls Scenes. Also, the 01V96i will switch Scenes when it receives Program Changes.
• Control Changes
If you assign the 01V96i’s parameters to Control Change numbers, the 01V96i transmits the assigned Control
Changes when the parameter values change. Also, the
01V96i changes certain parameter values when it receives the corresponding Control Changes.
• System Exclusive Messages
The 01V96i transmits System Exclusive Parameter
Changes in real-time when the parameter values change.
Also, the 01V96i notifies certain parameter values when it receives assigned Parameter Changes.
• MMC (MIDI Machine Control)
MMC is used for external machine control.
• MIDI Note On/Off
These messages are used to adjust the Freeze effect.
• Bulk Dump Messages
These messages enable you to store the 01V96i’s internal data to a sequencer or MIDI filer. When the 01V96i receives these messages, they overwrite the 01V96i data
The 01V96i features the following interface for transmitting and receiving MIDI data.
• MIDI IN/THRU/OUT ports
These ports transmit and receive MIDI data to and from standard MIDI devices. Each port is a single port interface that transmits and receives single-port data (16 channels x 1 ports). The MIDI THRU port outputs MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN port without modification (as is).
• USB port
This port is used to connect a computer and transfer
MIDI messages. This is a multiport interface that transmits and receives up to eight-port data (16 channels x 8 ports). In order to connect the 01V96i via USB to a computer, the appropriate driver software must be installed in the computer. You can download this software from the
Yamaha Pro Audio website.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
For more information about installation and setup, refer to the above website and to the installation guide included with the program you downloaded.
Note: If the computer is turned on but the USB MIDI application has not been launched, 01V96i performance may be slow. In this case, cancel the assignment of the USB port as the MIDI message transmission port.
• SLOT
If an optional “MY16-mLAN” I/O card is installed in the slot, MIDI data transfer to and from an external MIDI device is available via the MY16-mLAN card.
01V96i—Reference Manual
MIDI Port Setup
Selecting a Port for MIDI
Message Transfer
To configure MIDI ports for MIDI message transfer, press the
DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the
DIO/Setup | MIDI/Host page appears. This page enables you to set MIDI message input and output.
1 4
2 3
The following parameters are available on this page:
1
GENERAL section
This section enables you to select ports that transmit and receive MIDI messages, such as Program Changes and
Control Changes.
• Rx PORT
This parameter specifies a port for general MIDI data reception. In the left parameter box, select MIDI, USB, or
SLOT. If you select USB or SLOT, specify the port number
(1–8) in the right parameter box.
• Tx PORT
This parameter specifies a port for general MIDI data transmission. The available ports are the same as for the
Rx PORT parameter.
2
MIDI THRU section
These parameters enable you to route incoming MIDI data from one port or slot to another without changes.
Select a port for reception in the first parameter box, and select a port for transmission in the next parameter box
(located to the right of the arrow). If you select USB or
SLOT, specify the port number in the small parameter box adjacent to the port parameter box.
MIDI Port Setup
101
3
MACHINE CONTROL section
This section enables you to select a remote control method and a remote control port to control external devices that support MMC.
• PORT
Select MIDI, USB, or SLOT for MMC command transfer.
If you select USB or SLOT, specify the port number in the right parameter box.
• DEVICE ID
Specify the 01V96i’s MMC Device ID. MMC Device IDs identify connected devices, enabling recognition during
MMC transmission and reception.
4
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section
This section enables you to specify ports for various special functions.
• Studio Manager
In the left parameter box, select MIDI, USB or SLOT as the port used by the included Studio Manager software.
In the two small parameter boxes on the right, specify a port number (if you selected USB), and an ID number.
• DAW
Select USB or SLOT as a port for use with a DAW. Specify in the right parameter box a port number pair (1–2, 3–4,
5–6, 7–8).
• REMOTE
This parameter indicates the target currently selected for
Remote Layer. If the target is set to “USER DEFINED,” you can select a MIDI message destination port.
• CASCADE LINK
This parameter determines whether MIDI messages are transmitted between two cascaded 01V96is. If you select
MIDI, MIDI messages will be transferred between two cascaded units. If you select “–,” no MIDI messages are transferred.
The TRANSMIT and REQUEST buttons are used to synchronize all parameters that are cascade-linked. The
TRANSMIT button synchronizes the connected 01V96i’s parameters to your primary 01V96i’s parameters. The
REQUEST button synchronizes your 01V96i parameters to the connected 01V96i’s parameters.
01V96i—Reference Manual
102
MIDI
Selecting MIDI Messages for
Transmission and Reception
You can select MIDI messages to be transmitted or received at a specified port.
To do so, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button, then press the [F1] button to display the MIDI | Setup page.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Select MIDI channels for transmission and reception in the
CHANNEL row, and turn the transmission and reception of each MIDI message on or off using the buttons in the parameter rows from PROGRAM CHANGE to OTHER COM-
MANDS.
1
CHANNEL
This parameter row enables you to specify MIDI Channels for MIDI message transmission and reception. The following parameters are available in this row:
• Tx ..............................This parameter box specifies a MIDI
Transmit Channel.
• Rx ..............................This parameter box specifies a MIDI
Receive Channel.
2
PROGRAM CHANGE
This parameter row enables or disables transmission and reception of Program Changes.
• Tx ON/OFF ............Transmission of Program Change messages is enabled or disabled.
• Rx ON/OFF ............Reception of Program Change messages is enabled or disabled.
• OMNI ON/OFF.....When this button is turned on, Program Changes on all MIDI Channels are received regardless of the
CHANNEL row settings.
• ECHO ON/OFF.....This button determines whether
Program Change messages received at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port.
3
CONTROL CHANGE
This parameter row enables or disables transmission and reception of Control Changes.
• Tx ON/OFF ............Transmission of Control Change messages is enabled or disabled.
• Rx ON/OFF ............Reception of Control Change messages is enabled or disabled.
• ECHO ON/OFF.....This button determines whether
Control Change messages received at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port.
4
PARAMETER CHANGE
This parameter row enables or disables transmission and reception of Parameter Changes.
• Tx ON/OFF ............Transmission of Parameter Change messages is enabled or disabled.
• Rx ON/OFF ............Reception of Parameter Change messages is enabled or disabled.
• ECHO ON/OFF.....This button determines whether
Parameter Change messages received at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port.
5
BULK
This parameter row enables or disables reception of Bulk
Dump data.
• Rx ON/OFF ............Reception of Bulk Dump data is enabled or disabled.
6
OTHER COMMANDS
• ECHO ON/OFF.....This button determines whether other MIDI messages received at the
MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port.
7
Fader Resolution
This parameter specifies the resolution of the value output when you operate the 01V96i’s faders. To transfer fader value data between two cascaded 01V96is, or to record the 01V96i operation to or play it back from a sequencer, select the HIGH button. When the LOW button is selected, the fader resolution switches to 256 steps.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Assigning Scenes to
Program Changes for
Remote Recall
You can assign 01V96i Scenes to MIDI Program Changes for remote recall. When you recall a Scene on the 01V96i, the unit transmits the assigned Program Change to the connected
MIDI device. When the 01V96i receives a Program Change, the assigned Scene is recalled.
Initially, Scenes 1 through 99 are assigned sequentially to Program Changes 1 through 99, and Scene #0 is assigned to Program Change #100, although you can change these assignments.
Tip: You can store a Scene to Program Change assignment table to an external device by using MIDI Bulk Dump or the Studio
Manager software.
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears, then specify ports for transmission and reception of MIDI mes-
2.
Make connections using the ports selected in
Step 1 so that the 01V96i can transfer MIDI messages to and from the external device.
3.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button, then press the [F2] button.
The MIDI | Pgm Asgn page appears.
Assigning Scenes to Program Changes for Remote Recall
103
5.
Press the cursor button [ ] to move the cursor to a parameter box in the SCENE
NO./TITLE column, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select Scenes.
Tip:
• If you assign a Scene to multiple Program Changes, the
Program Change with the lowest number becomes effective.
• You can initialize the Scene to Program Change assignment table by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then pressing [ENTER].
6.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button, then press the [F1] button to display the MIDI
| Setup page, then specify the MIDI Transmit and Receive Channels.
7.
Turn on the PROGRAM CHANGE Tx ON/OFF and Rx ON/OFF buttons.
Now, when the 01V96i receives the Program Changes on the specified MIDI Channels, the corresponding Scenes are recalled. Also, when you switch Scenes on the 01V96i, the 01V96i transmits the Program Changes on the specified MIDI Channels.
4.
Move the cursor to a parameter box in the
PGM CHG column, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the Program Change numbers to which you want to assign Scenes.
01V96i—Reference Manual
104
MIDI
Assigning Parameters to
Control Changes for
Real-time Control
You can assign 01V96i parameters to MIDI Control Changes for real-time control. When the 01V96i receives a Control
Change, the assigned 01V96i parameter is set accordingly.
Also, when you adjust a parameter on the 01V96i, the 01V96i transmits the assigned Control Change message.
Tip: You can store a Parameter to Control Change assignment table to an external device by using MIDI Bulk Dump or the Studio Manager software.
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears, then specify ports for transmission and reception of MIDI mes-
2.
Make connections using the ports selected in
Step 1 so that the 01V96i can transfer MIDI messages to and from the external device.
3.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button, then press the [F3] button.
The MIDI | Ctl Asgn page appears. This page enables you to assign 01V96i parameters to Control Changes.
1
Tip:
See page 157 for information on the default Parameter
to Control Change assignments.
4.
Move the cursor to the MODE parameter’s
TABLE button ( 1 ), then press [ENTER].
The MODE parameter determines which MIDI messages are transmitted when 01V96i parameters are adjusted.
The following options are available for the MODE parameter:
• TABLE
MIDI Control Change messages are transmitted in accordance with the assignments on this page.
• NRPN
The assignments on the Ctl Asgn page are ignored, and predefined NRPNs (Non Registered Parameter Numbers) are transmitted for remote control.
Tip: NRPNs are special MIDI messages that combine three different Control Changes. They enable you to control many parameters on a single MIDI Channel.
5.
If you turned on the TABLE button in Step 4, move the cursor to a parameter box in the No.
(CH) column, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the MIDI channels and Control
Changes to which you want to assign parameters.
You can assign parameters to up to 16-channel Control
Changes on the Ctl Asgn page, regardless of the MIDI
Channels currently selected for transmission and reception.
Skip Steps 5 and 6 if you turned on the NRPN button in
Step 4.
6.
Select parameters in the parameter boxes in the three PARAMETER columns.
Select a parameter group in the parameter box in the first
PARAMETER column, and specify the desired values in the parameter boxes in the second and third PARAME-
TER columns.
The following parameters and values are available:
HIGH
NO ASSIGN
FADER H
FADER L
MID LOW
—
CHANNEL
MASTER
AUX1 SEND
AUX2 SEND
AUX3 SEND
—
INPUT1–32/ST IN1–4
BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO
AUX4 SEND
AUX5 SEND
AUX6 SEND
INPUT1–32/ST IN1–4
AUX7 SEND
AUX8 SEND
BUS TO ST BUS1–8
CHANNEL INPUT1–32/ST IN1–4
MASTER BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO
AUX1 SEND
AUX2 SEND
AUX3 SEND
AUX4 SEND
AUX5 SEND
AUX6 SEND
AUX7 SEND
INPUT1–32/ST IN1–4
AUX8 SEND
BUS TO ST BUS1–8
01V96i—Reference Manual
Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real-time Control
105
ON
HIGH
PHASE
INSERT ON
PRE/POST
IN DELAY
OUT DELAY
EQ
MID LOW
Q LOW
F LOW
G LOW H
G LOW L
Q LO-MID
F LO-MID
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID L
Q HI-MID
F HI-MID
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID L
Q HIGH
F HIGH
G HIGH H
G HIGH L
ATT H
ATT L
HPF ON
LPF ON
AUX2 SEND
AUX3 SEND
AUX4 SEND
AUX5 SEND
AUX6 SEND
AUX7 SEND
AUX8 SEND
ON
TIME HIGH
TIME MID
TIME LOW
MIX HIGH
MIX LOW
FB GAIN H
FB GAIN L
ON
TIME HIGH
TIME MID
TIME LOW
ON
CHANNEL
MASTER
AUX1 SEND
AUX2 SEND
AUX3 SEND
AUX4 SEND
AUX5 SEND
AUX6 SEND
AUX7 SEND
INPUT1–32/ST IN1–4
BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO
INPUT1–32/ST IN1–4
AUX8 SEND
BUS TO ST BUS1–8
CHANNEL INPUT1–32/ST IN1L–4R
CHANNEL
MASTER
AUX1 SEND
INPUT1–32
BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO
INPUT1–32/ST IN1–4
INPUT1–32
BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO L,R
INPUT1–32/ST IN
1–4/BUS1–8/AUX1–8/
STEREO
HIGH
GATE
COMP
PAN
BALANCE
SURROUND
EFFECT
MID LOW
ON
ATTACK
THRESH H
THRESH L
RANGE
HOLD H
HOLD L
DECAY H
DECAY L
ON
ATTACK
THRESH H
THRESH L
RELEASE H
RELEASE L
OFS FR
BYPASS
MIX
PARAM1 H
PARAM1 L
:
PARAM32 H
PARAM32 L
INPUT1–32
INPUT1–32/BUS1–8/AUX1–8
/STEREO
LFE L
DIV (F)
DIV R
LR
FR
WIDTH
DEPTH
OFS LR
RATIO
GAIN H
GAIN L
KNEE
CHANNEL
AUX1–2
AUX3–4
AUX5–6
AUX7–8
INPUT1–32/ST IN1L–4R
BUS TO ST BUS1–8
MASTER
LFE H
STEREO
INPUT1–32/ST IN1L–4R
EFFECT1–4
01V96i—Reference Manual
106
MIDI
Parameters that feature a setting range of more than 128 steps (such as Fader and Delay Time parameters) require two or more Control Change messages to specify the values.
For example, if you wish to control Fader parameters on certain channels using Control Changes, you must assign the same channel to two Control Change numbers, and select “FADER H” and “FADER L” for the Control
Changes in the parameter boxes in the first PARAME-
TER column.
If you wish to control Delay Time parameters on certain channels using Control Changes, you must assign the same channel Delay parameter to three Control Change numbers, and select “TIME LOW,” “TIME MID,” and
“TIME HIGH” for the Control Changes in the parameter boxes in the second (middle) PARAMETER column.
Note: Parameters that feature a setting range in excess of 128 steps require an appropriate combination of range parameters for successful MIDI Control Change.
Tip: You can initialize the Parameter to Control Change assignment table by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then pressing [ENTER].
7.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button, then press the [F1] button to display the MIDI
| Setup page, then specify MIDI Transmit and
Receive Channels.
8.
Turn on the CONTROL CHANGE Tx ON/OFF and Rx ON/OFF buttons.
01V96i parameters will now be set accordingly when the
01V96i receives corresponding Control Changes. Also, when you adjust parameters on the 01V96i, the 01V96i will transmit corresponding Control Changes.
Note: Before controlling parameters using Control Changes, make sure that both Tx and Rx ON/OFF buttons in the
PARAMETER CHANGE row on the MIDI | Setup page are turned off.
Controlling Parameters by Using Parameter
Changes
You can control 01V96i parameters in real time by using
Parameter Change messages that are System Exclusive messages, instead of using MIDI Control Changes.
See “MIDI Data Format” at the end of this Manual for detailed information on available Parameter Changes.
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears, then specify ports for transmission and reception of MIDI mes-
2.
Make connections using the ports selected in
Step 1 so that the 01V96i can transmit and receive MIDI messages to and from the external device.
3.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button, then press the [F1] button to display the MIDI
| Setup page, then turn off the Tx and Rx
ON/OFF buttons in the PARAMETER CHANGE row.
The 01V96i will now set certain parameter values when it receives corresponding Parameter Changes. Also, when you adjust certain parameters on the 01V96i, it transmits corresponding Parameter Changes.
Note: Before controlling parameters using Parameter
Changes, make sure that both Tx and Rx ON/OFF buttons in the CONTROL CHANGE row are turned off.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Transmitting Parameter
Settings via MIDI (Bulk
Dump)
You can back up data stored in the 01V96i, such as libraries and Scenes, to an external MIDI device by using MIDI Bulk
Dump. In this way, you can later restore previous 01V96i settings by transmitting this MIDI data back to the 01V96i.
Note: Some of the data transmitted from the 01V96i to the sequence software may occasionally drop out during Bulk Dump transmission. To avoid this, we recommend that you use the Studio Manager software to store 01V96i data to an external device.
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears, then specify ports for transmission and reception of MIDI mes-
2.
Make connections using the ports selected in
Step 1 so that the 01V96i can transmit and receive MIDI messages to and from the external device.
3.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button, then press the [F4] button.
The MIDI | Bulk page appears.
1 3 2
4
The page includes the following parameters:
1
CATEGORY section
This section enables you to select data for transmission and reception.
2
REQUEST
Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to transmit messages from the 01V96i that request a second
01V96i (connected to the first 01V96i) to transmit the data specified in the CATEGORY section. This button is used primarily when two 01V96is are connected in cascade.
Transmitting Parameter Settings via MIDI (Bulk Dump)
107
3
TRANSMIT
Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to transmit data specified in the CATEGORY section to an external MIDI device.
4
INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the interval between data packets during bulk transmission in 50 millisecond steps. If the external device drops part of the bulk data, increase this parameter value.
4.
In the CATEGORY section, move the cursor to the button of the data type you want to transmit, then press [ENTER].
The following options are available:
• ALL
This button selects all data available for bulk dump. When this button is turned on, all other buttons in this section are turned off.
• SCENEMEM
This button selects Scene memories. You can select
Scenes you wish to transmit in the parameter box next to the button.
• LIBRARY
This button selects libraries. You can select the type of library in the TYPE parameter box (next to the button), then specify the library number in the parameter box on the right.
• BANK
This parameter enables you to select the User Defined
Key banks (KEYS UDEF), User Defined Remote Layer banks (RMT UDEF), or User Assignable Layer banks
(USR LAYER) for bulk dump. You can select one of these three types in the parameter box next to the button, and select the banks in the parameter box on the right.
• SETUPMEM
This button selects the 01V96i setup data (i.e., system settings).
• PGM TABLE
This button selects the MIDI | Pgm Asgn page settings.
• CTL TABLE
This button selects the MIDI | Ctl Asgn page settings.
• PLUG-IN
This button selects the settings of an optional card installed in the slot.
Note: Data selected by the SETUPMEM button includes
MIDI transmission and reception port settings and message settings. After you store to an external device bulk dump data that has its reception disabled, if the 01V96i later starts to receive this particular data, 01V96i bulk dump reception will be turned off immediately, and the 01V96i will be unable to receive subsequent data. Therefore, before you store the data selected by the SETUPMEM button using Bulk Dump, be sure to enable bulk data transmission and reception.
01V96i—Reference Manual
108
MIDI
5.
If necessary, move the cursor to the parameter box next to the selected button, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the
[INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the desired bulk dump data.
Tip: If you selected [ALL] in the parameter box, all data selected by the corresponding button is transmitted as bulk dump data.
6.
To start transmitting bulk data, move the cursor to the TRANSMIT button, then press
[ENTER].
Bulk Dump is executed. During the operation, the Bulk
Dump window appears, indicating the current bulk dump status. To abort the bulk dump operation, move the cursor to the CANCEL button in the window, then press
[ENTER].
Tip: To transmit bulk dump request messages, move the cursor to the REQUEST button, then press [ENTER]. If you set up the 01V96i so that it will transmit and receive MIDI messages to and from another 01V96i, the other 01V96i will respond to the bulk dump request and transmit the bulk dump data to the 01V96i you are operating.
7.
To receive bulk data, press the DISPLAY
ACCESS [MIDI] button again to display the
MIDI | Setup page, then turn on the Rx
ON/OFF button in the BULK row.
Now, when the 01V96i receives bulk data, the corresponding internal data is updated.
Note: Bulk data can be transmitted and received between the
01V96i and the 01V96V2 / 01V96VCM. Compatibility depends on the type of data, as follows.
Data that can be transmitted and received between the
01V96i and the 01V96V2 / 01V96VCM in either direction
SCENE MEM:
EQ LIBRARY:
GATE LIBRARY:
COMP LIBRARY:
CHANNEL LIBRARY:
EFFECT LIBRARY:
BANK:
SETUP MEMORY:
PGM TABLE:
CTL TABLE:
Data that can be only be transmitted by the 01V96V2 /
01V96VCM and received by the 01V96i (and not in the other direction)
INPUT PATCH LIBRARY:
OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY:
01V96i—Reference Manual
Other Functions
This chapter describes the 01V96i’s miscellaneous functions.
Setting Preferences
You can change the default settings and environmental settings of the 01V96i by using the DIO/Setup | Prefer1 and
Prefer2 pages. To locate one of the Preferences page, press the
DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly.
Prefer1 page
This page enables you to set the 01V96i so that when you press a button on the top panel, the 01V96i displays the corresponding display page, and shows or hides confirmation and alarm messages.
This page contains the following parameters. (These parameters are explained in the order from the top of the left column to the bottom of the right column.)
• Auto PAN Display
If this check box is on, the Pan/Route pages appear automatically when you operate the [PAN] control in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section. In Stereo Surround mode, operating the [PAN] control enables you to adjust the left and right Pan setting. Otherwise, it enables you to adjust the Surround Pan settings.
• Auto EQUALIZER Display
If this check box is on, the EQ | EQ Edit page appears automatically when you press an EQ-related button in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section.
• Auto SOLO Display
If this check box is on, the DIO/Setup | Monitor page appears automatically when you solo an Input Channel.
• Auto WORD CLOCK Display
If this check box is on, the DIO/Setup | Word Clock page appears automatically if the currently-selected external wordclock source fails.
Other Functions
109
• Auto Channel Select
If this check box is on, you can select a channel by moving the corresponding fader, or by turning on the corresponding channel [SOLO] or [ON] button.
• Store Confirmation
If this check box is on, the Title Edit window to input a
Scene or library memory name appears when you store a
Scene or library memory.
• Recall Confirmation
If this check box is on, a confirmation window appears when you recall a Scene or library memory.
• Patch Confirmation
If this check box is on, a confirmation message appears when you edit the Input and Output Patches.
• Pair Confirmation
If this check box is on, a confirmation message appears when you create or cancel a pair.
• Nominal Pan
If this check box is checked, and when Input Channel signals are panned hard left or hard right, the signals on the left/odd channels and right/even channels will be at the nominal level. If this check box is not checked, these signals will be boosted by 3 dB. (When the signals are panned to center, they will be at the nominal level.) In
Surround mode, the same thing applies when any Surroound pan channel is panned hard left or right.
• Fast Meter Fall Time
If this check box is on, the level meters fall more quickly.
• DIO Warning
If this check box is on, a warning message appears when any errors are detected in digital audio signals received at the Slot or 2TR Digital Inputs.
• MIDI Warning
If this check box is on, a warning message appears when any errors are detected in the incoming MIDI messages.
• Initial Data Nominal
If this check box is on, Input Channel faders and ST IN
Channel level controls are set to nominal (0 dB) when you recall Scene #0. (If this check box is off, they are set to
–.)
• Scene MEM Auto Update
If this check box is on, you can use the Scene Memory
Auto Update function (see page 70).
• Cascade COMM Link
If this check box is on, various functions and parameters
check box is off, only the Solo function is linked.
• Auto Direct Out On
If this check box is on and you change the channel Direct
Out destination from “–” to any other output, the channel
Direct Out is automatically enabled. If you change the channel Direct Out destination from an output to “–,” the channel Direct Out is automatically disabled.
01V96i—Reference Manual
110
Other Functions
1
2
3
• Routing ST Pair Link
When this check box is checked, paired channels’ routing to the Stereo Bus will be linked.
Prefer2 page
The Prefer2 page enables you to name the channel indicated on the display, and adjust the display brightness.
Creating a Custom Layer by Combining Channels
(User Assignable Layer)
If you set the Remote Layer target to “USER ASSIGNABLE,” you can create a custom layer by combining any 01V96i channels (excluding the Stereo Out). This custom layer is called
“User Assignable layer.”
1.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup| Remote page appears.
2.
Set the TARGET parameter to USER ASSIGN-
ABLE, then press [ENTER].
A confirmation window appears.
3.
Move the cursor to the YES button, then press
[ENTER].
The 01V96i displays the page shown below.
This page contains the following parameters:
1
Channel ID/Channel
This parameter selects a style for the displayed channel. If the Channel ID check box is selected, the Channel ID appears (e.g., CH1, CH16, AUX1). If the Channel Short
Name check box is on, the Channel Short name appears.
2
Channel Copy Parameter
This parameter selects the channel parameters to be copied when you assign the Channel Copy function to one of the User Defined buttons. You can select multiple options.
• ALL ...........................This button selects all parameters that can be copied. When you turn on this button, all other options are cancelled.
• FADER.....................Copies the fader values.
• ON.............................Copies the on/off status of the [ON] buttons.
• PAN ..........................Copies the pan settings.
• SURR........................Copies the surround pan settings.
• AUX..........................Copies the Aux Send levels.
• AUX ON ..................Copies the on/off status of the Channel to Aux signals.
• EQ .............................Copies the EQ parameter values.
3
Display Brightness
This parameter sets the brightness of the LED indicators in the range of 1 through 4.
1
4.
Select the channels you wish to assign to the
User Assignable layer using the 1–16 parameter boxes ( 1 ).
You can store up to four 16-channel setups in four banks by switching Banks 1–4 via the BANK 1–4 buttons. If you press[ENTER] before selecting the channels to assign, you will still be able to select the channels you wish to assign in the User CH Select window.
Tip: You can reset the assignment to default by moving the cursor to the CLEAR button and pressing [ENTER].
5.
Use the LAYER [REMOTE] button to assign or recall the User Assignable layer.
You can use the faders and [ON] buttons to control the assigned channels.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Cascading Consoles
111
Cascading Consoles
The 01V96i features a Cascade Bus that enables cascade connection. You can connect two 01V96is in cascade using the digital inputs and outputs, or the OMNI IN and OMNI OUT connectors. In this way, two consoles work just like one big console, integrating each unit’s Buses 1–8, Aux Sends 1–8,
Stereo Bus, and Solo Bus.
The following functions are linked between two cascaded
01V96is via the MIDI IN and OUT ports.
• Display page selection
• Solo function
• Fader Mode
• Metering Position
• Peak Hold On/Off
• Meter Fast Fall on/off
• Scene Store, Recall, and Title Edit
Tip:
• To link functions and parameters (excluding the Solo function), turn on the Cascade COMM Link check box on the Setup
| Prefer1 page (see page 109).
• The Solo function is always linked regardless of the status of the
Cascade COMM Link check box.
The following paragraphs explain how to make a cascade connection using two 01V96is and the inputs and outputs of the digital I/O card installed in the slot of each 01V96i.
1.
Install digital I/O cards into the slot on each of two 01V96is.
2.
Connect two 01V96is as follows:
• Connect the digital I/O card output on the transmitting
01V96i (slave) to the digital I/O card input on the receiving 01V96i (master).
• Connect the ADAT IN connector on the master unit to the ADAT OUT connector on the slave unit.
• Connect the MIDI IN port on the master unit to the
MIDI OUT port on the slave unit using a MIDI cable.
• Connect the MIDI OUT port on the master unit to the
MIDI IN port on the slave unit using a MIDI cable.
3.
On the slave unit, press the DISPLAY ACCESS
[PATCH] button repeatedly until the Patch |
Out Patch page appears.
4.
Assign the Bus signals to the channels that are used for the cascade connection.
The following signals are available:
Options
CAS BUS1–BUS8
CAS AUX1–AUX8
CAS ST-L, CAS ST-R
CASSOLOL, CASSOLOR
Description
Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs
Aux Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs
Stereo Bus L & R Cascade
Outs
Solo Bus L & R Cascade
Outs
The following display page is an example of integrating
Bus 1–8, Aux Send 1–4, Stereo Bus, and Solo Bus signals via the ADAT IN and OUT connectors and two 8-channel digital I/O cards (such as MY8-AT).
OUT IN
MY8-AT etc.
SLOT
ADAT
OUT connector
A
B
INPUT
(BAL)
INSERT
1
A
B
2
A
B
3
A
B
4
A
B
5
A
B
6
A
B
7
A
B
8
A
B
9
A
B
10
A
B
11
A
B
12
CH1-4
13
14
15
CH5-8 CH9-12
PHANTOM +48V
L
16
IN
2TR
OUT
-10dBV (UNBAL)
R
PHONES
PAD
INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O
20dB 20dB 20dB
INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O
20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
-60
DISPLAY ACCESS
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
-60 -16
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
-60
INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O
CH15/16
2TR IN
MONITOR
2TR IN
20dB
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
20dB 20dB 20dB
+4 GAIN -26 +4 GAIN -26 0 LEVEL 10 LEVEL 10
MONITOR
OUT
PHONES
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
-60
SCENE MEMORY
+4
GAIN
-26 +4
GAIN
-26
13 PEAK
SIGNAL
14 15 PEAK
SIGNAL
16
MIDI
IN/OUT connector
MY8-AT etc.
SLOT
ADAT
IN connector
MIDI
IN/OUT connector
A
INPUT
B
(BAL)
INSERT
1
A
B
2
A
B
3
A
B
4
A
B
5
A
B
6
A
B
7
A
B
8
A
B
9
A
B
10
A
B
11
A
B
12
CH1-4
13
14
15
CH5-8 CH9-12
PHANTOM +48V
L
16
IN
2TR
OUT
-10dBV (UNBAL)
R
PHONES
INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O
PAD
20dB 20dB 20dB
INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O
20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB
INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O
20dB
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
DISPLAY ACCESS
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
-60 -16
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
-60 -16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
-60 -16
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
-60 -16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
CH15/16
2TR IN
MONITOR
2TR IN
20dB 20dB
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
-16
GAIN
-60
PEAK
SIGNAL
+4 GAIN -26 +4 GAIN -26 0 LEVEL 10
MONITOR
OUT
+4
GAIN
-26 +4
GAIN
-26
13 PEAK
SIGNAL
14 15 PEAK
SIGNAL
16
SCENE MEMORY
LEVEL 10
PHONES
SCENE DIO/SETUP MIDI UTILITY
/ INSERT/
DELAY
PAN/
ROUTING
PAIR/
GROUP
PATCH
DYNAMICS EQ EFFECT
FADER MODE
VIEW
AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
AUX
5
AUX
6
AUX
7
AUX
8
HOME (METER)
LAYER
1-16 17-32 MASTER REMOTE
OVER
-3
-12
-6
-9
-15
-18
-24
-30
-36
-48
STEREO
STORE
DEC
HIGH
Q
HIGH-MID
FREQUENCY
LOW-MID
GAIN
LOW
ENTER
RECALL
INC
ST IN
SOLO CLEAR
SCENE DIO/SETUP MIDI UTILITY
/ INSERT/
DELAY
PAN/
ROUTING
PAIR/
GROUP
PATCH
DYNAMICS EQ EFFECT
FADER MODE
VIEW
AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
AUX
5
AUX
6
AUX
7
AUX
8
HOME (METER)
LAYER
1-16 17-32 MASTER REMOTE
OVER
-3
-6
-9
-12
-15
-18
-24
-30
-36
-48
STEREO
STORE
DEC
HIGH
Q
HIGH-MID
FREQUENCY
LOW-MID
GAIN
LOW
ENTER
RECALL
INC
ST IN
SOLO CLEAR
SEL SEL SEL
SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO
ON
1
ON
2
ON
3
SEL SEL
ON
4
SEL
ON
5
ON
6
SEL
ON
7
SEL SEL
ON
8
SEL
ON
9
ON
10
SEL
ON
11
SEL SEL
ON
12
SEL
ON
13
ON
14
SEL
ON
15
SEL
ON
16
SEL SEL SEL
SOLO SOLO
ON ON
ST IN 1
ON
ST IN 2
SEL SEL
ON
1
ON
2
SEL
ON
3
SEL
ON
4
SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL
SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO
ON
5
ON
6
ON
7
ON
8
ON
9
ON
10
ON
11
SEL SEL SEL
ON
12
ON
13
ON
14
SEL
ON
15
SEL
ON
16
SEL SEL SEL
SOLO SOLO
ON ON
ST IN 1
ON
ST IN 2
+10
5
0
10
5
15
20
30
40
50
30 15
40 20
50
60
30
70 40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
30
40
50
60
70
15
20
30
40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
30 15 30 15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
30 15
40 20
50 30
60
70 40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
30
40
50
60
70
15
20
30
40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
30 15 30 15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
30 15
40 20
50 30
60
70 40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
30
40
50
60
70
15
20
30
40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
30 15 30 15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
30 15
40 20
50 30
60
70 40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
30
40
50
60
70
15
20
30
40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
0 0
5
10
15
5
10
15
20 20
30 30 30 15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
40 40
50
60
70
50
60
70
1
17
AUX 1
2
18
AUX 2
19
3
AUX 3
4
20
AUX 4
5
21
AUX 5
6
22
AUX 6
23
7
AUX 7
8
24
AUX 8
9
25
BUS 1
10
26
BUS 2
11
27
BUS 3
12
28
BUS 4
13
29
BUS 5
14
30
BUS 6
15
31
BUS 7
16
32
BUS 8
STEREO
USER DEFINED
KEYS
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
5
10
+10
5
0
15
20
30
40
50
30 15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
30 15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
30 15
40 20
50 30
60
70 40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
30 15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
30 15
40 20
50 30
60
70 40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
30 15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
30 15
40 20
50 30
60
70 40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
30 15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
0 +10
5
5
10
0
15 5
20 10
0 0
5
10
15
5
10
15
20 20
30 30 30 15
40 20
50
60
70
30
40
50
40 40
50
60
70
50
60
70
1
17
AUX 1
2
18
AUX 2
19
3
AUX 3
4
20
AUX 4
5
21
AUX 5
6
22
AUX 6
23
7
AUX 7
8
24
AUX 8
9
25
BUS 1
10
26
BUS 2
11
27
BUS 3
12
28
BUS 4
13
29
BUS 5
14
30
BUS 6
15
31
BUS 7
16
32
BUS 8
STEREO
USER DEFINED
KEYS
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
01V96i (Slave) 01V96i (Master)
Tip: Patching may vary depending on the type and number of buses used for the cascade connection.
Note: Since the number of channels available on the digital
I/O card is limited, only Aux Sends 1–4 are cascaded in this example. Using a 16-channel digital I/O card (such as
MY16-AT) enables you to cascade all buses.
5.
On the master unit, press the DISPLAY
ACCESS [PATCH] button repeatedly until the
Patch | Cascade In page appears.
6.
Select the Input Channels on the master unit to which the Bus signals are input from the
Slave unit.
The following display page is an example of receiving the slave unit’s Bus 1–8, Aux Send 1–4, Stereo Bus, and Solo
01V96i—Reference Manual
112
Other Functions
Bus signals via the ADAT IN and OUT connectors and two 8-channel digital I/O cards (such as MY8-AT).
8.
Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly to display the DIO/Setup |
MIDI/Host page, then set the Cascade Link parameter to “MIDI.”
Note: Be sure to patch the slave Bus signals to the same Buses on the master unit. Incorrect patching will result in an incorrect cascade connection.
7.
On the master unit, press the DISPLAY
ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup | Cascade page appears, then adjust the Attenuators using the parameter controls.
The DIO/Setup | Cascade page enables you to adjust the level of signals input to the Cascade Bus using the dedicated attenuators. You can also turn the Cascade Buses on or off using the buttons below the parameter controls.
9.
Repeat Step 8 for the master unit.
After Steps 8 and 9, the slave unit will be able to transmit and receive MIDI messages.
10.
To match the parameters of both 01V96is, locate the DIO/Setup | MIDI/Host page on the copy source unit.
Move the cursor to the TRANSMIT button for the SYNC parameter, then press [ENTER].
Parameters for cascade link (page 111) will be copied to
the other 01V96i via the REMOTE connector. If you select the REQUEST button instead of the TRANSMIT button for the SYNC parameter, you can reverse the copy direction.
At this point, Bus 1–8, Aux 1–4, and the Stereo Bus on both 01V96is are integrated, and the data is output via
Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–4, and the Stereo Out on the master unit. If you solo channels on one of the 01V96is, you can monitor the soloed signals via the Monitor outputs.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Checking the Battery and the System Version
113
Checking the Battery and the System Version
The Utility | Battery page enables you to check the condition of the internal memory-backup battery and the system version number. To locate this page, press the DISPLAY ACCESS
[UTILITY] button repeatedly.
1
Calibrating the Faders
The 01V96i motorized fader positions may shift over time depending on the operating conditions and environment.
You can correct the shifted faders using the Calibration function.
1.
Make sure that the power to the 01V96i is turned off.
2.
Press and hold down the [ENTER] button, then turn on the POWER ON/OFF switch.
After a while, the following calibration window appears.
2
1
Status
If the Status is “Okay,” the battery has sufficient voltage for operation. If the Status is “Voltage Low!,” ask your
Yamaha dealer or authorized Yamaha service center to replace the battery as soon as possible. Failure to replace a low battery may result in data loss.
Note: Do not attempt to replace the battery yourself as a malfunction may occur.
2
Ver X.XX (X.XX represents the version number.)
This indicator identifies the system version number.
Check the current system version number before you update the firmware.
Visit the following website to check the latest system version number: http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
3.
Make sure that “1 FADER MOVE & FADER
POSITION” is selected, then press [ENTER].
To adjust only the motor fader movement, use the cursor buttons to select “2 FADER MOVE ONLY,” then press
[ENTER].
To adjust only the fader position, use the cursor buttons to select “3 FADER POSITION ONLY,” then press
[ENTER]. Proceed to Step 5.
To cancel the calibration operation, use the cursor buttons to select “4 QUIT,” then press [ENTER]. The 01V96i starts in normal mode.
4.
The calibration operation begins, adjusting the motor fader movement, and the 01V96i displays a message that indicates the calibration operation is in progress.
The calibration operation takes about two minutes. DO
NOT touch the faders during the operation.
01V96i—Reference Manual
114
Other Functions
5.
When the calibration operation is complete, the 01V96i displays a window in which you can select faders for position adjustment.
If you selected “2 FADER MOVE ONLY” in Step 3, the fader adjustment is complete. The 01V96i starts in normal mode.
11.
If there is any problem with the calibration result, the 01V96i displays the following window.
Also, the channel [SEL] button indicator of a problematic fader flashes.
6.
Use the channel [SEL] buttons to select faders for which you wish to calibrate the position, then press [ENTER].
The selected channel [SEL] button indicators flash.
(When you press [ENTER], they light up steadily.) At the beginning, all [SEL] buttons are flashing. However, if an error occurs and the unit is trying calibration again, only the [SEL] button indicator of a problematic fader flashes.
7.
Follow the instruction in the window to set
the position of the selected faders to –, then press [ENTER].
8.
Set the position of the selected faders to the level instructed in the window, then press
[ENTER]. Set faders 1–16 to –15, and Stereo fader to –30.
9.
Set the position of the selected faders to the level instructed in the window, then press
[ENTER]. Set faders 1–16 to 0, and Stereo fader to any position.
10.
Set the position of the selected faders to the level instructed in the window, then press
[ENTER]. Set faders 1–16 to +10, and Stereo fader to 0.
If there is no problem with the calibration result, this concludes the calibration operation. The 01V96i will start in normal mode.
Use the cursor buttons to select one of the following three options, then press [ENTER].
• CONTINUE
While the [SEL] button indicator of a problematic fader is flashing, the calibration process returns to Step 5.
• START FROM THE BEGINNING
The calibration process returns to Step 2.
• QUIT ANYWAY
The 01V96i cancels the calibration operation and starts in normal mode. The standard setting will be applied to problematic faders.
If this window appears after you try the calibration process several times, consult your nearest Yamaha dealer.
If the calibration data has some problems, the 01V96i displays the following window when it starts up. In this case, calibrate the position of the faders specified in the window.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Index
115
Index
Symbols
/INS/DLY | DLY 1-16 page
/INS/DLY | DLY 17-32 page
/INS/DLY | Insert page
/INS/DLY | Out Dly page
/INS/DLY | Phase page
/INSERT/DELAY button
+48V ON/OFF switches
Numerics
1–16/17–32 buttons
................................ 8
1–8 buttons
............................................... 9
2TR IN connectors
2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL
2TR IN DIGITAL connector
2TR OUT connectors
2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL
2TR OUT DIGITAL connector
A
AC IN connector
...................................11
AD input
................................................... 7
AD output section
.................................10
AD15/16 selector
..................................... 7
ADAT IN/OUT connector
Add-On Effects
......................................67
AMP SIMULATE
...............................136
Analog inputs & outputs
Assigne
Control changes
...........................104
MIDI messages
...............................96
Program changes
Remote Layer
..................................83
USER DEFINED KEYS
Attenuator
.................................20
Output signals
.................................34
Auto Channel Select preference
Auto Direct Out On preference
Auto EQUALIZER Display preference
..................................................109
AUTO PAN
.........................................135
Auto PAN Display preference
Auto SOLO Display preference
Auto update function
Auto WORD CLOCK Display preference
...............................109
AUX 1–AUX 8 buttons
Aux outs
..................................................36
Aux send mode
Aux sends
...............................................38
Attenuating
.....................................36
Comp settings
.................................37
Copying channel fader positions
............................................42
Delaying
...........................................37
EQ settings
............................... 37 ,
Fixed mode
......................................39
Panning
............................................41
Setting from the control surface
.............................................38
Setting from the display
Setting levels
....................................38
Variable mode
.................................39
Viewing settings
..............................37
Viewing settings for multiple channels
.............................40
Aux1 | View1-16 page
Aux1 | View17-STI page
B
Balancing
.................................................33
Battery
................................................... 113
Bulk dump
........................................... 107
Messages
....................................... 100
Bus out
.....................................................29
Attenuating
......................................30
Compressing
...................................30
Delaying
...........................................30
EQ’ing
...............................................31
EQ’ing and Balancing
Naming
............................................35
Pairing
..............................................33
Routing signals to the stereo bus
.............................................31
Setting from the control surface
.............................................33
Setting from the display
Setting the levels
.............................33
Viewing the settings
BUS1–BUS8
............................................54
C
Cascade COMM Link preference
Cascading consoles
............................. 111
Cascade page
................................ 112
SYNC parameter
CATEGORY
...........................................14
CH1–4 ON/OFF switch
CH5–8 ON/OFF switch
CH9–12 ON/OFF switch
Channel Copy Parameter preference
................................................. 110
Channel faders
.........................................7
Channel ID/Channel preference
Channel library
......................................75
Channel strip section
..............................7
CHORUS
............................................. 134
CLEAR button
.........................................9
Comp260/Comp260S
Compressor library
...............................79
Preset
................................................80
Compressors
............................. 20
Compressor link
.............................59
Linking
.............................................62
Contrast control
.......................................9
Control changes
Control surface
.........................................6
AD input section
..............................7
Channel strip section
Data entry section
.............................9
DISPLAY ACCESS section
Display section
................................. 9
FADER MODE section
LAYER section
................................. 8
Monitor out & Headphones section
.............................................. 7
SCENE MEMORY section
SELECTED CHANNEL section
SOLO section
.................................... 9
ST IN section
.................................... 8
STEREO section
............................... 8
USER DEFINED KEYS section
Control Surface & Rear Panel
COPY
...................................................... 15
Cursor buttons
......................................... 9
D
Data entry section
................................... 9
DAW
....................................................... 93
Nuendo/Cubase
............................. 93
Other
................................................ 94
Pro tools
........................................... 83
Remote
............................................. 83
DEC & INC buttons
............................... 9
Delay
...........................................18
DELAY SCALE
.............................. 18
FB.GAIN
......................................... 19
DELAY LCR
........................................133
DELAY SCALE
..................................... 18
DELAY+ER.
.........................................139
DELAY+REV
......................................140
DELAY->ER.
.......................................139
DELAY->REV
.....................................140
Digital I/O section
................................. 10
Digital inputs & outputs
DIO Warning preference
DIO/Setup | Cascade page
DIO/Setup | Format page
DIO/Setup | Insert page
DIO/Setup | Machine page
DIO/Setup | Meter page
............................. 84
DIO/Setup | Monitor page
DIO/Setup | Output Att page
DIO/Setup | Prefer1 page
DIO/Setup | Prefer2 page
DIO/Setup | Remote page
DIO/Setup | Surr Bus page
DIO/Setup | Word Clock page
DIO/SETUP button
................................ 8
Direct outs
.............................................. 46
Display
...................................................... 9
DISPLAY ACCESS section
Display Brightness preference
Display section
......................................... 9
DIST->DELAY
....................................140
DISTORTION
.....................................136
Dithering
................................................ 15
DIV
.......................................................... 56
DOUBLE CHANNEL
DOUBLE SPEED
.................................. 16
Dual Phaser
..........................................145
DUAL PITCH
.....................................135
01V96i—Reference Manual
116
Index
DYNA. FILTER
.................................. 136
DYNA. FLANGE
................................ 136
DYNA. PHASER
................................ 137
Dynamics | Comp Edit page
,
Dynamics | Comp Lib page
Dynamics | Gate Edit page
Dynamics | Gate Lib page
DYNAMICS button
................................8
E
EARLY REF.
........................................ 132
ECHO
................................................... 134
Effect | FX1 Edit page
........................... 66
Effect | FX1 Lib page
............................ 76
Effect | FX2 Edit page
........................... 66
Effect | FX2 Lib page
............................ 76
Effect | FX3 Edit page
........................... 66
Effect | FX3 Lib page
............................ 76
Effect | FX4 Edit page
........................... 66
Effect | FX4 Lib page
............................ 76
Effect | P-In Edit page
EFFECT button
........................................8
Effects
Bypass
.............................................. 66
Internal effects
................................ 64
parameter tables
........................... 132
Plug-ins
........................................... 67
Effects library
......................................... 76
Preset
............................................... 77
programs
......................................... 77
EMPHASIS
............................................ 14
ENTER button
.........................................9
EQ
.................................. 21
,
frequency
........................................ 21
gain
................................................... 21
Q
....................................................... 21
EQ | EQ Edit page
,
EQ | EQ Library page
........................... 81
EQ | Out Att page
EQ button
.................................................8
EQ library
............................................... 81
Preset
............................................... 81
EQ link
.................................................... 59
Equalizer601
........................................ 143
F
F/R
........................................................... 56
F1–F4 buttons
..........................................9
Fader groups
.......................................... 59
FADER MODE section
Fading
..................................................... 71
ALL CLEAR
................................... 71
AUX1–8
.......................................... 71
BUS1–8
............................................ 71
Global fade time
............................. 71
INPUT CH1–32
............................. 71
ST IN 1–4
........................................ 71
STEREO
.......................................... 71
FAST
....................................................... 56
Fast Meter Fall Time preference
FB.GAIN
................................................ 19
Fixed mode
......................................39
FLANGE
.............................................. 134
FREQUENCY control
............................ 9
FS
............................................................. 14
G
GAIN controls
.............................. 7
GANG
..................................................... 22
Gate library
............................................. 79
GATE REVERB
...................................132
Gates
........................................................ 19
KEYIN SOURCE
........................... 19
Global Paste
............................................ 73
Group
...................................................... 59
Fader groups
................................... 59
Mute groups
.................................... 59
H
HIGH button
........................................... 9
Higher sampling rates
HIGH-MID button
................................. 9
HOME button
......................................... 8
HORIZONTAL
..................................... 27
HQ. PITCH
..........................................135
I
INDIVIDUAL
....................................... 22
INIT
......................................................... 54
Initial Data Nominal preference
Input channels
....................................... 17
Attenuating
..................................... 20
Compressing
................................... 20
Delaying
........................................... 18
EQ
..................................................... 25
EQ’ing
.............................................. 21
Gating
.............................................. 19
Levels
................................................ 25
Naming
............................................ 28
Pairing
.............................................. 26
Panning
..................................... 22
Routing
............................................ 22
Setting from the control surface
Setting from the display
Switching the signal phase
Viewing the settings
INPUT connectors
Input patch
............................................. 43
Initial settings
...............................123
Parameters
....................................121
Input patch library
................................ 75
Input section
.......................................... 12
Input sensitivity
GAIN controls
.................................. 7
INSERT I/O connectors
Insert in
................................................... 48
Insert patching
....................................... 47
Internal effects
Aux sends
........................................ 64
Editing
.............................................. 66
Effects processors 1–4
Inserting into channels
Meters
.............................................. 67
MIX BALANCE
............................. 66
TEMPO
........................................... 66
INV GANG
............................................ 22
K
KEYIN SOURCE
...................................19
L
LAST SOLO
............................................50
LATCH
....................................................97
LAYER section
.........................................8
Layers
Initial bank settings
LEARN button
.......................................96
Level controls
...........................................8
Levels
................................................ 33
,
LFE
...........................................................56
Libraries
...................................................74
Channel library
...............................75
Compressor library
Effects library
..................................76
EQ library
........................................81
Gate library
......................................79
General operation
Input patch library
Output patch library
Link
..........................................................59
Compressors
...................................62
EQ
.....................................................62
LOW button
.............................................9
LOW-MID button
...................................9
M
M.BAND DYNA.
............................... 142
Machine control
....................................98
MASTER button
......................................8
Max 100
................................................ 144
Meters
Stereo meters
.....................................9
MIDI
...............................................84
Bulk dump
.................................... 107
Bulk dump messages
Control changes
........................... 104
Data format
.................................. 173
FADER H/L
.................................. 106
Initial parameter to control change table
.....................................10
MIDI note on/off
Parameter changes
Parameters
.................................... 104
Program changes
Scene memory to program change table
Setup
.............................................. 101
SLOT
............................................. 100
System exclusive messages
Transmission and Reception
USB port
....................................... 100
MIDI | Bulk page
................................ 107
MIDI | Ctl Asgn page
MIDI | Pgm Asgn page
MIDI | Setup page
.............................. 102
MIDI button
.............................................8
MIDI IN/THRU/OUT ports
MIDI machine control
01V96i—Reference Manual
Index
117
MIDI remote
..........................................94
Banks
................................................94
LATCH
............................................97
LEARN button
...............................96
MIDI messages
...............................96
TARGET parameter
UNLATCH
.....................................97
MIDI Warning preference
MIDI/USB Section
................................10
MIX SOLO
.............................................50
MIXDOWN
...........................................49
MMC
.............................................. 98
MOD. DELAY
.....................................133
MOD. FILTER
.....................................136
MONITOR LEVEL control
Monitor out & Headphones section
...................................................... 7
MONITOR OUT connectors
Monitor Source selector
Monitoring
.............................................49
Digital input channel status
LAST SOLO
....................................50
MIX SOLO
......................................50
MIXDOWN
....................................49
MONO
.............................................50
RECORDING
.................................49
Solo function
...................................51
Solo safe function
Solo setup
........................................49
MONO
....................................................50
MONO DELAY
...................................132
MULTI FILTER
...................................141
Mute groups
...........................................59
Muting
.....................................................89
N
Naming
............................................ 28 ,
Nominal Pan preference
Nuendo
...................................................83
Nuendo/Cubase
.....................................93
O
OMNI OUT connectors
ON buttons
...........................................7
OpenDeck
.............................................143
Other functions
...................................109
Preferences
....................................109
Output patch
..........................................44
Initial settings
...............................127
Parameters
.....................................125
Output patch library
.............................76
Output section
.......................................13
P
PAD switches
.....................................7
Pair Confirmation preference
PAIR/GROUP button
............................ 8
Pair/Grup | In Comp page
Pair/Grup | In EQ page
Pair/Grup | In Fader page
Pair/Grup | In Mute page
Pair/Grup | Input page
Pair/Grup | Out Comp page
Pair/Grup | Out EQ page
Pair/Grup | Out Fader page
Pair/Grup | Out Mute page
Pair/Grup | Output page
Pairing
..............................................26
HORIZONTAL
..............................27
Using the display
............................27
Using the SEL buttons
VERTICAL
......................................27
PAN control
.............................................9
Pan/Route | Bus To St page
Pan/Route | Ch Edit page
Pan/Route | Pan page
............................25
Pan/Route | ROUT1-16 page
Pan/Route | ROUT17-ST1 page
Pan/Route | Surr ST IN page
Pan/Route | Surr1-16 page
Pan/Route | Surr17-32 page
PAN/ROUTING button
Pan/Surr | Surr Mode page
PAN/SURR LINK
..................................53
Panning
............................................22
F.S
......................................................34
FOLLOW PAN
...............................24
GANG
..............................................22
INDIVIDUAL
.................................22
INV GANG
.....................................22
PAN buttons
...................................22
Parameter changes
............................. 106
Parameter lists
..................................... 119
Parameter wheel
......................................9
Patch | 2TR Out page
............................45
Patch | Cascade In page
Patch | Direct Out page
Patch | Effect page
..................................64
Patch | IN LIB page
...............................75
Patch | IN Name page
Patch | In Patch page
.............................43
Patch | Insert In page
............................48
Patch | Out LIB page
.............................76
Patch | Out Name page
Patch | Out Patch page
Patch | USB OUT page
PATCH button
................................. 8 ,
Patch Confirmation preference
Patching
...................................................43
2TR digital outputs
ADAT OUT connector
Direct outs
.......................................46
Input patching
................................43
Insert in
............................................48
Insert patching
................................47
OMNI OUT connector
Output patching
.............................44
TO HOST USB channels
PEAK indicators
............................... 7 ,
PHANTOM +48V
.................................10
Phantom Power
.....................................12
CH1–4 ON/OFF switch
CH5–8 ON/OFF switch
CH9–12 ON/OFF switch
Phase
........................................................18
PHASER
............................................... 135
PHONES jack
....................................7
PHONES LEVEL control
PLUG-IN
..............................................107
Plug-ins
................................................... 90
POWER ON/OFF switch
Power section
......................................... 11
Prefer1 page
.........................................109
Prefer2 page
.........................................110
Preferences
...........................................109
Pro tools
............................................83
Automation
..................................... 93
Channel display mode
Channel levels
................................. 89
Control surface operation
Explicit mute
................................... 89
Flip mode
........................................ 90
Implicit mute
.................................. 89
Insert display mode
Meter display mode
MIDI
................................................ 84
Muting
............................................. 90
Panning
......................................89
Plug-ins
............................................ 90
Pre or Post
....................................... 90
Scrub & Shuttle
.............................. 92
Selecting
........................................... 89
Send levels
....................................... 90
Soloing
............................................. 90
Program changes
PROTECT button
................................. 69
Q
Q control
.................................................. 9
Q, EQ
....................................................... 21
R
Rear Panel
PHANTOM +48V
Rear panel
............................................... 10
AD output section
Digital I/O section
MIDI/USB Section
Power section
................................. 11
SLOT section
.................................. 11
RECALL button
...................................... 9
Recall Confirmation preference
Recall safe function
............................... 72
RECORDING
........................................ 49
Remote
.................................................... 83
FRAMES
.......................................... 99
Insert display mode
LOCATE/TIME section
Machine control
MACHINE CONTROL section
............................................ 98
MIDI messages
............................... 96
MIDI remote
.................................. 94
Nuendo
............................................ 83
ProTools
.......................................... 83
REMOTE
......................................... 83
Target parameter
........................... 85
TRACK ARMING section
TRANSPORT section
01V96i—Reference Manual
118
Index
REMOTE button
.............................. 8
Remote Layer
Nuendo/Cubase
............................. 93
Pro tools
.......................................... 83
RESET BOTH
....................................... 27
REV+CHORUS
.................................. 137
REV+FLANGE
................................... 137
REV+SYMPHO.
................................. 138
REV->CHORUS
................................. 137
REV->FLANGE
.................................. 138
REV->PAN
.......................................... 138
REV->SYMPHO.
................................ 138
REVERB HALL
................................... 132
REVERB PLATE
................................. 132
REVERB ROOM
................................ 132
REVERB STAGE
................................ 132
REVERSE GATE
................................ 132
REV-X
.................................................. 144
RING MOD.
........................................ 136
ROTARY
.............................................. 136
Routing
................................................... 22
Routing ST Pair Link preference
S
Sampling rates
....................................... 14
DOUBLE CHANNEL
DOUBLE SPEED
........................... 16
Setting the higher sampling rates
............................................ 16
SINGLE
........................................... 16
SRC sections
................................... 14
Scene | In Fade page
............................. 71
Scene | Out Fade page
Scene | Rcl Safe page
............................. 72
Scene | Scene page
................................ 69
Scene | Sort page
................................... 72
SCENE button
..........................................8
Scene MEM Auto Update preference
................................................. 109
Scene memories
.................................... 68
Auto update function
Edit indicators
................................ 68
Fading
.............................................. 71
PROTECT button
Recall safe function
Scene numbers
............................... 68
Shadow memory
............................ 70
Sorting
............................................. 72
Storing & Recalling
Using the Scene Memory Page
What is stored
................................ 68
Scene memory #00
............................... 68
Scene memory #Ud
.............................. 68
SCENE MEMORY section
Scene numbers
...................................... 68
Scene up/down buttons
SEL buttons
.......................................... 7 ,
SELECTED CHANNEL section
Setting levels
.......................................... 38
Shadow memory
................................... 70
SIGNAL indicators
SINGLE
.................................................. 16
SLOT
........................................ 11 ,
SLOT section
.......................................... 11
Solo
.......................................................... 49
LAST SOLO
.................................... 50
LISTEN
............................................ 50
MIX SOLO
...................................... 50
MIXDOWN
.................................... 49
RECORDING
................................. 49
SOLO
............................................... 49
Solo function
................................... 51
SOLO SAFE CHANNEL
Solo safe function
........................... 50
SOLO TRIM
................................... 50
SOLO buttons
......................................7
SOLO indicator
....................................... 9
SOLO section
........................................... 9
SRC sections
........................................... 14
ST IN button
............................................ 8
ST IN section
........................................... 8
STEREO DELAY
................................133
STEREO fader
.......................................... 8
Stereo meters
............................................ 9
Stereo out
................................................ 29
Attenuating
..................................... 30
Compressing
................................... 30
Delaying
........................................... 30
EQ’ing
.............................................. 31
EQ’ing and Balancing
Naming
............................................ 35
Pairing
.............................................. 33
Setting from the control surface
............................................ 33
Setting from the display
Setting the levels
............................. 33
Viewing the settings
STEREO OUT connectors
STEREO section
...................................... 8
STORE button
......................................... 9
Store Confirmation preference
Storing and Recalling
........................... 69
Surround
................................................. 52
BUS1–BUS8
.................................... 54
DIV
................................................... 56
F.S
..................................................... 34
F/R
.................................................... 56
FAST
................................................ 56
INIT
.................................................. 54
LFE
................................................... 56
LINK
................................................ 56
Pan graph
........................................ 56
PAN/SURR LINK
Panning
............................................ 56
PATTERN
....................................... 56
Setting up and Selecting
ST LINK
.......................................... 56
SURROUND MODE
Trajectory patterns
SURROUND MODE
........................... 53
Surround modes
............................. 52
Factory-default
............................... 52
SYMPHONIC
......................................134
SYNC parameter
.................................112
System exclusive messages
System version
.....................................113
T
Tab scroll buttons
....................................9
Target parameter
...................................85
TO HOST USB port
..............................10
Trajectory patterns
................................57
TREMOLO
.......................................... 135
U
UNLATCH
.............................................97
USB
..........................................................10
USB port
....................................... 100
USB OUT page
......................................45
User assignable layer
.......................... 110
USER DEFINED KEYS
Initial assignments
Utility | Battery page
.......................... 113
Utility | CH Status page
UTILITY button
......................................8
V
Variable mode
................................. 39
,
VERTICAL
.............................................27
View | Fader page
View | Library page
...............................75
View | Parameter page
VIEW button
............................................8
Vintage Phaser
.................................... 144
W
Window
Changing the surround mode
Channel Pairing
..............................27
Copy operation
...............................42
WORD CLOCK IN connector
WORD CLOCK OUT connector
01V96i—Reference Manual
USER DEFINED KEYS
119
Appendix: Parameter Lists
USER DEFINED KEYS
# Function
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
No Assign
Scene MEM. Recall +1
Scene MEM. Recall –1
Scene MEM. Recall No. XX
Effect-1 Lib. Recall +1
Effect-1 Lib. Recall –1
Effect-1 Lib. Recall No.XX
Effect-2 Lib. Recall +1
8
9
Effect-2 Lib. Recall –1
Effect-2 Lib. Recall No.XX
10 Effect-3 Lib. Recall +1
11 Effect-3 Lib. Recall –1
12 Effect-3 Lib. Recall No.XX
13 Effect-4 Lib. Recall +1
14 Effect-4 Lib. Recall –1
15 Effect-4 Lib. Recall No.XX
16 Effect-1 Bypass On/Off
17 Effect-2 Bypass On/Off
18 Effect-3 Bypass On/Off
19 Effect-4 Bypass On/Off
20 Channel Lib. Recall +1
21 Channel Lib. Recall –1
22 Channel Lib. Recall No. XX
23 GATE Lib. Recall +1
24 GATE Lib. Recall –1
25 GATE Lib. Recall No. XX
26 COMP Lib. Recall +1
27 COMP Lib. Recall –1
28 COMP Lib. Recall No. XX
29 EQ Lib. Recall +1
30 EQ Lib. Recall –1
31 EQ Lib. Recall No. XX
32 Input Patch Lib. Recall +1
33 Input Patch Lib. Recall –1
34 Input Patch Lib. Recall No. XX
35 Output Patch Lib. Recall +1
36 Output Patch Lib. Recall –1
37 Output Patch Lib. Recall No. XX
38 Input Fader Group Enable A
39 Input Fader Group Enable B
40 Input Fader Group Enable C
41 Input Fader Group Enable D
42 Input Fader Group Enable E
43 Input Fader Group Enable F
44 Input Fader Group EnableG
45 Input Fader Group Enable H
46 Input MUTE Group Enable I
47 Input MUTE Group Enable J
48 Input MUTE Group Enable K
49 Input MUTE Group Enable L
50 Input MUTE Group Enable M
51 Input MUTE Group Enable N
Display
No Assign
Scene +1 Recall
Scene –1 Recall
Scene XX Recall
Fx1 Lib+1 Recall
Fx1 Lib–1 Recall
Fx1 LibXXX RCL.
Fx2 Lib+1 Recall
Fx2 Lib–1 Recall
Fx2 LibXXX RCL.
Fx3 Lib+1 Recall
Fx3 Lib–1 Recall
Fx3 LibXXX RCL.
Fx4 Lib+1 Recall
Fx4 Lib–1 Recall
Fx4 LibXXX RCL.
Fx1 Bypass
Fx2 Bypass
Fx3 Bypass
Fx4 Bypass
CH Lib+1 Recall
CH Lib–1 Recall
CH LibXXX Recall
Gate Lib+1 RCL.
Gate Lib–1 RCL.
Gate LibXXX RCL.
Comp Lib+1 RCL.
Comp Lib–1 RCL.
Comp LibXXX RCL.
EQ Lib+1 Recall
EQ Lib–1 Recall
EQ LibXXX Recall
IN Patch Lib+1
IN Patch Lib–1
IN Patch LibXX
Out Patch Lib+1
Out Patch Lib–1
Out Patch LibXX
IN Fader Group A
IN Fader Group B
IN Fader Group C
IN Fader Group D
IN Fader Group E
IN Fader Group F
IN Fader Group G
IN Fader Group H
IN Mute Group I
IN Mute Group J
IN Mute Group K
IN Mute Group L
IN Mute Group M
IN Mute Group N
# Function Display
52 Input MUTE Group Enable O
53 Input MUTE Group Enable P
54 Output Fader Group Enable Q
55 Output Fader Group Enable R
56 Output Fader Group Enable S
57 Output Fader Group Enable T
58 Output MUTE Group Enable U
59 Output MUTE Group Enable V
60 Output MUTE Group Enable W
61 Output MUTE Group Enable X
62 Input Fader Group Assign X
63 Input Mute Group Assign X
64 Input EQ Group Assign X
65 Input COMP Group Assign X
66 Output Fader Group Assign X
67 Output Mute Group Assign X
68 Output EQ Group Assign X
69 Output COMP Group Assign X
70 Input Mute Group Master X
71 Output MUTE Group Master X
72 PEAK HOLD On/Off
73 OSCILLATOR On/Off
74 SOLO Enable
75
FADER/SOLO RELEASE Mode
On/Off
FaderSolo RELEASE
76 Control Room Monitor MONO
77 Pan / Surround Link
78 Channel Name ID/Short
79 Channel Copy
80 Channel Paste
81 Display Back
82 Display Forward
C-R MONO
PAN/SURR LINK
CH ID/Short
Channel Copy
Channel Paste
Display Back
Display Forward
83 UDEF KEYS BANK +1
84 UDEF KEYS BANK –1
85 UDEF KEYS BANK X
86 REMOTE USER DEFINE BANK +1
87 REMOTE USER DEFINE BANK –1
UDEF KEYS BANK+1
UDEF KEYS BANK–1
UDEF KEYS BANK x
RMT UDEF BANK+1
RMT UDEF BANK–1
88 REMOTE USER DEFINE BANK X RMT UDEF BANK X
89 REMOTE USER ASS LAYER BANK +1 USR LAYER BANK+1
90 REMOTE USER ASS LAYER BANK –1 USR LAYER BANK–1
91 REMOTE USER ASS LAYER BANK X USR LAYER BANK X
92 MIDI NOTE No.XX
93 MIDI Program change No.XX
94 MIDI Control Change No.XX
95 Machine REC
96 Machine PLAY
97 Machine STOP
98 Machine FF
99 Machine REW
100 Machine SHUTTLE
101 Machine SCRUB
102 Machine LOCATE X
103 Machine Set LOCATE X
104 Machine RTZ
MIDI NOTE XXX
MIDI PGM XXX
MIDI CC XXX
Machine REC
Machine PLAY
Machine STOP
Machine FF
Machine REW
Machine SHUTTLE
Machine SCRUB
Machine LOCATE X
Machine Capture X
Machine RTZ
IN Mute Group O
IN Mute Group P
OutFader Group Q
OutFader Group R
OutFader Group S
OutFader Group T
Out Mute Group U
Out Mute Group V
Out Mute Group W
Out Mute Group X
IN Fader Assign X
IN Mute Assign X
IN EQ Assign x
IN COMP Assign x
OutFader Assign X
Out Mute Assign X
Out EQ Assign x
Out COMP Assign x
In Mute Master X
Out Mute Master X
Peak Hold
OSC ON/OFF
SOLO ENABLE
01V96i—Reference Manual
120
Appendix: Parameter Lists
# Function
135 DAW REW
136 DAW SHUTTLE
137 DAW SCRUB
138 DAW AUDITION
139 DAW PRE
140 DAW IN
141 DAW OUT
142 DAW POST
143 DAW RTZ
144 DAW END
145 DAW ONLINE
146 DAW LOOP
147 DAW QUICKPUNCH
148 DAW GROUP STATUS
149 DAW AUTO FADER
150 DAW AUTO MUTE
151 DAW AUTO PAN
152 DAW AUTO SEND
153 DAW AUTO PLUGIN
154 DAW AUTO SEND MUTE
155 DAW AUTO READ
156 DAW AUTO TOUCH
157 DAW AUTO LATCH
158 DAW AUTO WRITE
159 DAW AUTO TRIM
160 DAW AUTO OFF
161 DAW AUTO SUSPEND
162 DAW AUTO STATUS
163 DAW MONITOR STATUS
105 Machine Set RTZ
106 Track Arming 1
107 Track Arming 2
108 Track Arming 3
109 Track Arming 4
110 Track Arming 5
111 Track Arming 6
112 Track Arming 7
113 Track Arming 8
114 Track Arming 9
115 Track Arming 10
116 Track Arming 11
117 Track Arming 12
118 Track Arming 13
119 Track Arming 14
120 Track Arming 15
121 Track Arming 16
122 Track Arming 17
123 Track Arming 18
124 Track Arming 19
125 Track Arming 20
126 Track Arming 21
127 Track Arming 22
128 Track Arming 23
129 Track Arming 24
130 Track Arming All Clear
131 DAW REC
132 DAW PLAY
133 DAW STOP
134 DAW FF
Display
DAW REW
DAW SHUTTLE
DAW SCRUB
DAW AUDITION
DAW PRE
DAW IN
DAW OUT
DAW POST
DAW RTZ
DAW END
DAW ONLINE
DAW LOOP
DAW QUICKPUNCH
DAW GROUP STATUS
DAW AUTO FADER
DAW AUTO MUTE
DAW AUTO PAN
DAW AUTO SEND
DAW AUTO PLUGIN
DAW AUTO SENDMUTE
DAW AUTO READ
DAW AUTO TOUCH
DAW AUTO LATCH
DAW AUTO WRITE
DAW AUTO TRIM
DAW AUTO OFF
DAW AUTO SUSPEND
DAW AUTO STATUS
DAW MONI STATUS
Machine Set RTZ
Track Arming 1
Track Arming 2
Track Arming 3
Track Arming 4
Track Arming 5
Track Arming 6
Track Arming 7
Track Arming 8
Track Arming 9
Track Arming 10
Track Arming 11
Track Arming 12
Track Arming 13
Track Arming 14
Track Arming 15
Track Arming 16
Track Arming 17
Track Arming 18
Track Arming 19
Track Arming 20
Track Arming 21
Track Arming 22
Track Arming 23
Track Arming 24
Track Arming CLR
DAW REC
DAW PLAY
DAW STOP
DAW FF
# Function
164 DAW CREATE GROUP
165 DAW SUSPEND GROUP
166 DAW WINDOW TRANSPORT
167 DAW WINDOW INSERT
168 DAW WINDOW MIX/EDIT
169 DAW WINDOW MEM-LOC
170 DAW WINDOW STATUS
171 DAW Shortcut UNDO
172 DAW Shortcut SAVE
173 DAW Shortcut EDIT MODE
174 DAW Shortcut EDIT TOOL
175 DAW Shortcut SHIFT/ADD
176 DAW Shortcut OPTION/ALL
177 DAW Shortcut CTRL/CLUCH
178 DAW Shortcut ALT/FINE
179 DAW BANK +
180 DAW BANK –
181 DAW Channel +
182 DAW Channel –
183 DAW REC/RDY X
184 DAW REC/RDY ALL
185
Studio Manager Window Control
Close
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
Studio Manager Window Control
Close All
Studio Manager Window Control
Selected Channel
Studio Manager Window Control
Library
Studio Manager Window Control
Patch Editor
Studio Manager Window Control
Surround Editor
Studio Manager Window Control
Effect Editor
Studio Manager Window Control
Meter
Studio Manager Window Control
Layer
Studio Manager Window Control
Master
Display
DAW CREATE GROUP
DAW SUSPEND GRP
DAW WIN TRANSPORT
DAW WIN INSERT
DAW WIN MIX/EDIT
DAW WIN MEM-LOC
DAW WIN STATUS
DAW UNDO
DAW SAVE
DAW EDIT MODE
DAW EDIT TOOL
DAW SHIFT/ADD
DAW OPTION/ALL
DAW CTRL/CLUCH
DAW ALT/FINE
DAW BANK +
DAW BANK –
DAW Channel +
DAW Channel –
DAW REC/RDY X
DAW REC/RDY ALL
SM CTRL Close
SM CTRL Close All
SM CTRL Sel Ch
SM CTRL Library
SM CTRL Patch
SM CTRL Surround
SM CTRL Effect
SM CTRL Meter
SM CTRL Layer
SM CTRL Master
01V96i—Reference Manual
USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments
121
USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments
TITLE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BANK A
Scene Recall
Scene 1 Recall
Scene 2 Recall
Scene 3 Recall
Scene 4 Recall
Scene 5 Recall
Scene 6 Recall
Scene 7 Recall
Scene 8 Recall
BANK B
Group
Enable
IN Fader
Group A
IN Mute
Group I
IN Fader
Group B
IN Mute
Group J
IN Fader
Group C
IN Mute
Group K
IN Fader
Group D
IN Mute
Group L
BANK C
DAW 1
DAW WIN
MIX/EDIT
DAW BANK –
DAW BANK +
DAW
SHUTTLE
DAW SCRUB
DAW STOP
DAW PLAY
BANK D
DAW 2
UDEF BANK D UDEF BANK C
DAW
OPTION/ALL
DAW AUTO
READ
DAW AUTO
TOUCH
DAW AUTO
LATCH
DAW AUTO
WRITE
DAW AUTO
TRIM
DAW AUTO
OFF
BANK E
Machine
Control
BANK F
Program
Change
BANK G
Special
Function
BANK H
No Assign
Machine
SHUTTLE
Machine
SCRUB
MIDI PGM 1 Display Back No Assign
MIDI PGM 2
Machine RTZ MIDI PGM 3
Machine REC MIDI PGM 4
Display
Forward
Channel
Copy
Channel
Paste
No Assign
No Assign
No Assign
Machine
STOP
Machine
PLAY
Machine
REW
MIDI PGM 5 No Assign
MIDI PGM 6 No Assign
MIDI PGM 7 No Assign
No Assign
No Assign
No Assign
Machine FF MIDI PGM 8 No Assign No Assign
Input Patch Parameters
INPUT
Description
AD IN 13
AD IN 14
AD IN 15
AD IN 16
ADAT1 IN
ADAT2 IN
ADAT3 IN
ADAT4 IN
ADAT5 IN
ADAT6 IN
ADAT7 IN
ADAT8 IN
Slot CH1 IN
Slot CH2 IN
Slot CH3 IN
Slot CH4 IN
NONE
AD IN 1
AD IN 2
AD IN 3
AD IN 4
AD IN 5
AD IN 6
AD IN 7
AD IN 8
AD IN 9
AD IN 10
AD IN 11
AD IN 12
Port ID
ADAT5
ADAT6
ADAT7
ADAT8
SL-01
SL-02
SL-03
SL-04
AD13
AD14
AD15
AD16
ADAT1
ADAT2
ADAT3
ADAT4
–
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
AD8
AD9
AD10
AD11
AD12
INSERT IN
Description
AD IN 13
AD IN 14
AD IN 15
AD IN 16
ADAT1 IN
ADAT2 IN
ADAT3 IN
ADAT4 IN
ADAT5 IN
ADAT6 IN
ADAT7 IN
ADAT8 IN
Slot CH1 IN
Slot CH2 IN
Slot CH3 IN
Slot CH4 IN
NONE
AD IN 1
AD IN 2
AD IN 3
AD IN 4
AD IN 5
AD IN 6
AD IN 7
AD IN 8
AD IN 9
AD IN 10
AD IN 11
AD IN 12
Port ID
ADAT5
ADAT6
ADAT7
ADAT8
SL-01
SL-02
SL-03
SL-04
AD13
AD14
AD15
AD16
ADAT1
ADAT2
ADAT3
ADAT4
–
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
AD8
AD9
AD10
AD11
AD12
EFFECT IN
Port ID Description
–
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
NONE
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
INS CH1 InsertOut-CH1
INS CH2 InsertOut-CH2
INS CH3 InsertOut-CH3
INS CH4 InsertOut-CH4
INS CH5 InsertOut-CH5
INS CH6 InsertOut-CH6
INS CH7 InsertOut-CH7
INS CH8 InsertOut-CH8
INS CH9 InsertOut-CH9
INS CH10 InsertOut-CH10
INS CH11 InsertOut-CH11
INS CH12 InsertOut-CH12
INS CH13 InsertOut-CH13
INS CH14 InsertOut-CH14
INS CH15 InsertOut-CH15
INS CH16 InsertOut-CH16
INS CH17 InsertOut-CH17
INS CH18 InsertOut-CH18
INS CH19 InsertOut-CH19
INS CH20 InsertOut-CH20
CASCADE
Description
Slot CH5 IN
Slot CH6 IN
Slot CH7 IN
Slot CH8 IN
Slot CH9 IN
Slot CH10 IN
Slot CH11 IN
Slot CH12 IN
Slot CH13 IN
Slot CH14 IN
Slot CH15 IN
Slot CH16 IN
AD IN 1
AD IN 2
AD IN 3
AD IN 4
NONE
ADAT1 IN
ADAT2 IN
ADAT3 IN
ADAT4 IN
ADAT5 IN
ADAT6 IN
ADAT7 IN
ADAT8 IN
Slot CH1 IN
Slot CH2 IN
Slot CH3 IN
Slot CH4 IN
Port ID
SL-13
SL-14
SL-15
SL-16
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
SL-05
SL-06
SL-07
SL-08
SL-09
SL-10
SL-11
SL-12
–
ADAT1
ADAT2
ADAT3
ADAT4
ADAT5
ADAT6
ADAT7
ADAT8
SL-01
SL-02
SL-03
SL-04
01V96i—Reference Manual
122
Appendix: Parameter Lists
INPUT
Description
USB CH4 IN
USB CH5 IN
USB CH6 IN
USB CH7 IN
USB CH8 IN
USB CH9 IN
USB CH10 IN
USB CH11 IN
USB CH12 IN
USB CH13 IN
USB CH14 IN
USB CH15 IN
USB CH16 IN
Effect1 OUT 1
Effect1 OUT 2
Effect2 OUT 1
Slot CH5 IN
Slot CH6 IN
Slot CH7 IN
Slot CH8 IN
Slot CH9 IN
Slot CH10 IN
Slot CH11 IN
Slot CH12 IN
Slot CH13 IN
Slot CH14 IN
Slot CH15 IN
Slot CH16 IN
USB CH1 IN
USB CH2 IN
USB CH3 IN
Effect2 OUT 2
Effect3 OUT 1
Effect3 OUT 2
Effect4 OUT 1
Effect4 OUT 2
2TR IN Dig. L
2TR IN Dig. R
Port ID
USB12
USB13
USB14
USB15
USB16
FX1-1
FX1-2
FX2-1
USB4
USB5
USB6
USB7
USB8
USB9
USB10
USB11
FX2-2
FX3-1
FX3-2
FX4-1
FX4-2
2TD-L
2TD-R
SL-12
SL-13
SL-14
SL-15
SL-16
USB1
USB2
USB3
SL-05
SL-06
SL-07
SL-08
SL-09
SL-10
SL-11
Port ID
INSERT IN
Description
USB12
USB13
USB14
USB15
USB16
FX1-1
FX1-2
FX2-1
USB4
USB5
USB6
USB7
USB8
USB9
USB10
USB11
FX2-2
FX3-1
FX3-2
FX4-1
FX4-2
2TD-L
2TD-R
SL-12
SL-13
SL-14
SL-15
SL-16
USB1
USB2
USB3
SL-05
SL-06
SL-07
SL-08
SL-09
SL-10
SL-11
USB CH4 IN
USB CH5 IN
USB CH6 IN
USB CH7 IN
USB CH8 IN
USB CH9 IN
USB CH10 IN
USB CH11 IN
USB CH12 IN
USB CH13 IN
USB CH14 IN
USB CH15 IN
USB CH16 IN
Effect1 OUT 1
Effect1 OUT 2
Effect2 OUT 1
Slot CH5 IN
Slot CH6 IN
Slot CH7 IN
Slot CH8 IN
Slot CH9 IN
Slot CH10 IN
Slot CH11 IN
Slot CH12 IN
Slot CH13 IN
Slot CH14 IN
Slot CH15 IN
Slot CH16 IN
USB CH1 IN
USB CH2 IN
USB CH3 IN
Effect2 OUT 2
Effect3 OUT 1
Effect3 OUT 2
Effect4 OUT 1
Effect4 OUT 2
2TR IN Dig. L
2TR IN Dig. R
Port ID
EFFECT IN
Description
INS CH21 InsertOut-CH21
INS CH22 InsertOut-CH22
INS CH23 InsertOut-CH23
INS CH24 InsertOut-CH24
INS CH25 InsertOut-CH25
INS CH26 InsertOut-CH26
INS CH27 InsertOut-CH27
INS CH28 InsertOut-CH28
INS CH29 InsertOut-CH29
INS CH30 InsertOut-CH30
INS CH31 InsertOut-CH31
INS CH32 InsertOut-CH32
INS BUS1 InsertOut-BUS1
INS BUS2 InsertOut-BUS2
INS BUS3 InsertOut-BUS3
INS BUS4 InsertOut-BUS4
INS BUS5 InsertOut-BUS5
INS BUS6 InsertOut-BUS6
INS BUS7 InsertOut-BUS7
INS BUS8 InsertOut-BUS8
INS AUX1 InsertOut-AUX1
INS AUX2 InsertOut-AUX2
INS AUX3 InsertOut-AUX3
INS AUX4 InsertOut-AUX4
INS AUX5 InsertOut-AUX5
INS AUX6 InsertOut-AUX6
INS AUX7 InsertOut-AUX7
INS AUX8 InsertOut-AUX8
INS ST-L InsertOut-ST-L
INS ST-R InsertOut-ST-R
Port ID
CASCADE
Description
AD12
AD13
AD14
AD15
AD16
2TD-L
2TD-R
AD5
AD6
AD7
AD8
AD9
AD10
AD11
AD IN 5
AD IN 6
AD IN 7
AD IN 8
AD IN 9
AD IN 10
AD IN 11
AD IN 12
AD IN 13
AD IN 14
AD IN 15
AD IN 16
2TR IN Dig. L
2TR IN Dig. R
01V96i—Reference Manual
Initial Input Patch Settings
123
Initial Input Patch Settings
STI1L
STI1R
STI2L
STI2R
STI3L
STI3R
STI4L
STI4R
CHANNEL
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
30
31
32
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
6
7
8
9
3
4
5
1
2
S-2
S-3
S-4
S-5
ADAT6
ADAT7
ADAT8
S-1
AD14
AD15
AD16
ADAT1
ADAT2
ADAT3
ADAT4
ADAT5
S-6
S-7
S-8
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
AD8
AD9
AD10
AD11
AD12
AD13
FX1-1
FX1-2
FX2-1
FX2-2
FX3-1
FX3-2
FX4-1
FX4-2
EFFECT IN PATCH
1-1
1-2
2-1
2-2
3-1
3-2
4-1
4-2
AUX1
NONE
AUX2
NONE
AUX3
NONE
AUX4
NONE
CASCADE IN PATCH
BUS8
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
AUX8
ST L
ST R
SOLO L
SOLO R
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
EFFECT TYPE
EFFECT1
EFFECT2
EFFECT3
EFFECT4
REVERB HALL
REVERB ROOM
REVERB STAGE
REVERB PLATE
(mono input)
01V96i—Reference Manual
124
Appendix: Parameter Lists
CH25
CH26
CH27
CH28
CH29
CH30
CH31
CH32
CH17
CH18
CH19
CH20
CH21
CH22
CH23
CH24
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
CH15
CH16
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CHANNEL NAME
SHORT
CH25
CH26
CH27
CH28
CH29
CH30
CH31
CH32
CH17
CH18
CH19
CH20
CH21
CH22
CH23
CH24
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
CH15
CH16
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CHANNEL ID
CH25
CH26
CH27
CH28
CH29
CH30
CH31
CH32
CH17
CH18
CH19
CH20
CH21
CH22
CH23
CH24
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
CH15
CH16
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
ST IN1
ST IN2
ST IN3
ST IN4
STI1
STI2
STI3
STI4
STI1
STI2
STI3
STI4
LONG
CH25
CH26
CH27
CH28
CH29
CH30
CH31
CH32
CH17
CH18
CH19
CH20
CH21
CH22
CH23
CH24
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
CH15
CH16
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
STEREO IN1
STEREO IN2
STEREO IN3
STEREO IN4
01V96i—Reference Manual
Output Patch Parameters
125
Output Patch Parameters
SLOT, ADAT, OMNI,
2TR OUT Digital
Source Description
BUS7
BUS8
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
–
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
NONE
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
AUX7
AUX8
ST L
ST R
INS CH1
INS CH2
INS CH3
INS CH4
AUX7
AUX8
STEREO L
STEREO R
InsertOut-CH1
InsertOut-CH2
InsertOut-CH3
InsertOut-CH4
INS CH5
INS CH6
INS CH7
INS CH8
InsertOut-CH5
InsertOut-CH6
InsertOut-CH7
InsertOut-CH8
INS CH9 InsertOut-CH9
INS CH10 InsertOut-CH10
INS CH11 InsertOut-CH11
INS CH12 InsertOut-CH12
INS CH13 InsertOut-CH13
INS CH14 InsertOut-CH14
INS CH15 InsertOut-CH15
INS CH16 InsertOut-CH16
INS CH17 InsertOut-CH17
INS CH18 InsertOut-CH18
INS CH19 InsertOut-CH19
INS CH20 InsertOut-CH20
INS CH21 InsertOut-CH21
INS CH22 InsertOut-CH22
INS CH23 InsertOut-CH23
INS CH24 InsertOut-CH24
INS CH25 InsertOut-CH25
INS CH26 InsertOut-CH26
INS CH27 InsertOut-CH27
INS CH28 InsertOut-CH28
INS CH29 InsertOut-CH29
INS CH30 InsertOut-CH30
INS CH31 InsertOut-CH31
INS CH32 InsertOut-CH32
INSERT IN
Source Description
AD7
AD8
AD9
AD10
AD11
AD12
AD13
AD14
–
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD15
AD16
AD IN 15
AD IN 16
ADAT1 ADAT1 IN
ADAT2 ADAT2 IN
ADAT3 ADAT3 IN
ADAT4 ADAT4 IN
ADAT5 ADAT5 IN
ADAT6 ADAT6 IN
ADAT7 ADAT7 IN
ADAT8 ADAT8 IN
SL-01
SL-02
Slot CH1 IN
Slot CH2 IN
SL-03
SL-04
SL-05
SL-06
Slot CH3 IN
Slot CH4 IN
Slot CH5 IN
Slot CH6 IN
NONE
AD IN 1
AD IN 2
AD IN 3
AD IN 4
AD IN 5
AD IN 6
AD IN 7
AD IN 8
AD IN 9
AD IN 10
AD IN 11
AD IN 12
AD IN 13
AD IN 14
SL-15
SL-16
USB1
USB2
USB3
USB4
USB5
USB6
SL-07
SL-08
SL-09
SL-10
SL-11
SL-12
SL-13
SL-14
Slot CH7 IN
Slot CH8 IN
Slot CH9 IN
Slot CH10 IN
Slot CH11 IN
Slot CH12 IN
Slot CH13 IN
Slot CH14 IN
Slot CH15 IN
Slot CH16 IN
USB CH1 IN
USB CH2 IN
USB CH3 IN
USB CH4 IN
USB CH5 IN
USB CH6 IN
USB7
USB8
USB CH7 IN
USB CH8 IN
USB9 USB CH9 IN
USB10 USB CH10 IN
DIRECT OUT USB OUT
Source Description Source Description
SL-15
SL-16
USB1
USB2
USB3
USB4
USB5
USB6
SL-07
SL-08
SL-09
SL-10
SL-11
SL-12
SL-13
SL-14
– NONE
ADAT1 ADAT1 OUT
ADAT2 ADAT2 OUT
ADAT3 ADAT3 OUT
ADAT4 ADAT4 OUT
ADAT5 ADAT5 OUT
ADAT6 ADAT6 OUT
ADAT7 ADAT7 OUT
ADAT8 ADAT8 OUT
SL-01
SL-02
Slot CH1 OUT
Slot CH2 OUT
SL-03
SL-04
SL-05
SL-06
Slot CH3 OUT
Slot CH4 OUT
Slot CH5 OUT
Slot CH6 OUT
–
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
NONE
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
Slot CH7 OUT
Slot CH8 OUT
AUX7
AUX8
Slot CH9 OUT ST L
Slot CH10 OUT ST R
Slot CH11 OUT INS CH1
Slot CH12 OUT INS CH2
Slot CH13 OUT INS CH3
Slot CH14 OUT INS CH4
AUX7
AUX8
STEREO L
STEREO R
InsertOut-CH1
InsertOut-CH2
InsertOut-CH3
InsertOut-CH4
Slot CH15 OUT INS CH5
Slot CH16 OUT INS CH6
USB CH1 OUT
USB CH2 OUT
INS CH7
INS CH8
USB CH3 OUT
USB CH4 OUT
USB CH5 OUT
USB CH6 OUT
INS CH9
InsertOut-CH5
InsertOut-CH6
InsertOut-CH7
InsertOut-CH8
InsertOut-CH9
INS CH10 InsertOut-CH10
INS CH11 InsertOut-CH11
INS CH12 InsertOut-CH12
USB7
USB8
USB CH7 OUT
USB CH8 OUT
INS CH13
INS CH14
InsertOut-CH13
InsertOut-CH14
USB9 USB CH9 OUT INS CH15 InsertOut-CH15
USB10 USB CH10 OUT INS CH16 InsertOut-CH16
USB11 USB CH11 OUT INS CH17 InsertOut-CH17
USB12 USB CH12 OUT INS CH18 InsertOut-CH18
USB13 USB CH13 OUT INS CH19 InsertOut-CH19
USB14 USB CH14 OUT INS CH20 InsertOut-CH20
USB15 USB CH15 OUT INS CH21 InsertOut-CH21
USB16 USB CH16 OUT INS CH22 InsertOut-CH22
OMNI1 OMNI OUT 1
OMNI2 OMNI OUT 2
INS CH23 InsertOut-CH23
INS CH24 InsertOut-CH24
OMNI3 OMNI OUT 3
OMNI4 OMNI OUT 4
2TD-L
2TD-R
INS CH25
INS CH26
InsertOut-CH25
InsertOut-CH26
2TR OUT Dig. L INS CH27 InsertOut-CH27
2TR OUT Dig. R INS CH28 InsertOut-CH28
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
INS CH29 InsertOut-CH29
INS CH30 InsertOut-CH30
INS CH31 InsertOut-CH31
INS CH32 InsertOut-CH32
01V96i—Reference Manual
126
Appendix: Parameter Lists
SLOT, ADAT, OMNI,
2TR OUT Digital
Source Description
INS BUS1 InsertOut-BUS1
INS BUS2 InsertOut-BUS2
INS BUS3 InsertOut-BUS3
INS BUS4 InsertOut-BUS4
INS BUS5 InsertOut-BUS5
INS BUS6 InsertOut-BUS6
INS BUS7 InsertOut-BUS7
INS BUS8 InsertOut-BUS8
INS AUX1 InsertOut-AUX1
INS AUX2 InsertOut-AUX2
INS AUX3 InsertOut-AUX3
INS AUX4 InsertOut-AUX4
INS AUX5 InsertOut-AUX5
INS AUX6 InsertOut-AUX6
INS AUX7 InsertOut-AUX7
INS AUX8 InsertOut-AUX8
INS ST-L InsertOut-STL
INS ST-R InsertOut-STR
CAS BUS1 Cascade Out Bus1
CAS BUS2 Cascade Out Bus2
CAS BUS3 Cascade Out Bus3
CAS BUS4 Cascade Out Bus4
CAS BUS5 Cascade Out Bus5
CAS BUS6 Cascade Out Bus6
CAS BUS7 Cascade Out Bus7
CAS BUS8 Cascade Out Bus8
CAS AUX1 Cascade Out Aux1
CAS AUX2 Cascade Out Aux2
CAS AUX3 Cascade Out Aux3
CAS AUX4 Cascade Out Aux4
CAS AUX5 Cascade Out Aux5
CAS AUX6 Cascade Out Aux6
CAS AUX7 Cascade Out Aux7
CAS AUX8 Cascade Out Aux8
CAS ST-L Cascade STEREO-L
CAS ST-R Cascade STEREO-R
CASSOLOL Cascade SOLO L
CASSOLOR Cascade SOLO R
INSERT IN
Description
2TR IN Dig. R
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
USB CH11 IN
USB CH12 IN
USB CH13 IN
USB CH14 IN
USB CH15 IN
USB CH16 IN
Effect1 OUT 1
Effect1 OUT 2
Effect2 OUT 1
Effect2 OUT 2
Effect3 OUT 1
Effect3 OUT 2
Effect4 OUT 1
Effect4 OUT 2
2TR IN Dig. L
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Source
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
2TD-R
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
FX1-2
FX2-1
FX2-2
FX3-1
FX3-2
FX4-1
FX4-2
2TD-L
USB11
USB12
USB13
USB14
USB15
USB16
FX1-1
Source
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
DIRECT OUT
Description
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
USB OUT
Source Description
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
INS BUS1 InsertOut-BUS1
INS BUS2 InsertOut-BUS2
INS BUS3 InsertOut-BUS3
INS BUS4 InsertOut-BUS4
INS BUS5 InsertOut-BUS5
INS BUS6 InsertOut-BUS6
INS BUS7 InsertOut-BUS7
INS BUS8 InsertOut-BUS8
INS AUX1 InsertOut-AUX1
INS AUX2 InsertOut-AUX2
INS AUX3 InsertOut-AUX3
INS AUX4 InsertOut-AUX4
INS AUX5 InsertOut-AUX5
INS AUX6 InsertOut-AUX6
INS AUX7 InsertOut-AUX7
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
INS AUX8 InsertOut-AUX8
INS ST-L InsertOut-ST-L
INS ST-R
—
InsertOut-ST-R
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
01V96i—Reference Manual
Initial Output Patch Settings
127
Initial Output Patch Settings
OMNI OUT
1
2
3
4
DIRECT OUT
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
1
4
5
2
3
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
SLOT
SLOT1-1
SLOT1-2
SLOT1-3
SLOT1-4
SLOT1-5
SLOT1-6
SLOT1-7
SLOT1-8
SLOT1-9
SLOT1-10
SLOT1-11
SLOT1-12
SLOT1-13
SLOT1-14
SLOT1-15
SLOT1-16
ADAT OUT
1
4
5
2
3
6
7
8
ADAT1
ADAT2
ADAT3
ADAT4
ADAT5
ADAT6
ADAT7
ADAT8
SLOT-1
SLOT-2
SLOT-3
SLOT-4
SLOT-5
SLOT-6
SLOT-7
SLOT-8
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
BUS8
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
28
29
30
31
32
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
2TR OUT Digital
1L
1R
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
ST L
ST R
USB
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
1
4
5
2
3
14
15
16
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
STEREO
CHANNEL NAME
CHANNEL ID
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
ST
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
SHORT
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
ST
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
LONG
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
STEREO
01V96i—Reference Manual
128
Appendix: Parameter Lists
User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings
Bank 1 (GM Vol & Pan)
ID
Short
Name
Long
RM01 GM01 GM-CH01 VOL&PAN
Controller
ON
FADER
ON
1 2 3 4 5
END – – – –
B0 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
6
–
–
–
7
–
–
–
Data Format
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
RM02 GM02 GM-CH02 VOL&PAN
RM03 GM03 GM-CH03 VOL&PAN
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
RM04 GM04 GM-CH04 VOL&PAN
RM05 GM05 GM-CH05 VOL&PAN
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
RM06 GM06 GM-CH06 VOL&PAN
RM07 GM07 GM-CH07 VOL&PAN
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
RM08 GM08 GM-CH08 VOL&PAN
RM09 GM09 GM-CH09 VOL&PAN
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
RM10 GM10 GM-CH10 VOL&PAN
RM11 GM11 GM-CH11 VOL&PAN
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
RM12 GM12 GM-CH12 VOL&PAN
RM13 GM13 GM-CH13 VOL&PAN
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
RM14 GM14 GM-CH14 VOL&PAN
RM15 GM15 GM-CH15 VOL&PAN
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
RM16 GM16 GM-CH16 VOL&PAN
FADER
B1 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
B2 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
B3 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
B4 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
B5 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
B6 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
B7 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
B8 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
B9 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
BA 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
BB 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
BC 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
BD 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
BE 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
BF 07 FAD END –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
01V96i—Reference Manual
User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings
129
Bank 2 (GM Vol & Effect 1)
ID
Short
Name
Long
Controller
RM01 GM01 GM-CH01 VOL&EFF1
ON
FADER
RM02 GM02 GM-CH02 VOL&EFF1
ON
FADER
RM03 GM03 GM-CH03 VOL&EFF1
ON
FADER
RM04 GM04 GM-CH04 VOL&EFF1
ON
FADER
RM05 GM05 GM-CH05 VOL&EFF1
ON
FADER
RM06 GM06 GM-CH06 VOL&EFF1
ON
FADER
RM07 GM07 GM-CH07 VOL&EFF1
ON
FADER
RM08 GM08 GM-CH08 VOL&EFF1
ON
FADER
RM09 GM09 GM-CH09 VOL&EFF1
ON
FADER
RM10 GM10 GM-CH10 VOL&EFF1
ON
FADER
RM11 GM11 GM-CH11 VOL&EFF1
ON
FADER
RM12 GM12 GM-CH12 VOL&EFF1
ON
FADER
RM13 GM13 GM-CH13 VOL&EFF1
ON
FADER
RM14 GM14 GM-CH14 VOL&EFF1
ON
FADER
RM15 GM15 GM-CH15 VOL&EFF1
ON
FADER
RM16 GM16 GM-CH16 VOL&EFF1
ON
FADER
1 2 3 4 5
END – – – –
B0 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
B1 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
B2 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
B3 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
B4 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
B5 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
B6 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
B7 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
B8 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
B9 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
BA 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
BB 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
BC 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
BD 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
BE 07 FAD END –
END – – – –
BF 07 FAD END –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Data Format
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
01V96i—Reference Manual
130
Appendix: Parameter Lists
Bank 3 (XG Vol & Pan)
ID
Short
Name
Long
RM01 XG01 XG-CH01 VOL&PAN
RM02 XG02 XG-CH02 VOL&PAN
RM03 XG03 XG-CH03 VOL&PAN
RM04 XG04 XG-CH04 VOL&PAN
RM05 XG05 XG-CH05 VOL&PAN
RM06 XG06 XG-CH06 VOL&PAN
RM07 XG07 XG-CH07 VOL&PAN
RM08 XG08 XG-CH08 VOL&PAN
RM09 XG09 XG-CH09 VOL&PAN
RM10 XG10 XG-CH10 VOL&PAN
RM11 XG11 XG-CH11 VOL&PAN
RM12 XG12 XG-CH12 VOL&PAN
RM13 XG13 XG-CH13 VOL&PAN
RM14 XG14 XG-CH14 VOL&PAN
RM15 XG15 XG-CH15 VOL&PAN
RM16 XG16 XG-CH16 VOL&PAN
Controller
ON
FADER
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Data Format
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
END – – – – – – – – – –
F0 43 10 4C 08 00 0B FAD F7 END –
END – – – – – – – – – –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
FADER
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
F0 43 10 4C 08 01 0B FAD F7 END –
END – – – – – – – – – –
F0 43 10 4C 08 02 0B FAD F7 END –
END – – – – – – – – – –
F0 43 10 4C 08 03 0B FAD F7 END –
END – – – – – – – – – –
F0 43 10 4C 08 04 0B FAD F7 END –
END – – – – – – – – – –
F0 43 10 4C 08 05 0B FAD F7 END –
END – – – – – – – – – –
F0 43 10 4C 08 06 0B FAD F7 END –
END – – – – – – – – – –
F0 43 10 4C 08 07 0B FAD F7 END –
END – – – – – – – – – –
F0 43 10 4C 08 08 0B FAD F7 END –
END – – – – – – – – – –
F0 43 10 4C 08 09 0B FAD F7 END –
END – – – – – – – – – –
F0 43 10 4C 08 0A 0B FAD F7 END –
END – – – – – – – – – –
F0 43 10 4C 08 0B 0B FAD F7 END –
END – – – – – – – – – –
F0 43 10 4C 08 0C 0B FAD F7 END –
END – – – – – – – – – –
F0 43 10 4C 08 0D 0B FAD F7 END –
END – – – – – – – – – –
F0 43 10 4C 08 0E 0B FAD F7 END –
END – – – – – – – – – –
F0 43 10 4C 08 0F 0B FAD F7 END –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
01V96i—Reference Manual
User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings
131
Bank 4 (Nuendo VST Mixer)
ID
Short
Name
Long
RM01 CH1 VST MIXER CH1
RM02 CH2 VST MIXER CH2
RM03 CH3 VST MIXER CH3
RM04 CH4 VST MIXER CH4
RM05 CH5 VST MIXER CH5
RM06 CH6 VST MIXER CH6
RM07 CH7 VST MIXER CH7
RM08 CH8 VST MIXER CH8
RM09 CH9 VST MIXER CH9
RM10 CH10 VST MIXER CH10
RM11 CH11 VST MIXER CH11
RM12 CH12 VST MIXER CH12
RM13 CH13 VST MIXER CH13
RM14 CH14 VST MIXER CH14
RM15 CH15 VST MIXER CH15
RM16 CH16 VST MIXER CH16
Controller
ON
FADER
ON
1 2 3 4 5
B0 40 SW END –
B0 07 FAD END –
B1 40 SW END –
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
FADER
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
FADER
ON
B1 07 FAD END –
B2 40 SW END –
B2 07 FAD END –
B3 40 SW END –
B3 07 FAD END –
B4 40 SW END –
B4 07 FAD END –
B5 40 SW END –
B5 07 FAD END –
B6 40 SW END –
B6 07 FAD END –
B7 40 SW END –
B7 07 FAD END –
B8 40 SW END –
B8 07 FAD END –
B9 40 SW END –
B9 07 FAD END –
BA 40 SW END –
BA 07 FAD END –
BB 40 SW END –
BB 07 FAD END –
BC 40 SW END –
BC 07 FAD END –
BD 40 SW END –
BD 07 FAD END –
BE 40 SW END –
BE 07 FAD END –
BF 40 SW END –
BF 07 FAD END –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Data Format
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
01V96i—Reference Manual
132
Appendix: Parameter Lists
Effects Parameters
REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM,
REVERB STAGE, REVERB PLATE
One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate reverb simulations, all with gates.
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4
DIFF.
DENSITY
E/R DLY
E/R BAL.
0–10
0–100%
0.0–100.0 ms
0–100%
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)
Reverb density
Delay between early reflections and reverb
Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections)
HPF
LPF
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
GATE LVL OFF, –60 to 0 dB
ATTACK 0–120 ms
HOLD 1
DECAY 2
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Level at which gate kicks in
Gate opening speed
Gate open time
Gate closing speed
1.
0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs=48 kHz),
0.01 ms–1.06 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 0.01 ms–981 ms (fs=96 kHz)
2.
6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s
(fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)
EARLY REF.
One input, two output early reflections.
Parameter Range
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate,
Spring
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
Type of early reflection simulation
Description
LIVENESS
INI. DLY
DIFF.
0–10
0.0–500.0 ms
0–10
DENSITY
ER NUM.
0–100%
1–19
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
HPF
LPF
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Reflection spacing
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
Initial delay before reverb begins
Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread)
Reflection density
Number of early reflections
Feedback gain
High-frequency feedback ratio
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE
One input, two output early reflections with gate, and early reflections with reverse gate.
Parameter Range Description
TYPE
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
LIVENESS
INI. DLY
DIFF.
Type-A, Type-B
0–10
0.0–500.0 ms
0–10
DENSITY 0–100%
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
ER NUM.
FB.GAIN
1–19
–99 to +99%
HPF
LPF
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Type of early reflection simulation
Reflection spacing
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
Initial delay before reverb begins
Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread)
Reflection density
High-frequency feedback ratio
Number of early reflections
Feedback gain
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
MONO DELAY
One input, two output basic repeat delay.
Parameter
DELAY
FB. GAIN
Range
0.0–2730.0 ms
–99 to +99%
Description
Delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
HPF
LPF
SYNC
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
OFF, ON
NOTE 1
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
1.
(Max. value depends on tempo setting)
01V96i—Reference Manual
STEREO DELAY
Two input, two output basic stereo delay.
Parameter
DELAY L
DELAY R
FB. G L
FB. G R
NOTE L
NOTE R
Range
0.0–1350.0 ms
0.0–1350.0 ms
–99 to +99%
–99 to +99%
1
1
Description
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
HPF
LPF
SYNC
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
OFF, ON
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel
DELAY
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
MOD. DELAY
One input, two output basic repeat delay with modulation.
Parameter
DELAY
FB. GAIN
HI. RATIO
FREQ.
DEPTH
WAVE
HPF
LPF
SYNC
DLY.NOTE
MOD.NOTE
Range
0.0–2725.0 ms
–99 to +99%
0.1–1.0
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
Sine, Tri
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
OFF, ON
1
2
Description
Delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Modulation waveform
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with
TEMPO to determine DELAY
Used in conjunction with
TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
2.
Effects Parameters
133
DELAY LCR
One input, two output 3-tap delay (left, center, right).
Parameter
DELAY L
DELAY C
DELAY R
FB. DLY
LEVEL L
LEVEL C
LEVEL R
FB. GAIN
NOTE L
NOTE C
NOTE R
NOTE FB
Range
0.0–2730.0 ms
0.0–2730.0 ms
0.0–2730.0 ms
0.0–2730.0 ms
–100 to +100%
–100 to +100%
–100 to +100%
–99 to +99%
1
1
1
1
Description
Left channel delay time
Center channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Feedback delay time
Left channel delay level
Center channel delay level
Right channel delay level
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
HPF
LPF
SYNC
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
OFF, ON
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY L
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY C
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY R
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
01V96i—Reference Manual
134
Appendix: Parameter Lists
ECHO
Two input, two output stereo delay with crossed feedback loop.
Parameter
DELAY L
DELAY R
FB.DLY L
FB.DLY R
FB. G L
FB. G R
L->R FBG
R->L FBG
NOTE L
NOTE R
NOTE FBL
NOTE FBR
Range
0.0–1350.0 ms
0.0–1350.0 ms
0.0–1350.0 ms
0.0–1350.0 ms
–99 to +99%
–99 to +99%
–99 to +99%
–99 to +99%
1
1
1
1
Description
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Left channel feedback delay time
Right channel feedback delay time
Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Right channel feedback gain
(plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
HPF
LPF
SYNC
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
OFF, ON
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY L
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY R
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB.DLY L
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB.DLY R
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
CHORUS
Two input, two output chorus effect.
Parameter Range Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
AM DEPTH 0–100%
PM DEPTH 0–100%
Modulation speed
Amplitude modulation depth
Pitch modulation depth
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
WAVE Sine, Tri
LSH F
LSH G
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
EQ G
EQ Q
HSH F
HSH G
SYNC
NOTE
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0–0.10
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
OFF, ON
1
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
FLANGE
Two input, two output flange effect.
Parameter Range Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
DEPTH 0–100%
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
FB. GAIN
WAVE
LSH F
LSH G
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Modulation delay time
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Modulation waveform Sine, Tri
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency
–12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
EQ G
EQ Q
HSH F
HSH G
SYNC
NOTE
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0–0.10
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
OFF, ON
1
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
SYMPHONIC
Two input, two output symphonic effect.
Parameter Range Description
FREQ.
DEPTH
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
WAVE Sine, Tri
LSH F
LSH G
EQ F
EQ G
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
HSH F
HSH G
SYNC
NOTE
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency
–12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain
OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
01V96i—Reference Manual
PHASER
Two input, two output 16-stage phaser.
Parameter
FREQ.
DEPTH
FB. GAIN
OFFSET
PHASE
STAGE
LSH F
LSH G
HSH F
HSH G
SYNC
NOTE
Range Description
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
–99 to +99%
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
0–100
0.00–354.38 degrees
Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset
Left and right modulation phase balance
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12,
14, 16
Number of phase shift stages
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency
–12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency
–12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain
OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
AUTO PAN
Two input, two output autopanner.
Parameter
FREQ.
DEPTH
DIR.
WAVE
LSH F
LSH G
EQ F
EQ G
EQ Q
HSH F
HSH G
SYNC
NOTE
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
1
Range Description
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Panning direction
Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency
–12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain
100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency
–12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency
–12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain
OFF, ON
2
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
L<->R, L—>R, L<—R, Turn L, Turn R
2.
TREMOLO
Two input, two output tremolo effect
.
Parameter
FREQ.
DEPTH
WAVE
LSH F
LSH G
EQ F
EQ G
EQ Q
HSH F
HSH G
SYNC
NOTE
Range Description
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency
–12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain
100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency
–12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency
–12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain
OFF, ON
1
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
Effects Parameters
135
HQ. PITCH
One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter
(Available for internal effects 1 and 2.).
Description Parameter
PITCH
FINE
DELAY
Range
–12 to +12 semitones
–50 to +50 cents
0.0–1000.0 ms
Pitch shift
FB. GAIN
MODE
SYNC
NOTE
–99 to +99%
1–10
OFF, ON
1
Pitch shift fine
Delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Pitch shift precision
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
DUAL PITCH
Two input, two output pitch shifter.
Description Parameter
PITCH 1
FINE 1
Range
–24 to +24 semitones
–50 to +50 cents
Channel #1 pitch shift
LEVEL 1
PAN 1
DELAY 1
FB. G 1
–100 to +100%
L63 to R63
0.0–1000.0 ms
–99 to +99%
Channel #1 pitch shift fine
Channel #1 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase)
Channel #1 pan
Channel #1 delay time
Channel #1 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
PITCH 2
FINE 2
–24 to +24 semitones
–50 to +50 cents
Channel #2 pitch shift
LEVEL 2
PAN 2
DELAY 2
FB. G 2
MODE
SYNC
NOTE 1
NOTE 2
–100 to +100%
L63 to R63
0.0–1000.0 ms
–99 to +99%
1–10
OFF, ON
1
1
Channel #2 pitch shift fine
Channel #2 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase)
Channel #2 pan
Channel #2 delay time
Channel #2 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Pitch shift precision
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #1 delay
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #2 delay
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
01V96i—Reference Manual
136
Appendix: Parameter Lists
ROTARY
One input, two output rotary speaker simulator.
Parameter
ROTATE
Range
STOP, START
SPEED
SLOW
FAST
DRIVE
ACCEL
LOW
HIGH
SLOW, FAST
0.05–10.00 Hz
0.05–10.00 Hz
0–100
0–10
0–100
0–100
Description
Rotation stop, start
Rotation speed (see SLOW and
FAST parameters)
SLOW rotation speed
FAST rotation speed
Overdrive level
Acceleration at speed changes
Low-frequency filter
High-frequency filter
RING MOD.
Two input, two output ring modulator.
Parameter Range
SOURCE
OSC FREQ 0.0–5000.0 Hz
FM FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
FM DEPTH 0–100%
SYNC
NOTE FM
OSC, SELF
OFF, ON
1
Description
Modulation source: oscillator or input signal
Oscillator frequency
Oscillator frequency modulation speed
Oscillator frequency modulation depth
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FM FREQ.
1.
MOD. FILTER
Two input, two output modulation filter.
Parameter
FREQ.
DEPTH
Range
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
PHASE
TYPE
OFFSET
RESO.
LEVEL
SYNC
NOTE
0.00–354.38 degrees
LPF, HPF, BPF
0–100
0–20
0–100
OFF, ON
1
Description
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Left-channel modulation and right-channel modulation phase difference
Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass
Filter frequency offset
Filter resonance
Output level
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
DISTORTION
One input, two output distortion effect.
Description Parameter
DST TYPE
DRIVE
MASTER
TONE
N. GATE
Range
DST1, DST2,
OVD1, OVD2,
CRUNCH
0–100
0–100
–10 to +10
0–20
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
Distortion drive
Master volume
Tone
Noise reduction
AMP SIMULATE
One input, two output guitar amp simulator.
Parameter
AMP TYPE
DST TYPE
DRIVE
MASTER
BASS
MIDDLE
TREBLE
CAB DEP
EQ F
EQ G
EQ Q
N. GATE
1
0–100
0–100
0–100
0–100
–12.0 to +12.0 dB Parametric equalizer gain
10.0–0.10
0–20
Range
DST1, DST2,
OVD1, OVD2,
CRUNCH
0–100
0–100%
100–8.00 kHz
Description
Guitar amp simulation type
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
Distortion drive
Master volume
Bass tone control
Middle tone control
High tone control
Speaker cabinet simulation depth
Parametric equalizer frequency
Parametric equalizer bandwidth
Noise reduction
1.
STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR,
CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT
DYNA. FILTER
Two input, two output dynamically controlled filter.
Parameter
SOURCE
SENSE
DIR.
DECAY
TYPE
OFFSET
RESO.
LEVEL
INPUT, MIDI
0–100
1
Range
UP, DOWN
LPF, HPF, BPF
0–100
0–20
0–100
Description
Control source: input signal or
MIDI Note On velocity
Sensitivity
Upward or downward frequency change
Filter frequency change decay speed
Filter type
Filter frequency offset
Filter resonance
Output Level
1.
6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s
(fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)
DYNA. FLANGE
Two input, two output dynamically controlled flanger.
Parameter
SOURCE
SENSE
DIR.
DECAY
OFFSET
FB.GAIN
LSH F
LSH G
EQ F
EQ G
EQ Q
HSH F
HSH G
Range
INPUT, MIDI
0–100
UP, DOWN
1
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0–0.10
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Description
Control source: input signal or
MIDI Note On velocity
Sensitivity
Upward or downward frequency change
Decay speed
0–100 Delay time offset
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
Low shelving filter gain
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
1.
6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s
(fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)
01V96i—Reference Manual
Effects Parameters
137
DYNA. PHASER
Two input, two output dynamically controlled phaser.
Parameter
SOURCE
SENSE
DIR.
DECAY
OFFSET
FB.GAIN
STAGE
LSH F
LSH G
HSH F
HSH G
Range
INPUT, MIDI
0–100
UP, DOWN
1
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Description
Control source: input signal or
MIDI Note On velocity
Sensitivity
Upward or downward frequency change
Decay speed
0–100
–99 to +99%
Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12,
14, 16
Number of phase shift stages
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency
–12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain
1.
6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s
(fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)
REV+CHORUS
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel.
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
DIFF.
DENSITY
HPF
LPF
0–10
0–100%
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
Reverb density
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV/CHO
FREQ.
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
0–100%
0.05–40.00 Hz
AM DEPTH 0–100%
PM DEPTH 0–100%
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
Sine, Tri
OFF, ON
1
Reverb and chorus balance (0%
= all reverb, 100% = all chorus)
Modulation speed
Amplitude modulation depth
Pitch modulation depth
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
REV->CHORUS
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in series.
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
DIFF.
DENSITY
HPF
LPF
0–10
0–100%
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
Reverb density
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV.BAL
FREQ.
SYNC
NOTE
0–100%
0.05–40.00 Hz
AM DEPTH 0–100%
PM DEPTH 0–100%
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
WAVE Sine, Tri
OFF, ON
1
Reverb and chorused reverb balance (0% = all chorused reverb,
100% = all reverb)
Modulation speed
Amplitude modulation depth
Pitch modulation depth
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
REV+FLANGE
One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel.
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
DIFF.
0–10
DENSITY
HPF
0–100%
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
Reverb density
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV/FLG
FREQ.
DEPTH
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
FB. GAIN
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
0–100%
–99 to +99%
Sine, Tri
OFF, ON
1
Reverb and flange balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all flange)
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Modulation delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
01V96i—Reference Manual
138
Appendix: Parameter Lists
REV->FLANGE
One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in series.
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
DIFF.
DENSITY
HPF
LPF
0–10
0–100%
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
Reverb density
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV.BAL
FREQ.
DEPTH
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
FB. GAIN
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
0–100%
–99 to +99%
Sine, Tri
OFF, ON
1
Reverb and flanged reverb balance (0% = all flanged reverb,
100% = all reverb)
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Modulation delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
REV+SYMPHO.
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel.
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
DIFF.
0–10
DENSITY
HPF
0–100%
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
Reverb density
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV/SYM
FREQ.
DEPTH
MOD. DLY
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
0–100%
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
0.0–500.0 ms
Sine, Tri
OFF, ON
1
Reverb and symphonic balance
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all symphonic)
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
REV->SYMPHO.
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in series.
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
DIFF.
DENSITY
HPF
LPF
0–10
0–100%
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
Reverb density
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV.BAL
FREQ.
DEPTH
NOTE
0–100%
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
WAVE
SYNC
Sine, Tri
OFF, ON
1
Reverb and symphonic reverb balance (0% = all symphonic reverb, 100% = all reverb)
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
REV->PAN
One input, two output reverb and autopan effects in parallel.
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
DIFF.
DENSITY
HPF
LPF
0–10
0–100%
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
Reverb density
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV.BAL
FREQ.
DEPTH
0–100%
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
1
Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = all panned reverb,
100% = all reverb)
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
DIR.
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
Sine, Tri, Square
OFF, ON
2
Panning direction
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
L<–>R, L–>R, L<–R, Turn L, Turn R
2.
01V96i—Reference Manual
DELAY+ER.
One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in parallel.
Parameter
DELAY L
DELAY R
FB. DLY
FB. GAIN
Range
0.0–1000.0 ms
0.0–1000.0 ms
0.0–1000.0 ms
–99 to +99%
Description
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Feedback delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
HPF
LPF
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
DLY/ER 0–100%
Delay and early reflections balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all early reflections)
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate,
Spring
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
Type of early reflection simulation
LIVENESS
INI. DLY
DIFF.
DENSITY
ER NUM.
SYNC
NOTE L
NOTE R
NOTE FB
0–10
0.0–500.0 ms
0–10
0–100%
1–19
OFF, ON
1
1
1
Reflection spacing
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
Initial delay before reverb begins
Spread
Reverb density
Number of early reflections
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
L
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel
DELAY R
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Effects Parameters
139
DELAY->ER.
One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in series.
Parameter
DELAY L
DELAY R
FB. DLY
FB. GAIN
Range
0.0–1000.0 ms
0.0–1000.0 ms
0.0–1000.0 ms
–99 to +99%
Description
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Feedback delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0
HPF
LPF
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
DLY.BAL
0–100%
Delay and early reflected delay balance (0% = all early reflected delay, 100% = all delay)
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate,
Spring
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
Type of early reflection simulation
LIVENESS
INI. DLY
DIFF.
DENSITY
ER NUM.
SYNC
NOTE L
NOTE R
NOTE FB
0–10
0.0–500.0 ms
0–10
0–100%
1–19
OFF, ON
1
1
1
Reflection spacing
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
Initial delay before reverb begins
Spread
Reverb density
Number of early reflections
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
L
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel
DELAY R
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
01V96i—Reference Manual
140
Appendix: Parameter Lists
DELAY+REV
One input, two output delay and reverb effects in parallel.
Parameter
DELAY L
DELAY R
FB. DLY
FB. GAIN
DELAY HI
HPF
LPF
DLY.BAL
NOTE L
NOTE R
NOTE FB
Range
0.0–1000.0 ms
0.0–1000.0 ms
0.0–1000.0 ms
–99 to +99%
0.1–1.0
0–100%
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY
REV HI
DIFF.
DENSITY
SYNC
0.0–500.0 ms
0.1–1.0
0–10
0–100%
OFF, ON
1
1
1
Description
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Feedback delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Delay high-frequency feedback ratio
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Delay and reverb balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all reverb)
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
Reverb density
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
L
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel
DELAY R
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
DELAY->REV
One input, two output delay and reverb effects in series.
Parameter Range Description
DELAY L
DELAY R
FB. DLY
FB. GAIN
DELAY HI
HPF
LPF
DLY.BAL
NOTE L
NOTE R
NOTE FB
0.0–1000.0 ms
0.0–1000.0 ms
0.0–1000.0 ms
–99 to +99%
0.1–1.0
0–100%
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
INI. DLY
REV HI
DIFF.
DENSITY
SYNC
0.0–500.0 ms
0.1–1.0
0–10
0–100%
OFF, ON
1
*1
*1
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Feedback delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Delay high-frequency feedback ratio
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Delay and delayed reverb balance (0% = all delayed reverb,
100% = all delay)
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Spread
Reverb density
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
L
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel
DELAY R
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
DIST->DELAY
One input, two output distortion and delay effects in series.
Parameter
DST TYPE
DRIVE
MASTER
TONE
N. GATE
DELAY
FB. GAIN
HI. RATIO
FREQ.
DEPTH
DLY.BAL
SYNC
DLY.NOTE
MOD.NOT
E
1.
0–20
OFF, ON
1
Range
DST1, DST2,
OVD1, OVD2,
CRUNCH
0–100
0–100
–10 to +10
0.0–2725.0 ms
–99 to +99%
0.1–1.0
0.05–40.00 Hz
0–100%
0–100%
2
Description
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
Distortion drive
Master volume
Tone control
Noise reduction
Delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Distortion and delay balance
(0% = all distortion, 100% = all delayed distortion)
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
2.
01V96i—Reference Manual
MULTI FILTER
Two input, two output 3-band multi-filter
(24 dB/octave).
FREQ. 1
FREQ. 2
FREQ. 3
LEVEL 1
LEVEL 2
LEVEL 3
RESO. 1
RESO. 2
RESO. 3
Parameter
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
Range Description
HPF, LPF, BPF
HPF, LPF, BPF
HPF, LPF, BPF
Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 1 frequency
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 2 frequency
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 3 frequency
0–100 Filter 1 level
0–100
0–100
0–20
0–20
0–20
Filter 2 level
Filter 3 level
Filter 1 resonance
Filter 2 resonance
Filter 3 resonance
Effects Parameters
141
FREEZE
One input, one output basic sampler (Available for internal effects 1 and 2.).
Parameter
PLY MODE
START
END
–1000 to
+1000 ms
MOMENT,
CONTI., INPUT
1
1
Range
REC MODE MANUAL, INPUT
REC DLY
TRG LVL
TRG MASK
–60 to 0 dB
0–1000 ms
Description
In MANUAL mode, recording is started by pressing the REC and
PLAY buttons. In INPUT mode,
Record-Ready mode is engaged by pressing the REC button, and actual recording is triggered by the input signal
Recording delay. For plus values, recording starts after the trigger is received. For minus values, recording starts before the trigger is received
Input trigger level (i.e., the signal level required to trigger recording or playback)
Once playback has been triggered, subsequent triggers are ignored for the duration of the
TRG MASK time
In MOMENT mode, the sample plays only while the that the
PLAY button is pressed. In CONT mode, playback continues once the PLAY button has been pressed. The number of times the sample plays is set using the
LOOP NUM parameter. In INPUT mode, playback is triggered by the input signal
Playback start point in milliseconds
Playback end point in milliseconds
Loop start point in milliseconds
Number of times the sample plays
LOOP
LOOP
NUM
START
[SAMPLE]
END
[SAMPLE]
LOOP
[SAMPLE]
1
0–100
2
2
2
Playback start point in samples
Playback end point in samples
Loop start point in samples
PITCH
–12 to +12 semitones
–50 to +50 cents
Playback pitch shift
FINE
MIDI TRG OFF, C1–C6, ALL
Playback pitch shift fine
PLAY button can be triggered by using MIDI Note on/off messages
1.
0.0~2970.5 ms (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.0~2729.2 ms (fs=48 kHz),
0.0~2970.5 ms (fs=88.2 kHz), 0.0~2729.2 ms (fs=96 kHz)
2.
0~131000 (fs=44.1 kHz, 48 kHz), 0~262000 (fs=88.2 kHz,
96 kHz)
01V96i—Reference Manual
142
Appendix: Parameter Lists
ST REVERB
Two input, two output stereo reverb.
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s
REV TYPE
INI. DLY
HI. RATIO
LO. RATIO
DIFF.
DENSITY
E/R BAL.
HPF
LPF
Hall, Room, Stage,
Plate
0.0–100.0 ms
0.1–1.0
0.1–2.4
0–10
0–100%
0–100%
Description
Reverb time
Reverb type
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)
Reverb density
Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections)
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
M.BAND DYNA.
Two input, two output 3-band dynamics processor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band.
Parameter
SOLO
HIGH
Range
EXP. BYP OFF, ON
LIM. THRE –12.0 to 0.0 dB
LIM. ATK 0–120 ms
LIM. REL 1
LIM. BYP OFF, ON
LIM. KNEE 0–5
SOLO LOW OFF, ON
SOLO MID OFF, ON
OFF, ON
Description
LOW GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Low band level
MID GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Mid band level
HI. GAIN
PRESENCE
–96.0 to +12.0 dB High band level
–10 to +10
For positive values, the threshold of the high band is lowered and the threshold of the low band is increased. For negative values, the opposite will occur. When set to 0, all three bands are affected the same
CMP. THRE 24.0 to 0.0 dB
CMP. RAT 1:1 to 20:1
CMP. ATK 0–120 ms
CMP. REL 1
Compressor threshold
Compressor ratio
Compressor attack
Compressor release time
CMP. KNEE 0–5
LOOKUP 0.0–100.0 ms
Compressor knee
Lookup delay
CMP. BYP OFF, ON Compressor bypass
L–M XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low/mid crossover frequency
M–H XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Mid/high crossover frequency
SLOPE –6 to –12 dB Filter slope
CEILING
–6.0 to 0.0 dB,
OFF
Specifies the maximum output level
EXP. THRE –54.0 to –24.0 dB Expander threshold
EXP. RAT
EXP. REL
1:1 to :1
1
Expander ratio
Expander release time
Expander bypass
Limiter threshold
Limiter attack
Limiter release time
Limiter bypass
Limiter knee
If this is on, only the low-frequency band will be output
If this is on, only the mid-frequency band will be output
If this is on, only the high-frequency band will be output
1.
6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s
(fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)
Comp276/Comp276S
This emulates the characteristics of an analog compressor that has become a standard item in recording studios. It thickens the sound, and is particularly suitable for drum and bass sounds. Comp276 lets you control two monaural channels independently.
Comp276S links the L/R channel parameters for control.
Parameter Range Description
INPUT
OUTPUT
ATTACK
RELEASE
RATIO
MAKE UP
SIDE HPF
GR meter
–180 to 0 dB
–180 to 0 dB
Adjusts the input level
Adjusts the output gain
0.022 to 50.40ms
Adjusts the attack time
10.88 to 544.22ms Adjusts the release time
2:1, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1,
20:1
Adjusts the ratio
ON, OFF
If this is on, the output gain will automatically be compensated to make up for gain reduction applied by the compressor
ON, OFF
ON, OFF
If this is on, the compressor effect in the low-frequency range will be reduced, thus boosting the low-frequency output
This shows the amount of gain reduction when the compressor is operating
Comp260/Comp260S
This emulates the characteristics of a compressor/limiter of the mid-1970s that has now become a standard item for live sound reinforcement.
Comp260 lets you control two monaural channels independently. Comb260S links the L/R channel parameters for control.
Parameter
THRE.
ATTACK
RELEASE
RATIO
KNEE
ST LINK
OUTPUT
GR meter
Level meter
Range Description
–60.0 to 0.0 dB Adjusts the threshold
0.010 to 80.00 ms Adjusts the attack time
6.2 to 999.0 ms Adjusts the release time
Adjusts the ratio 1.0 to
SOFT, MEDIUM,
HARD
Adjusts the knee
ON, OFF
–20.0 to 40.0 dB
If this is on, CH1 and CH2 will be stereo-linked
Adjusts the output gain
This shows the amount of gain reduction when the compressor is operating
This shows the effect’s input level or output level. Use the
METER: [IN][OUT] switches to choose which level is shown
01V96i—Reference Manual
Equalizer601
This emulates the characteristics of an analog equalizer of the 1970s. By reproducing the distortion that is typical of analog circuits, it adds drive to the sound.
Parameter
TYPE
INPUT
OUTPUT
Level meter
Q/TYPE
F
G
SW
Range Description
DRIVE, CLEAN Switches the equalizer type
–18.0 to +18.0 dB Adjusts the input gain
–18.0 to +18.0 dB Adjusts the output gain
This shows the effect’s input level or output level. Use the
METER: [IN][OUT] switches to choose which level is shown
LO: LSH-1, LSH-2,
HPF-1, HPF-2
MID1–4:
0.50–16.00
HI: LPF-1, LPF-2,
HSH-1, HSH-2
These parameters control the shape of the frequency response curve for each filter band.
For the MID 1–4 bands you can specify the sharpness (Q) of the frequency response curve.
For the LO and HI bands, you can select one of four filter types fs=44.1/48 kHz:
16.0–20.0 kHz, fs=88.2/96 kHz:
16.0 Hz–40.0 kHz
(HI TYPE=HSH-1 or
HSH-2: HI Band=
1.0–40 kHz)
These specify the center frequency of the filter
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
ON, OFF
These specify the gain of the filter
These switch each filter band on/off
Frequency response curve
This displays the total frequency response curve for all bands
FLAT
This resets the gain of all bands to 0 dB
Effects Parameters
143
OpenDeck
This emulates the tape compression produced by two open-reel tape recorders (a recording deck and a reproduction deck). You can change the tonal character by adjusting various elements, such as the deck type, tape quality, and playback speed.
Parameter
REC DEC
Range
Swss70, Swss78,
Swss85, Amer70
REC LVL
REC HI
REC BIAS
MAKEUP
REPR
DECK
REPR LVL
REPR HI
REPR LO
–96.0 to +18.0dB
–6.0 to +6.0dB
–1.00 to +1.00
ON, OFF
Swss70, Swss78,
Swss85, Amer70
–96.0 to +18.0 dB
–6.0 to +6.0 dB
–6.0 to +6.0 dB
TP SPEED 15 ips, 30 ips
TP KIND New, Old
Description
Selects the type of recording deck
Adjusts the input level of the recording deck. As you raise the level, tape compression is generated, narrowing the dynamic range and distorting the sound
Adjusts the high range gain of the recording deck
Adjusts the bias of the recording deck
If this is on, operating the recording deck’s level
([RECORD]/[REC LVL] knob) will cause the reproduction deck’s level ([REPRODUCE]/[REPR LVL] knob) to move in tandem, maintaining a fixed output level This allows you to change the amount of distortion without changing the output level
Selects the type of reproduction deck
Adjusts the output level of the reproduction deck
Adjusts the high range gain of the reproduction deck
Adjusts the low range gain of the reproduction deck
Selects the tape speed
Selects the type of tape
01V96i—Reference Manual
144
Appendix: Parameter Lists
REV-X Hall, REV-X Room, REV-X Plate
This is a 2-in/2-out reverb algorithm. It provides rich, high-density reverberation with a smooth decay, and depth and spaciousness that will enhance the original sound. You can choose one of three programs to suit the venue and your needs: REV-X Hall,
REV-X Room, and REV-X Plate.
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.32–32.14s
INI.DLY
DECAY
Level meter
0.0–125.0ms
0–53
ROOMSIZE 0–28
DIFF.
HPF
LPF
HI.RATIO
0–10
Thru–8.00 kHz
1.00 kHz–Thru
0.1–1.0
LO.RATIO
0.1–1.4
LO.FREQ.
MIX
22.0 Hz–18.0 kHz
0–100%
Description
Specifies the duration of time until the reverberation decays to silence. Higher values produce longer reverberation
Specifies the time delay from when the original sound is input until reverberation begins.
Higher values produce a longer delay before reverberation begins
Specifies the shape of the reverberation’s envelope. This value will affect the characteristics of the reverberation
Specifies the size of the space.
Higher values simulate a broader space. This value is linked with the Reverb Time. Changing this value will also change the Reverb
Time
Specifies the density and diffusion of the reverberation. Higher values will increase the density and strengthen the sense of spaciousness
This is a filter that cuts the low-frequency range of the reverberation. The region below the frequency specified here will be cut. This filter does not affect the original sound
This is a filter that cuts the high-frequency range of the reverberation. The region above the frequency specified here will be cut. This filter does not affect the original sound
Adjusts the decay time of the high-frequency reverberation.
This specifies the high-frequency decay time as a proportion of the Reverb Time
Adjusts the decay time of the low-frequency reverberation.
This specifies the low-frequency decay time as a proportion of the Reverb Time
Specifies the frequency on which
Lo Ratio is based. The region below this frequency will be affected by the Lo Ratio
Use the METER: [IN] [OUT] switches to choose whether the input level or output level will be shown
Adjusts the balance between the original sound and the effect sound.
Only the original sound will be output if this value is 0%, and only the effect sound will be output if this value is 100%
Max 100
This is a 1-in/1-out phaser that emulates a vintage effect that was manufactured only during the late
1970s.
Parameter Range
MODE 1, 2, 3, 4
Description
Switches the sound quality
(tone). There are four types available, each with differences in modulation amplitude and in the amount of feedback
SPEED
SYNC,
0.100–10.000 Hz
Adjusts the rate of modulation
Vintage Phaser
This is a 1-in/1-out phaser that offers an extremely high level of freedom in creating phaser sounds, without limiting itself to emulating any particular model.
Parameter Range Description
SPEED
MANUAL
SYNC, 0.1–10.0 Hz Adjusts the rate of modulation
0.00–10.00
Adjusts the center frequency of modulation
DEPTH 0.00–10.00
FEEDBACK 0.00–10.00
Adjusts the depth of modulation
Adjusts the amount of feedback
COLOR
MODE
STAGE
0.00–10.00
1, 2
4, 6, 8, 10
This parameter is available for certain combinations of MODE and STAGE. It allows you to fine-tune the tonal character
Selects the type of circuit configuration being modeled. This will affect the tonal character
Specifies the number of stages in the circuit being modeled. This will affect the tonal character
01V96i—Reference Manual
Dual Phaser
This is a 2-in/2-out phaser that emulates a vintage phaser manufactured during the mid-1970s.
Parameter
RATE 1
SHAPE 1
RATE 2
Range
SYNC,
0.067–20.000 Hz
Sine, Square
SYNC,
0.111–20.000 Hz
Sine, Square SHAPE 2
DEPTH
(A/B)
FB (A/B)
1.00–10.00
0.00–10.00
Description
Adjusts the modulation rate of
LFO1
Selects the waveform of LFO1
Adjusts the modulation rate of
LFO2
Selects the waveform of LFO2
Adjusts the depth of modulation
SW (A/B)
SWEEP B
SYNC B
IN MODE
ON, OFF
LFO1, LFO2
NORM, REV
1, 2, 3, 4
Adjusts the amount of feedback
Switches the phaser circuit on/off
Selects the LFO for Phaser B
Selects the LFO phase for Phaser
B
Specifies the way in which the two phasers are connected.
1: After mixing the stereo input, the sound processed by Phaser A is output from the left channel, and the sound processed by
Phaser B is output from the right channel.
2: After mixing the stereo input, the sound processed by Phaser A is output from the left channel, and the sound processed by
Phaser A and then additionally processed by Phaser B is output from the right channel.
3: After mixing the stereo input, the sound processed by Phaser A and then additionally processed by Phaser B is output from both the left and right channels.
4: The left input channel is processed by Phaser A and output from the left channel, and the right input channel is processed by Phaser B and output from the right channel.
Effects Parameters
145
01V96i—Reference Manual
146
Appendix: Parameter Lists
Effects and tempo synchronization
Some of the 01V96i’s effects allow you to synchronize the effect with the tempo. There are two such types of effect; delay-type effects and modulation-type effects. For delay-type effects, the delay time will change according to the tempo. For modulation-type effects, the frequency of the modulation signal will change according to the tempo.
• Parameters related to tempo synchronization
The following five parameters are related to tempo synchronization.
1) SYNC 2) NOTE 3) TEMPO 4) DELAY 5) FREQ.
SYNC: ............................. This is the on/off switch for tempo synchronization.
NOTE and TEMPO: .... These are the basic parameters for tempo synchronization.
DELAY and FREQ.: ...... DELAY is the delay time, and
FREQ. is the frequency of the modulation signal. These directly affect the way in which the effect sound will change. DELAY is relevant only for delay-type effects, and FREQ. is relevant only for modulation-type effects.
• How the parameters are related
Tempo synchronization uses TEMPO and NOTE to calculate a value that will be the basis for the tempo, and continues making adjustments so that this tempo basis stays essentially the same as the DELAY (or FREQ.). This means that when TEMPO, NOTE, and DELAY (or FREQ.) are synchronized, and you change any of these values, the other parameters will be re-set in order to maintain the correct relationship. The parameters that are re-set and the calculation method(*a) used are as follows.
If you turn SYNC on NOTE will be set
If you edit DELAY (or FREQ.) NOTE will be set
In this case, the NOTE value is calculated as follows.
NOTE = DELAY (or FREQ.)/(4 x (60/TEMPO))
If you edit NOTE DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set
In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.
DELAY (or FREQ.) = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)
If you edit TEMPO DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set
In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.
DELAY (or FREQ.) = original DELAY (or FREQ.) x
(previous TEMPO/new TEMPO)
Example 1: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms,
TEMPO=120, you change NOTE from 8th note to quarter note
DELAY= new NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)
= (1/4) x 4 x (60/120)
= 0.5 (sec)
= 500 ms
Thus, the DELAY will change from 250 ms to 500 ms.
Example 2: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms,
NOTE=8th note, you change TEMPO from 120 to 121
DELAY= original DELAY x (previous TEMPO/ new TEMPO)
= 250 x (120/121)
= 247.9 (ms)
Thus, the TEMPO will change from 250 ms to 247.9 ms.
*a: Rounded values are used for the calculation results.
• Ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values
The ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values are limited by the ranges of the DELAY or FREQ. values. You cannot set
NOTE or TEMPO values that would cause DELAY or
FREQ. to exceed their maximum possible values when synchronized to tempo. This limitation also applies even when
SYNC is OFF.
• Special characteristics of the TEMPO parameter
The TEMPO parameter has the following characteristics that are unlike other parameters.
• It is a common value shared by all effects
• You cannot stored it to or recall it from the Effects
Library. (You can store it to and recall it from a Scene.)
This means that the TEMPO value may not necessarily be the same when an effect is recalled as when that effect was stored. Here is an example.
Store the effect: TEMPO=120 Change TEMPO to 60
Recall the effect: TEMPO=60
Normally when you change the TEMPO, the DELAY (or
FREQ.) will be re-set accordingly. However if the DELAY
(or FREQ.) were changed, the effect would sound differently when recalled than when it was stored. To prevent the effect from changing in this way between store and recall, the 01V96i does not update the DELAY (or FREQ.) value when an effect is recalled, even if the TEMPO is no longer the same as when that effect was stored.
* The NOTE parameter is calculated based on the following values.
= 1/48 = 1/24 = 1/16 = 1/12
= 3/16 = 1/4 = 3/8 = 1/2
= 3/32
= 3/4
01V96i—Reference Manual
= 1/8
= 1/1
= 1/6
= 2/1
Preset EQ Parameters
#
2
Title
01
Bass Drum
1
02
03
04
Bass Drum
Snare
Drum 1
Snare
Drum 2
05 Tom-tom 1
06 Cymbal
07 High Hat
08 Percussion
09 E. Bass 1
10 E. Bass 2
11 Syn. Bass 1
12 Syn. Bass 2
13 Piano 1
G +3.5 dB
F 100 Hz
Q
LOW
Parameter
L-MID H-MID HIGH
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
1.2
–3.5 dB
265 Hz
10
0.0 dB
1.06 kHz
0.9
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
+4.0 dB
5.30 kHz
—
LPF
G +8.0 dB
F 80 Hz
Q 1.4
–7.0 dB
400 Hz
4.5
+6.0 dB
2.50 kHz
2.2
ON
12.5 kHz
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –0.5 dB
F 132 Hz
0.0 dB
1.00 kHz
+3.0 dB
3.15 kHz
+4.5 dB
5.00 kHz
Q 1.2
4.5
0.11
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G +1.5 dB
F 180 Hz
Q —
–8.5 dB
335 Hz
10
+2.5 dB
2.36 kHz
0.7
+4.0 dB
4.00 kHz
0.1
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G +2.0 dB
F 212 Hz
Q 1.4
–7.5 dB
670 Hz
10
+2.0 dB
4.50 kHz
1.2
+1.0 dB
6.30 kHz
0.28
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –2.0 dB
F 106 Hz
Q —
0.0 dB
425 Hz
8
0.0 dB
1.06 kHz
0.9
+3.0 dB
13.2 kHz
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –4.0 dB
F 95 Hz
Q —
–2.5 dB
425 Hz
0.5
+1.0 dB
2.80 kHz
1
+0.5 dB
7.50 kHz
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –4.5 dB
F 100 Hz
0.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB
400 Hz 2.80 kHz 17.0 kHz
Q — 4.5
0.56
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –7.5 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB
F 35.5 Hz
Q —
112 Hz
5
2.00 kHz
4.5
4.00 kHz
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +3.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.5 dB +0.5 dB
F 112 Hz 112 Hz 2.24 kHz 4.00 kHz
Q 0.1
5 6.3
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +3.5 dB +8.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB
F
Q
85 Hz
0.1
950 Hz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz
8 4.5
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +2.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.5 dB 0.0 dB
F
Q
125 Hz 180 Hz 1.12 kHz 12.5 kHz
1.6
8 2.2
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –6.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB
F 95 Hz 950 Hz 3.15 kHz 7.50 kHz
Q — 8 0.9
—
Preset EQ Parameters
147
#
25
26
27
Male Vocal
1
Male Vocal
2
Female Vo.
1
Title
14 Piano 2
15 E. G. Clean
16
17
E. G.
Crunch 1
E. G.
Crunch 2
18 E. G. Dist. 1
19 E. G. Dist. 2
20
21
22
23
A. G.
Stroke 1
A. G.
Stroke 2
A. G.
Arpeg. 1
A. G.
Arpeg. 2
24 Brass Sec.
LOW
Parameter
L-MID H-MID HIGH
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +3.5 dB –8.5 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB
F
Q
224 Hz
5.6
600 Hz 3.15 kHz 5.30 kHz
10 0.7
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +2.0 dB –5.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.5 dB
F
Q
265 Hz
0.18
400 Hz 1.32 kHz 4.50 kHz
10 6.3
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G +4.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB +2.0 dB
F
Q
140 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.60 kHz
8 4.5
0.63
9
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +2.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB
F
Q
125 Hz
8
450 Hz 3.35 kHz 19.0 kHz
0.4
0.16
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +5.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB
F
Q
355 Hz
—
950 Hz 3.35 kHz 12.5 kHz
9 10 —
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +6.0 dB –8.5 dB +4.5 dB +4.0 dB
F
Q
315 Hz 1.06 kHz 4.25 kHz 12.5 kHz
— 10 4 —
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –2.0 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +4.0 dB
F
Q
106 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.30 kHz
0.9
4.5
3.5
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –3.5 dB –2.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB
F
Q
300 Hz
—
750 Hz 2.00 kHz 3.55 kHz
9 4.5
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G –0.5 dB
F 224 Hz
0.0 dB
1.00 kHz
0.0 dB
4.00 kHz
+2.0 dB
6.70 kHz
Q — 4.5
4.5
0.12
G
F
Q
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
0.0 dB –5.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB
180 Hz
—
355 Hz
7
4.00 kHz
4.5
4.25 kHz
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G –2.0 dB –1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB
F 90 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz
Q 2.8
2 0.7
7
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G –0.5 dB
F 190 Hz
0.0 dB
1.00 kHz
+2.0 dB
2.00 kHz
+3.5 dB
6.70 kHz
Q 0.11
4.5
0.56
0.11
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +2.0 dB –5.0 dB –2.5 dB +4.0 dB
F 170 Hz 236 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.70 kHz
Q 0.11
10 5.6
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G –1.0 dB +1.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB
F 118 Hz 400 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.00 kHz
Q 0.18
0.45
0.56
0.14
01V96i—Reference Manual
148
Appendix: Parameter Lists
#
28
Female Vo.
2
29
Chorus &
Harmo
30 Total EQ 1
31 Total EQ 2
32 Total EQ 3
33
34
35 Tom-tom 2
36 Piano 3
37 Piano Low
38 Piano High
39
3
Title
Bass Drum
Snare
Drum 3
Fine-EQ
Cass
40 Narrator
LOW
Parameter
L-MID H-MID HIGH
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –7.0 dB +1.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB
F
Q
112 Hz
—
335 Hz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz
0.16
0.2
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G –2.0 dB –1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB
F
Q
90 Hz
2.8
850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz
2 0.7
7
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +6.5 dB
F
Q
95 Hz
7
950 Hz 2.12 kHz 16.0 kHz
2.2
5.6
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +4.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB +6.0 dB
F
Q
95 Hz
7
750 Hz 1.80 kHz 18.0 kHz
2.8
5.6
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +1.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB
F
Q
67 Hz
—
850 Hz 1.90 kHz 15.0 kHz
0.28
0.7
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G +3.5 dB –10.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB
F
Q
118 Hz
2
315 Hz 4.25 kHz 20.0 kHz
10 0.4
0.4
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB G
F
Q
224 Hz
—
560 Hz 4.25 kHz 4.00 kHz
4.5
2.8
0.1
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –9.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB
F
Q
90 Hz
—
212 Hz 5.30 kHz 17.0 kHz
4.5
1.2
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +4.5 dB –13.0 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB
F 100 Hz 475 Hz 2.36 kHz 10.0 kHz
Q 8 10 9 —
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –5.5 dB +1.5 dB +6.0 dB 0.0 dB
F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 12.5 kHz
Q 10 6.3
2.2
—
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G –5.5 dB +1.5 dB +5.0 dB +3.0 dB
F
Q
190 Hz
10
400 Hz
6.3
6.70 kHz
2.2
5.60 kHz
0.1
F
Q
L.SHELF
PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –1.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +3.0 dB
75 Hz
—
1.00 kHz
4.5
4.00 kHz
1.8
12.5 kHz
—
Q
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G –4.0 dB
F 106 Hz
4
–1.0 dB
710 Hz
7
+2.0 dB
2.50 kHz
0.63
0.0 dB
10.0 kHz
—
Preset Gate Parameters
(fs = 44.1 kHz)
# Title Type
1 Gate
2 Ducking
3 A. Dr. BD
4 A. Dr. SN
GATE
DUCKING
GATE
GATE
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Range (dB)
Attack (ms)
Hold (ms)
Decay (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Range (dB)
Attack (ms)
Hold (ms)
Decay (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Range (dB)
Attack (ms)
Hold (ms)
Decay (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Range (dB)
Attack (ms)
Hold (ms)
Decay (ms)
Value
93
1.20 S
6.32 S
–11
–53
0
1.93
400
–8
–23
1
0.63
238
–26
–56
0
2.56
331
–19
–22
01V96i—Reference Manual
Preset Compressor
Parameters
(fs = 44.1 kHz)
# Title
1 Comp
2 Expand
3
Compander
(H)
4
Compander
(S)
5 A. Dr. BD
6 A. Dr. BD
7 A. Dr. SN
8 A. Dr. SN
9 A. Dr. SN
Type
COMP
EXPAND
COMPAND-H
COMPAND-S
COMP
COMPAND-H
COMP
EXPAND
COMPAND-S
Parameter
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Value
2
0
0.5
2
3.5
2
12
–23
3.5
1
–1.5
7
192
–17
2.5
8
151
–8
1.7
11
0.0
10
128
180
–24
3
9
5.5
2
58
–11
4
25
0.0
24
0.0
6
250
–8
70
–10
3.5
1
1.7
1
3.5
2
–8
2.5
60
0.0
2
250
–23
Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz)
149
#
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Title
A. Dr. Tom
Type
EXPAND
11 A. Dr. OverTop COMPAND-S
E. B. Finger
E. B. Slap
Syn. Bass
Piano1
Piano2
E. Guitar
A. Guitar
Strings1
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
Parameter
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Value
–10
2.5
5
1.5
2
238
–11
2
33
1.5
2
749
2
174
–8
3.5
7
2.5
4
261
17
1.0
hard
238
–18
3.5
7
6.0
–10
3.5
9
3.0
hard
250
–9
2.5
2
470
–12
1.7
6
4.0
hard
133
38
–3.5
54
842
–12
2
15
4.5
–20
2
2
5.0
2
749
–24
2
01V96i—Reference Manual
150
Appendix: Parameter Lists
#
20
21
22
23
Strings2
Strings3
BrassSection
Syn. Pad
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
24 SamplingPerc COMPAND-S
25
26
27
28
29
Title
Sampling BD
Sampling SN
Hip Comp
Solo Vocal1
Solo Vocal2
Type
COMP
COMP
COMPAND-S
COMP
COMP
Parameter
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Value
–20
2.5
31
2.0
1
342
–8
2.5
26
1.5
3
331 hard
354
–23
20
15
0.0
15
163
–18
4
8
8.0
2
3.5
4
35
–18
1.7
8
–2.5
18
238
–14
2
1
226
–13
2
58
2.0
1
238
–18
1.7
18
4.0
76
2.5
2
186
–12
1.5
93
1.5
4
1.35 S
–17
1.5
#
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Title
Chorus
Click Erase
Announcer
Limiter1
Limiter2
Total Comp1
Total Comp2
Type
COMP
EXPAND
COMPAND-H
COMPAND-S
COMP
COMP
COMP
Parameter
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Value
0
0.0
hard
319
–18
3.5
94
2.5
18
180
–9
3
20
–3.0
90
3.90 s
0
hard
447
–16
6
11
6.0
1
180
1
2.0
2
284
–14
2.5
1
–2.5
2
226
–33
2
–9
1.7
39
2.5
01V96i—Reference Manual
Dynamics Parameters
151
Dynamics Parameters
The dynamics effects for each channel strip include a Gate section (only for Input Channels) and a Comp section. The Gate section includes Gate and Ducking types. The Comp section includes Compressor, Expander, Compander Hard (COMP. (H)), and Compander Soft
(COMP. (S)) types.
GATE Section (Only for Input Channels)
GATE
A gate attenuates signals below a set THRESHOLD level by a specified amount (RANGE).
Parameter
THRESHOLD (dB)
RANGE (dB)
ATTACK (ms)
HOLD (ms)
DECAY (ms)
Range
–54.0 to 0.0 (541 points)
–70 to 0 (71 points)
0–120 (121 points)
Description
This determines the level at which the gate effect is applied.
This determines the amount of attenuation when the gate closes.
This determines how fast the gate opens when the signal exceeds the threshold level.
44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec
48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec
88.2kHz: 0.01 ms – 1.06 sec
96kHz: 0.01 ms – 981 ms
(160 points)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec
88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec
96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec
(160 points)
This determines how long the gate stays open once the trigger signal has fallen below the threshold.
This determines how fast the gate closes once the hold time has expired. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by
6 dB.
I/O Characteristics Time Series Analysis
Input Signal
THRESHOLD
Output Signal
ATTACK
HOLD
DECAY
RANGE
THRESHOLD
RANGE
Input Level Time Time
01V96i—Reference Manual
152
Appendix: Parameter Lists
DUCKING
Ducking is commonly used for voice-over applications in which the background music level is reduced automatically when an announcer speaks. When the KEY IN source signal level exceeds the specified THRESHOLD, the output level is attenuated by a specified amount (RANGE).
Parameter
THRESHOLD (dB)
RANGE (dB)
ATTACK (ms)
HOLD (ms)
DECAY (ms)
Range
–54.0 to 0.0 (541 points)
–70 to 0 (71 points)
0–120 (121 points)
Description
This determines the level of trigger signal (KEY IN) required to activate ducking.
This determines the amount of attenuation when ducking is activated.
This determines how soon the signal is ducked once the ducker has been triggered.
44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec
48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec
88.2kHz: 0.01 ms – 1.06 sec
96kHz: 0.01 ms – 981 ms
(160 points)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec
88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec
96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec
(160 points)
This determines how long ducking remains active once the trigger signal has fallen below the
THRESHOLD level.
This determines how soon the ducker returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.
I/O Characteristics Time Series Analysis
Input Signal
THRESHOLD
Output Signal
ATTACK
HOLD
DECAY
RANGE
THRESHOLD
RANGE
Input Level Time Time
01V96i—Reference Manual
Dynamics Parameters
153
COMP Section
COMP
The COMP processor attenuates signals above a specified THRESHOLD by a specified
RATIO. The COMP processor can also be used as a limiter, which, with a RATIO of :1, reduces the level to the threshold. This means that the limiter’s output level never actually exceeds the threshold.
Parameter Range
THRESHOLD (dB) –54.0 to 0.0 (541 points)
Description
This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compressor.
RATIO
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1,
1.7:1, 2.0:1, 2.5:1, 3.0:1,
3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, :1
(16 points)
This determines the amount of compression, that is, the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level.
ATTACK (ms)
RELEASE (ms)
OUT GAIN (dB)
KNEE
0–120 (121 points)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec
88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec
96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec
(160 points)
0.0 to +18.0 (180 points)
Hard, 1–5 (6 points)
This determines how soon the signal will be compressed once the compressor has been triggered.
This determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by
6 dB.
This sets the compressor’s output signal level.
This determines how compression is applied at the threshold. For higher knee settings, compression is applied gradually as the signal exceeds the specified threshold, creating a more natural sound.
I/O Characteristics
( KNEE=hard, OUT GAIN=0.0dB)
THRESHOLD
RATIO
Time Series Analysis (RATIO=:1)
Input signal Output Signal
ATTACK RELEASE
THRESHOLD
Input Level Time Time
01V96i—Reference Manual
154
Appendix: Parameter Lists
EXPAND
An expander attenuates signals below a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO.
Parameter Range
THRESHOLD (dB) –54.0 to 0.0 (541 points)
Description
This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the expander.
RATIO
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1,
1.7:1, 2.0:1, 2.5:1, 3.0:1,
3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, :1
(16 points)
This determines the amount of expansion.
ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points)
This determines how soon the expander returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level exceeds the threshold.
RELEASE (ms)
OUT GAIN (dB)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec
88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec
96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec
(160 points)
0.0 to +18.0 (180 points)
This determines how soon the signal is expanded once the signal level drops below the threshold.
The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.
KNEE Hard, 1–5 (6 points)
This sets the expander’s output signal level.
This determines how expansion is applied at the threshold. For higher knee settings, expansion is applied gradually as the signal falls below the specified threshold, creating a more natural sound.
I/O Characteristics
( KNEE=hard, OUT GAIN=0.0dB)
THRESHOLD
Time Series Analysis (RATIO=:1)
Input Signal Output Signal
ATTACK RELEASE
THRESHOLD
RATIO
Input Level Time Time
01V96i—Reference Manual
Dynamics Parameters
155
COMPANDER HARD (H)
COMPANDER SOFT (S)
The hard and soft companders combine the effects of the compressor, expander and limiter.
THRESHOLD
WIDTH
0dB
Input Level
The companders function differently at the following levels:
1
0 dB and higher ...................................... Functions as a limiter.
2 Exceeding the threshold........................ Functions as a compressor.
3
Below the threshold and width ............ Functions as an expander.
The hard compander has an expansion ratio of 5:1, while the soft compander has an expansion ratio of 1.5:1. The expander is essentially turned off when the width is set to maximum.
The compressor has a fixed knee setting of 2.
* The gain is automatically adjusted according to the ratio and threshold values, and can be increased by up to 18 dB.
* The OUT GAIN parameter enables you to compensate for the overall level change caused by the compression and expansion processes.
Parameter Range
THRESHOLD (dB) –54.0 to 0.0 (541 points)
Description
This determines the level at which compression is applied.
RATIO
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1,
1.7:1, 2.0:1, 2.5:1, 3.0:1,
3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, (15 points)
This determines the amount of compression.
ATTACK (ms)
RELEASE (ms)
OUT GAIN (dB)
WIDTH (dB)
0–120 (121 points)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec
88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec
96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec
(160 points)
–18.0 to 0.0 (180 points)
0–90 (91 points)
This determines how soon the signal is compressed or expanded once the compander has been triggered.
This determines how soon the compressor or expander returns to the normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below or exceeds the threshold respectively. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by
6 dB.
This sets the compander’s output signal level.
This determines how far below the threshold expansion will be applied. The expander is activated when the level drops below the threshold and width.
01V96i—Reference Manual
156
Appendix: MIDI
Appendix: MIDI
Initial
Scene #
31
32
33
34
27
28
29
30
23
24
25
26
19
20
21
22
39
40
41
42
43
35
36
37
38
15
16
17
18
11
12
13
14
07
08
09
10
01
02
03
04
05
06
Program
Change #
31
32
33
34
27
28
29
30
23
24
25
26
19
20
21
22
39
40
41
42
43
35
36
37
38
15
16
17
18
11
12
13
14
7
8
9
10
3
4
1
2
5
6
User
Scene #
Scene Memory to Program Change Table
Initial
Scene #
74
75
76
77
70
71
72
73
66
67
68
69
62
63
64
65
82
83
84
85
86
78
79
80
81
58
59
60
61
54
55
56
57
50
51
52
53
44
45
46
47
48
49
Program
Change #
74
75
76
77
70
71
72
73
66
67
68
69
62
63
64
65
82
83
84
85
86
78
79
80
81
58
59
60
61
54
55
56
57
50
51
52
53
44
45
46
47
48
49
User
Scene #
Initial
Scene #
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
97
98
99
00
93
94
95
96
87
88
89
90
91
92
Program
Change#
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
93
94
95
96
87
88
89
90
91
92
User
Scene #
01V96i—Reference Manual
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
157
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
CHANNEL1
# High
30 FADER H
31 NO ASSIGN
32 NO ASSIGN
33 FADER L
34 FADER L
35 FADER L
36 FADER L
37 FADER L
38 FADER L
39 FADER L
40 FADER L
41 FADER L
42 FADER L
43 FADER L
44 FADER L
45 FADER L
46 FADER L
47 FADER L
48 FADER L
49 FADER L
50 FADER L
51 FADER L
52 FADER L
53 FADER L
54 FADER L
55 FADER L
56 FADER L
0 NO ASSIGN
1 FADER H
2 FADER H
3 FADER H
4 FADER H
5 FADER H
6 FADER H
7 FADER H
8 FADER H
9 FADER H
10 FADER H
11 FADER H
12 FADER H
13 FADER H
14 FADER H
15 FADER H
16 FADER H
17 FADER H
18 FADER H
19 FADER H
20 FADER H
21 FADER H
22 FADER H
23 FADER H
24 FADER H
25 NO ASSIGN
26 NO ASSIGN
27 NO ASSIGN
28 NO ASSIGN
29 NO ASSIGN
Mid
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
MASTER
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
STEREO
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
# High
87 ON
88 NO ASSIGN
89 PAN
90 PAN
91 PAN
92 PAN
93 PAN
94 PAN
95 PAN
102 PAN
103 PAN
104 PAN
105 PAN
106 PAN
107 PAN
108 PAN
109 PAN
110 PAN
111 PAN
112 PAN
113 PAN
114 PAN
115 PAN
116 PAN
117 PAN
118 PAN
119 NO ASSIGN
72 ON
73 ON
74 ON
75 ON
76 ON
77 ON
78 ON
79 ON
80 ON
81 ON
82 ON
83 ON
84 ON
85 ON
86 ON
57 NO ASSIGN
58 NO ASSIGN
59 NO ASSIGN
60 NO ASSIGN
61 NO ASSIGN
62 FADER L
63 NO ASSIGN
64 ON
65 ON
66 ON
67 ON
68 ON
69 ON
70 ON
71 ON
Mid
MASTER
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
Low
STEREO
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
01V96i—Reference Manual
158
Appendix: MIDI
CHANNEL2
# High
30 ON
31 NO ASSIGN
32 NO ASSIGN
33 FADER L
34 FADER L
35 FADER L
36 FADER L
37 FADER L
38 FADER L
39 FADER L
40 FADER L
41 FADER L
42 FADER L
43 FADER L
44 FADER L
45 FADER L
46 FADER L
47 FADER L
48 FADER L
49 FADER L
50 FADER L
51 FADER L
52 FADER L
53 FADER L
54 FADER L
55 FADER L
56 FADER L
57 FADER L
58 FADER L
0 NO ASSIGN
1 FADER H
2 FADER H
3 FADER H
4 FADER H
5 FADER H
6 FADER H
7 FADER H
8 FADER H
9 FADER H
10 FADER H
11 FADER H
12 FADER H
13 FADER H
14 FADER H
15 FADER H
16 FADER H
17 FADER H
18 FADER H
19 FADER H
20 FADER H
21 FADER H
22 FADER H
23 FADER H
24 FADER H
25 FADER H
26 FADER H
27 FADER H
28 FADER H
29 NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
Mid
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
Low
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
BUS7
BUS8
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
STEREO
01V96i—Reference Manual
# High
89 PAN
90 PAN
91 PAN
92 PAN
93 PAN
94 PAN
95 PAN
102 PAN
103 PAN
104 PAN
105 PAN
106 PAN
107 PAN
108 PAN
109 PAN
110 PAN
111 ON
112 ON
113 ON
114 ON
115 ON
116 ON
117 ON
118 ON
119 NO ASSIGN
59 FADER L
60 FADER L
61 NO ASSIGN
62 BALANCE
63 NO ASSIGN
64 ON
65 ON
66 ON
67 ON
68 ON
69 ON
70 ON
71 ON
72 ON
73 ON
74 ON
75 ON
76 ON
77 ON
78 ON
79 ON
80 ON
81 ON
82 ON
83 ON
84 NO ASSIGN
85 NO ASSIGN
86 NO ASSIGN
87 NO ASSIGN
88 NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
Mid
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
ST-IN4R
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1L
ST-IN1R
ST-IN2L
ST-IN2R
ST-IN3L
ST-IN3R
ST-IN4L
Low
AUX7
AUX8
STEREO
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
CHANNEL3
# High
30 NO ASSIGN
31 NO ASSIGN
32 NO ASSIGN
33 EQ
34 EQ
35 EQ
36 EQ
37 EQ
38 EQ
39 EQ
40 EQ
41 EQ
42 EQ
43 EQ
44 EQ
45 EQ
46 EQ
47 EQ
48 EQ
49 EQ
50 EQ
51 EQ
52 EQ
53 EQ
54 EQ
55 EQ
56 EQ
57 NO ASSIGN
58 NO ASSIGN
0 NO ASSIGN
1 EQ
2 EQ
3 EQ
4 EQ
5 EQ
6 EQ
7 EQ
8 EQ
9 EQ
10 EQ
11 EQ
12 EQ
13 EQ
14 EQ
15 EQ
16 EQ
17 EQ
18 EQ
19 EQ
20 EQ
21 EQ
22 EQ
23 EQ
24 EQ
25 NO ASSIGN
26 NO ASSIGN
27 NO ASSIGN
28 NO ASSIGN
29 NO ASSIGN
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
Mid
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
159
Mid
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
# High
89 EQ
90 EQ
91 EQ
92 EQ
93 EQ
94 EQ
95 EQ
102 EQ
103 EQ
104 EQ
105 EQ
106 EQ
107 EQ
108 EQ
109 EQ
110 EQ
111 EQ
112 EQ
113 EQ
114 EQ
115 EQ
116 EQ
117 EQ
118 EQ
119 NO ASSIGN
59 NO ASSIGN
60 NO ASSIGN
61 NO ASSIGN
62 NO ASSIGN
63 NO ASSIGN
64 EQ
65 EQ
66 EQ
67 EQ
68 EQ
69 EQ
70 EQ
71 EQ
72 EQ
73 EQ
74 EQ
75 EQ
76 EQ
77 EQ
78 EQ
79 EQ
80 EQ
81 EQ
82 EQ
83 EQ
84 EQ
85 EQ
86 EQ
87 EQ
88 NO ASSIGN
Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
01V96i—Reference Manual
160
Appendix: MIDI
CHANNEL4
# High
30 NO ASSIGN
31 NO ASSIGN
32 NO ASSIGN
33 EQ
34 EQ
35 EQ
36 EQ
37 EQ
38 EQ
39 EQ
40 EQ
41 EQ
42 EQ
43 EQ
44 EQ
45 NO ASSIGN
46 NO ASSIGN
47 NO ASSIGN
48 NO ASSIGN
49 NO ASSIGN
50 NO ASSIGN
51 NO ASSIGN
52 NO ASSIGN
53 NO ASSIGN
54 NO ASSIGN
55 NO ASSIGN
56 NO ASSIGN
57 NO ASSIGN
58 NO ASSIGN
0 NO ASSIGN
1 EQ
2 EQ
3 EQ
4 EQ
5 EQ
6 EQ
7 EQ
8 EQ
9 EQ
10 EQ
11 EQ
12 EQ
13 NO ASSIGN
14 NO ASSIGN
15 NO ASSIGN
16 NO ASSIGN
17 NO ASSIGN
18 NO ASSIGN
19 NO ASSIGN
20 NO ASSIGN
21 NO ASSIGN
22 NO ASSIGN
23 NO ASSIGN
24 NO ASSIGN
25 NO ASSIGN
26 NO ASSIGN
27 NO ASSIGN
28 NO ASSIGN
29 NO ASSIGN
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
Mid
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
01V96i—Reference Manual
# High
89 EQ
90 EQ
91 EQ
92 EQ
93 EQ
94 EQ
95 EQ
102 EQ
103 EQ
104 EQ
105 EQ
106 EQ
107 NO ASSIGN
108 NO ASSIGN
109 NO ASSIGN
110 NO ASSIGN
111 NO ASSIGN
112 NO ASSIGN
113 NO ASSIGN
114 NO ASSIGN
115 NO ASSIGN
116 NO ASSIGN
117 NO ASSIGN
118 NO ASSIGN
119 NO ASSIGN
59 NO ASSIGN
60 NO ASSIGN
61 NO ASSIGN
62 NO ASSIGN
63 NO ASSIGN
64 EQ
65 EQ
66 EQ
67 EQ
68 EQ
69 EQ
70 EQ
71 EQ
72 EQ
73 EQ
74 EQ
75 EQ
76 NO ASSIGN
77 NO ASSIGN
78 NO ASSIGN
79 NO ASSIGN
80 NO ASSIGN
81 NO ASSIGN
82 NO ASSIGN
83 NO ASSIGN
84 NO ASSIGN
85 NO ASSIGN
86 NO ASSIGN
87 NO ASSIGN
88 NO ASSIGN
Mid
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
CHANNEL5
# High
30 NO ASSIGN
31 NO ASSIGN
32 NO ASSIGN
33 EQ
34 EQ
35 EQ
36 EQ
37 EQ
38 EQ
39 EQ
40 EQ
41 EQ
42 EQ
43 EQ
44 EQ
45 EQ
46 EQ
47 EQ
48 EQ
49 EQ
50 EQ
51 EQ
52 EQ
53 EQ
54 EQ
55 EQ
56 EQ
57 NO ASSIGN
58 NO ASSIGN
0 NO ASSIGN
1 EQ
2 EQ
3 EQ
4 EQ
5 EQ
6 EQ
7 EQ
8 EQ
9 EQ
10 EQ
11 EQ
12 EQ
13 EQ
14 EQ
15 EQ
16 EQ
17 EQ
18 EQ
19 EQ
20 EQ
21 EQ
22 EQ
23 EQ
24 EQ
25 NO ASSIGN
26 NO ASSIGN
27 NO ASSIGN
28 NO ASSIGN
29 NO ASSIGN
Mid Low
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
161
Mid
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
# High
89 EQ
90 EQ
91 EQ
92 EQ
93 EQ
94 EQ
95 EQ
102 EQ
103 EQ
104 EQ
105 EQ
106 EQ
107 EQ
108 EQ
109 EQ
110 EQ
111 EQ
112 EQ
113 EQ
114 EQ
115 EQ
116 EQ
117 EQ
118 EQ
119 NO ASSIGN
59 NO ASSIGN
60 NO ASSIGN
61 NO ASSIGN
62 NO ASSIGN
63 NO ASSIGN
64 EQ
65 EQ
66 EQ
67 EQ
68 EQ
69 EQ
70 EQ
71 EQ
72 EQ
73 EQ
74 EQ
75 EQ
76 EQ
77 EQ
78 EQ
79 EQ
80 EQ
81 EQ
82 EQ
83 EQ
84 EQ
85 EQ
86 EQ
87 EQ
88 NO ASSIGN
Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
01V96i—Reference Manual
162
Appendix: MIDI
CHANNEL6
# High
30 NO ASSIGN
31 NO ASSIGN
32 NO ASSIGN
33 EQ
34 EQ
35 EQ
36 EQ
37 EQ
38 EQ
39 EQ
40 EQ
41 EQ
42 EQ
43 EQ
44 EQ
45 NO ASSIGN
46 NO ASSIGN
47 NO ASSIGN
48 NO ASSIGN
49 NO ASSIGN
50 NO ASSIGN
51 NO ASSIGN
52 NO ASSIGN
53 NO ASSIGN
54 NO ASSIGN
55 NO ASSIGN
56 NO ASSIGN
57 NO ASSIGN
58 NO ASSIGN
0 NO ASSIGN
1 EQ
2 EQ
3 EQ
4 EQ
5 EQ
6 EQ
7 EQ
8 EQ
9 EQ
10 EQ
11 EQ
12 EQ
13 NO ASSIGN
14 NO ASSIGN
15 NO ASSIGN
16 NO ASSIGN
17 NO ASSIGN
18 NO ASSIGN
19 NO ASSIGN
20 NO ASSIGN
21 NO ASSIGN
22 NO ASSIGN
23 NO ASSIGN
24 NO ASSIGN
25 NO ASSIGN
26 NO ASSIGN
27 NO ASSIGN
28 NO ASSIGN
29 NO ASSIGN
Mid Low
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
01V96i—Reference Manual
# High
89 EQ
90 EQ
91 EQ
92 EQ
93 EQ
94 EQ
95 EQ
102 EQ
103 EQ
104 EQ
105 EQ
106 EQ
107 NO ASSIGN
108 NO ASSIGN
109 NO ASSIGN
110 NO ASSIGN
111 NO ASSIGN
112 NO ASSIGN
113 NO ASSIGN
114 NO ASSIGN
115 NO ASSIGN
116 NO ASSIGN
117 NO ASSIGN
118 NO ASSIGN
119 NO ASSIGN
59 NO ASSIGN
60 NO ASSIGN
61 NO ASSIGN
62 NO ASSIGN
63 NO ASSIGN
64 EQ
65 EQ
66 EQ
67 EQ
68 EQ
69 EQ
70 EQ
71 EQ
72 EQ
73 EQ
74 EQ
75 EQ
76 NO ASSIGN
77 NO ASSIGN
78 NO ASSIGN
79 NO ASSIGN
80 NO ASSIGN
81 NO ASSIGN
82 NO ASSIGN
83 NO ASSIGN
84 NO ASSIGN
85 NO ASSIGN
86 NO ASSIGN
87 NO ASSIGN
88 NO ASSIGN
Mid
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
CHANNEL7
# High
30 NO ASSIGN
31 NO ASSIGN
32 NO ASSIGN
33 EQ
34 EQ
35 EQ
36 EQ
37 EQ
38 EQ
39 EQ
40 EQ
41 EQ
42 EQ
43 EQ
44 EQ
45 EQ
46 EQ
47 EQ
48 EQ
49 EQ
50 EQ
51 EQ
52 EQ
53 EQ
54 EQ
55 EQ
56 EQ
57 NO ASSIGN
58 NO ASSIGN
0 NO ASSIGN
1 EQ
2 EQ
3 EQ
4 EQ
5 EQ
6 EQ
7 EQ
8 EQ
9 EQ
10 EQ
11 EQ
12 EQ
13 EQ
14 EQ
15 EQ
16 EQ
17 EQ
18 EQ
19 EQ
20 EQ
21 EQ
22 EQ
23 EQ
24 EQ
25 NO ASSIGN
26 NO ASSIGN
27 NO ASSIGN
28 NO ASSIGN
29 NO ASSIGN
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
Mid
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
163
Mid
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
# High
89 EQ
90 EQ
91 EQ
92 EQ
93 EQ
94 EQ
95 EQ
102 EQ
103 EQ
104 EQ
105 EQ
106 EQ
107 EQ
108 EQ
109 EQ
110 EQ
111 EQ
112 EQ
113 EQ
114 EQ
115 EQ
116 EQ
117 EQ
118 EQ
119 NO ASSIGN
59 NO ASSIGN
60 NO ASSIGN
61 NO ASSIGN
62 NO ASSIGN
63 NO ASSIGN
64 EQ
65 EQ
66 EQ
67 EQ
68 EQ
69 EQ
70 EQ
71 EQ
72 EQ
73 EQ
74 EQ
75 EQ
76 EQ
77 EQ
78 EQ
79 EQ
80 EQ
81 EQ
82 EQ
83 EQ
84 EQ
85 EQ
86 EQ
87 EQ
88 NO ASSIGN
Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
01V96i—Reference Manual
164
Appendix: MIDI
CHANNEL8
# High
30 NO ASSIGN
31 NO ASSIGN
32 NO ASSIGN
33 EQ
34 EQ
35 EQ
36 EQ
37 EQ
38 EQ
39 EQ
40 EQ
41 EQ
42 EQ
43 EQ
44 EQ
45 NO ASSIGN
46 NO ASSIGN
47 NO ASSIGN
48 NO ASSIGN
49 NO ASSIGN
50 NO ASSIGN
51 NO ASSIGN
52 NO ASSIGN
53 NO ASSIGN
54 NO ASSIGN
55 NO ASSIGN
56 NO ASSIGN
57 NO ASSIGN
58 NO ASSIGN
0 NO ASSIGN
1 EQ
2 EQ
3 EQ
4 EQ
5 EQ
6 EQ
7 EQ
8 EQ
9 EQ
10 EQ
11 EQ
12 EQ
13 NO ASSIGN
14 NO ASSIGN
15 NO ASSIGN
16 NO ASSIGN
17 NO ASSIGN
18 NO ASSIGN
19 NO ASSIGN
20 NO ASSIGN
21 NO ASSIGN
22 NO ASSIGN
23 NO ASSIGN
24 NO ASSIGN
25 NO ASSIGN
26 NO ASSIGN
27 NO ASSIGN
28 NO ASSIGN
29 NO ASSIGN
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
Mid
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
01V96i—Reference Manual
# High
89 EQ
90 EQ
91 EQ
92 EQ
93 EQ
94 EQ
95 EQ
102 EQ
103 EQ
104 EQ
105 EQ
106 EQ
107 NO ASSIGN
108 NO ASSIGN
109 NO ASSIGN
110 NO ASSIGN
111 NO ASSIGN
112 NO ASSIGN
113 NO ASSIGN
114 NO ASSIGN
115 NO ASSIGN
116 NO ASSIGN
117 NO ASSIGN
118 NO ASSIGN
119 NO ASSIGN
59 NO ASSIGN
60 NO ASSIGN
61 NO ASSIGN
62 NO ASSIGN
63 NO ASSIGN
64 EQ
65 EQ
66 EQ
67 EQ
68 EQ
69 EQ
70 EQ
71 EQ
72 EQ
73 EQ
74 EQ
75 EQ
76 NO ASSIGN
77 NO ASSIGN
78 NO ASSIGN
79 NO ASSIGN
80 NO ASSIGN
81 NO ASSIGN
82 NO ASSIGN
83 NO ASSIGN
84 NO ASSIGN
85 NO ASSIGN
86 NO ASSIGN
87 NO ASSIGN
88 NO ASSIGN
Mid
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
CHANNEL9
# High
30 NO ASSIGN
31 NO ASSIGN
32 NO ASSIGN
33 EQ
34 EQ
35 EQ
36 EQ
37 EQ
38 EQ
39 EQ
40 EQ
41 EQ
42 EQ
43 EQ
44 EQ
45 EQ
46 EQ
47 EQ
48 EQ
49 EQ
50 EQ
51 EQ
52 EQ
53 EQ
54 EQ
55 EQ
56 EQ
57 NO ASSIGN
58 NO ASSIGN
0 NO ASSIGN
1 EQ
2 EQ
3 EQ
4 EQ
5 EQ
6 EQ
7 EQ
8 EQ
9 EQ
10 EQ
11 EQ
12 EQ
13 EQ
14 EQ
15 EQ
16 EQ
17 EQ
18 EQ
19 EQ
20 EQ
21 EQ
22 EQ
23 EQ
24 EQ
25 NO ASSIGN
26 NO ASSIGN
27 NO ASSIGN
28 NO ASSIGN
29 NO ASSIGN
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
Mid
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
165
Mid
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
# High
89 EQ
90 EQ
91 EQ
92 EQ
93 EQ
94 EQ
95 EQ
102 EQ
103 EQ
104 EQ
105 EQ
106 EQ
107 EQ
108 EQ
109 EQ
110 EQ
111 EQ
112 EQ
113 EQ
114 EQ
115 EQ
116 EQ
117 EQ
118 EQ
119 NO ASSIGN
59 NO ASSIGN
60 NO ASSIGN
61 NO ASSIGN
62 NO ASSIGN
63 NO ASSIGN
64 EQ
65 EQ
66 EQ
67 EQ
68 EQ
69 EQ
70 EQ
71 EQ
72 EQ
73 EQ
74 EQ
75 EQ
76 EQ
77 EQ
78 EQ
79 EQ
80 EQ
81 EQ
82 EQ
83 EQ
84 EQ
85 EQ
86 EQ
87 EQ
88 NO ASSIGN
Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
01V96i—Reference Manual
166
Appendix: MIDI
CHANNEL10
# High
30 NO ASSIGN
31 NO ASSIGN
32 NO ASSIGN
33 EQ
34 EQ
35 EQ
36 EQ
37 EQ
38 EQ
39 EQ
40 EQ
41 EQ
42 EQ
43 EQ
44 EQ
45 NO ASSIGN
46 NO ASSIGN
47 NO ASSIGN
48 NO ASSIGN
49 NO ASSIGN
50 NO ASSIGN
51 NO ASSIGN
52 NO ASSIGN
53 NO ASSIGN
54 NO ASSIGN
55 NO ASSIGN
56 NO ASSIGN
57 NO ASSIGN
58 NO ASSIGN
0 NO ASSIGN
1 EQ
2 EQ
3 EQ
4 EQ
5 EQ
6 EQ
7 EQ
8 EQ
9 EQ
10 EQ
11 EQ
12 EQ
13 NO ASSIGN
14 NO ASSIGN
15 NO ASSIGN
16 NO ASSIGN
17 NO ASSIGN
18 NO ASSIGN
19 NO ASSIGN
20 NO ASSIGN
21 NO ASSIGN
22 NO ASSIGN
23 NO ASSIGN
24 NO ASSIGN
25 NO ASSIGN
26 NO ASSIGN
27 NO ASSIGN
28 NO ASSIGN
29 NO ASSIGN
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
Mid
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
01V96i—Reference Manual
# High
89 EQ
90 EQ
91 EQ
92 EQ
93 EQ
94 EQ
95 EQ
102 EQ
103 EQ
104 EQ
105 EQ
106 EQ
107 NO ASSIGN
108 NO ASSIGN
109 NO ASSIGN
110 NO ASSIGN
111 NO ASSIGN
112 NO ASSIGN
113 NO ASSIGN
114 NO ASSIGN
115 NO ASSIGN
116 NO ASSIGN
117 NO ASSIGN
118 NO ASSIGN
119 NO ASSIGN
59 NO ASSIGN
60 NO ASSIGN
61 NO ASSIGN
62 NO ASSIGN
63 NO ASSIGN
64 EQ
65 EQ
66 EQ
67 EQ
68 EQ
69 EQ
70 EQ
71 EQ
72 EQ
73 EQ
74 EQ
75 EQ
76 NO ASSIGN
77 NO ASSIGN
78 NO ASSIGN
79 NO ASSIGN
80 NO ASSIGN
81 NO ASSIGN
82 NO ASSIGN
83 NO ASSIGN
84 NO ASSIGN
85 NO ASSIGN
86 NO ASSIGN
87 NO ASSIGN
88 NO ASSIGN
Mid
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
CHANNEL11
# High
30 NO ASSIGN
31 NO ASSIGN
32 NO ASSIGN
33 EQ
34 EQ
35 EQ
36 EQ
37 EQ
38 EQ
39 EQ
40 EQ
41 EQ
42 EQ
43 EQ
44 EQ
45 EQ
46 EQ
47 EQ
48 EQ
49 EQ
50 EQ
51 EQ
52 EQ
53 EQ
54 EQ
55 EQ
56 EQ
57 NO ASSIGN
58 NO ASSIGN
0 NO ASSIGN
1 EQ
2 EQ
3 EQ
4 EQ
5 EQ
6 EQ
7 EQ
8 EQ
9 EQ
10 EQ
11 EQ
12 EQ
13 EQ
14 EQ
15 EQ
16 EQ
17 EQ
18 EQ
19 EQ
20 EQ
21 EQ
22 EQ
23 EQ
24 EQ
25 NO ASSIGN
26 NO ASSIGN
27 NO ASSIGN
28 NO ASSIGN
29 NO ASSIGN
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
Mid
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
167
Mid
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
# High
89 EQ
90 EQ
91 EQ
92 EQ
93 EQ
94 EQ
95 EQ
102 EQ
103 EQ
104 EQ
105 EQ
106 EQ
107 EQ
108 EQ
109 EQ
110 EQ
111 EQ
112 EQ
113 EQ
114 EQ
115 EQ
116 EQ
117 EQ
118 EQ
119 NO ASSIGN
59 NO ASSIGN
60 NO ASSIGN
61 NO ASSIGN
62 NO ASSIGN
63 NO ASSIGN
64 EQ
65 EQ
66 EQ
67 EQ
68 EQ
69 EQ
70 EQ
71 EQ
72 EQ
73 EQ
74 EQ
75 EQ
76 EQ
77 EQ
78 EQ
79 EQ
80 EQ
81 EQ
82 EQ
83 EQ
84 EQ
85 EQ
86 EQ
87 EQ
88 NO ASSIGN
Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
01V96i—Reference Manual
168
Appendix: MIDI
CHANNEL12
# High
30 NO ASSIGN
31 NO ASSIGN
32 NO ASSIGN
33 EQ
34 EQ
35 EQ
36 EQ
37 EQ
38 EQ
39 EQ
40 EQ
41 EQ
42 EQ
43 EQ
44 EQ
45 EQ
46 EQ
47 EQ
48 EQ
49 NO ASSIGN
50 NO ASSIGN
51 NO ASSIGN
52 NO ASSIGN
53 NO ASSIGN
54 NO ASSIGN
55 NO ASSIGN
56 NO ASSIGN
57 NO ASSIGN
58 NO ASSIGN
0 NO ASSIGN
1 EQ
2 EQ
3 EQ
4 EQ
5 EQ
6 EQ
7 EQ
8 EQ
9 EQ
10 EQ
11 EQ
12 EQ
13 EQ
14 EQ
15 EQ
16 EQ
17 NO ASSIGN
18 NO ASSIGN
19 NO ASSIGN
20 NO ASSIGN
21 NO ASSIGN
22 NO ASSIGN
23 NO ASSIGN
24 NO ASSIGN
25 NO ASSIGN
26 NO ASSIGN
27 NO ASSIGN
28 NO ASSIGN
29 NO ASSIGN
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
Mid
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1L
ST-IN1R
ST-IN2L
ST-IN2R
ST-IN3L
ST-IN3R
ST-IN4L
ST-IN4R
Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1L
ST-IN1R
ST-IN2L
ST-IN2R
ST-IN3L
ST-IN3R
ST-IN4L
ST-IN4R
01V96i—Reference Manual
# High
89 EQ
90 EQ
91 EQ
92 EQ
93 EQ
94 EQ
95 EQ
102 EQ
103 EQ
104 EQ
105 EQ
106 EQ
107 NO ASSIGN
108 NO ASSIGN
109 NO ASSIGN
110 NO ASSIGN
111 NO ASSIGN
112 NO ASSIGN
113 NO ASSIGN
114 NO ASSIGN
115 NO ASSIGN
116 NO ASSIGN
117 NO ASSIGN
118 NO ASSIGN
119 NO ASSIGN
59 NO ASSIGN
60 NO ASSIGN
61 NO ASSIGN
62 NO ASSIGN
63 NO ASSIGN
64 EQ
65 EQ
66 EQ
67 EQ
68 EQ
69 EQ
70 EQ
71 EQ
72 EQ
73 EQ
74 EQ
75 EQ
76 NO ASSIGN
77 NO ASSIGN
78 NO ASSIGN
79 NO ASSIGN
80 NO ASSIGN
81 NO ASSIGN
82 NO ASSIGN
83 NO ASSIGN
84 NO ASSIGN
85 NO ASSIGN
86 NO ASSIGN
87 NO ASSIGN
88 NO ASSIGN
Mid
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
CHANNEL13
# High
30 NO ASSIGN
31 NO ASSIGN
32 NO ASSIGN
33 SURROUND
34 SURROUND
35 SURROUND
36 SURROUND
37 SURROUND
38 SURROUND
39 SURROUND
40 SURROUND
41 SURROUND
42 SURROUND
43 SURROUND
44 SURROUND
45 SURROUND
46 SURROUND
47 SURROUND
48 SURROUND
49 SURROUND
50 SURROUND
51 SURROUND
52 SURROUND
53 SURROUND
54 SURROUND
55 SURROUND
56 SURROUND
57 NO ASSIGN
58 NO ASSIGN
0 NO ASSIGN
1 SURROUND
2 SURROUND
3 SURROUND
4 SURROUND
5 SURROUND
6 SURROUND
7 SURROUND
8 SURROUND
9 SURROUND
10 SURROUND
11 SURROUND
12 SURROUND
13 SURROUND
14 SURROUND
15 SURROUND
16 SURROUND
17 SURROUND
18 SURROUND
19 SURROUND
20 SURROUND
21 SURROUND
22 SURROUND
23 SURROUND
24 SURROUND
25 NO ASSIGN
26 NO ASSIGN
27 NO ASSIGN
28 NO ASSIGN
29 NO ASSIGN
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
Mid
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
169
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
# High
89 EQ
90 EQ
91 EQ
92 EQ
93 EQ
94 EQ
95 EQ
102 EQ
103 EQ
104 EQ
105 EQ
106 EQ
107 EQ
108 EQ
109 EQ
110 EQ
111 EQ
112 EQ
113 EQ
114 EQ
115 EQ
116 EQ
117 EQ
118 EQ
119 NO ASSIGN
59 NO ASSIGN
60 NO ASSIGN
61 NO ASSIGN
62 NO ASSIGN
63 NO ASSIGN
64 SURROUND
65 SURROUND
66 SURROUND
67 SURROUND
68 SURROUND
69 SURROUND
70 SURROUND
71 SURROUND
72 SURROUND
73 SURROUND
74 SURROUND
75 SURROUND
76 SURROUND
77 SURROUND
78 SURROUND
79 SURROUND
80 SURROUND
81 SURROUND
82 SURROUND
83 SURROUND
84 SURROUND
85 SURROUND
86 SURROUND
87 SURROUND
88 NO ASSIGN
Mid Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
01V96i—Reference Manual
170
Appendix: MIDI
CHANNEL14
# High
30 NO ASSIGN
31 NO ASSIGN
32 NO ASSIGN
33 SURROUND
34 SURROUND
35 SURROUND
36 SURROUND
37 SURROUND
38 SURROUND
39 SURROUND
40 SURROUND
41 SURROUND
42 SURROUND
43 SURROUND
44 SURROUND
45 SURROUND
46 SURROUND
47 SURROUND
48 SURROUND
49 NO ASSIGN
50 NO ASSIGN
51 NO ASSIGN
52 NO ASSIGN
53 NO ASSIGN
54 NO ASSIGN
55 NO ASSIGN
56 NO ASSIGN
57 NO ASSIGN
58 NO ASSIGN
0 NO ASSIGN
1 SURROUND
2 SURROUND
3 SURROUND
4 SURROUND
5 SURROUND
6 SURROUND
7 SURROUND
8 SURROUND
9 SURROUND
10 SURROUND
11 SURROUND
12 SURROUND
13 SURROUND
14 SURROUND
15 SURROUND
16 SURROUND
17 NO ASSIGN
18 NO ASSIGN
19 NO ASSIGN
20 NO ASSIGN
21 NO ASSIGN
22 NO ASSIGN
23 NO ASSIGN
24 NO ASSIGN
25 NO ASSIGN
26 NO ASSIGN
27 NO ASSIGN
28 NO ASSIGN
29 NO ASSIGN
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
Mid
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1L
ST-IN1R
ST-IN2L
ST-IN2R
ST-IN3L
ST-IN3R
ST-IN4L
ST-IN4R
Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1L
ST-IN1R
ST-IN2L
ST-IN2R
ST-IN3L
ST-IN3R
ST-IN4L
ST-IN4R
01V96i—Reference Manual
# High
89 EQ
90 EQ
91 EQ
92 EQ
93 EQ
94 EQ
95 EQ
102 EQ
103 EQ
104 EQ
105 EQ
106 EQ
107 NO ASSIGN
108 NO ASSIGN
109 NO ASSIGN
110 NO ASSIGN
111 NO ASSIGN
112 NO ASSIGN
113 NO ASSIGN
114 NO ASSIGN
115 NO ASSIGN
116 NO ASSIGN
117 NO ASSIGN
118 NO ASSIGN
119 NO ASSIGN
59 NO ASSIGN
60 NO ASSIGN
61 NO ASSIGN
62 NO ASSIGN
63 NO ASSIGN
64 SURROUND
65 SURROUND
66 SURROUND
67 SURROUND
68 SURROUND
69 SURROUND
70 SURROUND
71 SURROUND
72 SURROUND
73 SURROUND
74 SURROUND
75 SURROUND
76 SURROUND
77 SURROUND
78 SURROUND
79 SURROUND
80 NO ASSIGN
81 NO ASSIGN
82 NO ASSIGN
83 NO ASSIGN
84 NO ASSIGN
85 NO ASSIGN
86 NO ASSIGN
87 NO ASSIGN
88 NO ASSIGN
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
Mid Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1L
ST-IN1R
ST-IN2L
ST-IN2R
ST-IN3L
ST-IN3R
ST-IN4L
ST-IN4R
CHANNEL15
# High
30 NO ASSIGN
31 NO ASSIGN
32 NO ASSIGN
33 SURROUND
34 SURROUND
35 SURROUND
36 SURROUND
37 SURROUND
38 SURROUND
39 SURROUND
40 SURROUND
41 SURROUND
42 SURROUND
43 SURROUND
44 SURROUND
45 SURROUND
46 SURROUND
47 SURROUND
48 SURROUND
49 SURROUND
50 SURROUND
51 SURROUND
52 SURROUND
53 SURROUND
54 SURROUND
55 SURROUND
56 SURROUND
57 NO ASSIGN
58 NO ASSIGN
0 NO ASSIGN
1 SURROUND
2 SURROUND
3 SURROUND
4 SURROUND
5 SURROUND
6 SURROUND
7 SURROUND
8 SURROUND
9 SURROUND
10 SURROUND
11 SURROUND
12 SURROUND
13 SURROUND
14 SURROUND
15 SURROUND
16 SURROUND
17 SURROUND
18 SURROUND
19 SURROUND
20 SURROUND
21 SURROUND
22 SURROUND
23 SURROUND
24 SURROUND
25 NO ASSIGN
26 NO ASSIGN
27 NO ASSIGN
28 NO ASSIGN
29 NO ASSIGN
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
Mid
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
171
Mid
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
# High
89 SURROUND
90 SURROUND
91 SURROUND
92 SURROUND
93 SURROUND
94 SURROUND
95 SURROUND
102 SURROUND
103 SURROUND
104 SURROUND
105 SURROUND
106 SURROUND
107 SURROUND
108 SURROUND
109 SURROUND
110 SURROUND
111 SURROUND
112 SURROUND
113 SURROUND
114 SURROUND
115 SURROUND
116 SURROUND
117 SURROUND
118 SURROUND
119 NO ASSIGN
59 NO ASSIGN
60 NO ASSIGN
61 NO ASSIGN
62 NO ASSIGN
63 NO ASSIGN
64 SURROUND
65 SURROUND
66 SURROUND
67 SURROUND
68 SURROUND
69 SURROUND
70 SURROUND
71 SURROUND
72 SURROUND
73 SURROUND
74 SURROUND
75 SURROUND
76 SURROUND
77 SURROUND
78 SURROUND
79 SURROUND
80 SURROUND
81 SURROUND
82 SURROUND
83 SURROUND
84 SURROUND
85 SURROUND
86 SURROUND
87 SURROUND
88 NO ASSIGN
Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
01V96i—Reference Manual
172
Appendix: MIDI
CHANNEL16
# High
30 NO ASSIGN
31 NO ASSIGN
32 NO ASSIGN
33 SURROUND
34 SURROUND
35 SURROUND
36 SURROUND
37 SURROUND
38 SURROUND
39 SURROUND
40 SURROUND
41 SURROUND
42 SURROUND
43 SURROUND
44 SURROUND
45 SURROUND
46 SURROUND
47 SURROUND
48 SURROUND
49 NO ASSIGN
50 NO ASSIGN
51 NO ASSIGN
52 NO ASSIGN
53 NO ASSIGN
54 NO ASSIGN
55 NO ASSIGN
56 NO ASSIGN
57 NO ASSIGN
58 NO ASSIGN
0 NO ASSIGN
1 SURROUND
2 SURROUND
3 SURROUND
4 SURROUND
5 SURROUND
6 SURROUND
7 SURROUND
8 SURROUND
9 SURROUND
10 SURROUND
11 SURROUND
12 SURROUND
13 SURROUND
14 SURROUND
15 SURROUND
16 SURROUND
17 NO ASSIGN
18 NO ASSIGN
19 NO ASSIGN
20 NO ASSIGN
21 NO ASSIGN
22 NO ASSIGN
23 NO ASSIGN
24 NO ASSIGN
25 NO ASSIGN
26 NO ASSIGN
27 NO ASSIGN
28 NO ASSIGN
29 NO ASSIGN
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
Mid
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1L
ST-IN1R
ST-IN2L
ST-IN2R
ST-IN3L
ST-IN3R
ST-IN4L
ST-IN4R
Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1L
ST-IN1R
ST-IN2L
ST-IN2R
ST-IN3L
ST-IN3R
ST-IN4L
ST-IN4R
01V96i—Reference Manual
# High
89 SURROUND
90 SURROUND
91 SURROUND
92 SURROUND
93 SURROUND
94 SURROUND
95 SURROUND
102 SURROUND
103 SURROUND
104 SURROUND
105 SURROUND
106 SURROUND
107 SURROUND
108 SURROUND
109 SURROUND
110 SURROUND
111 NO ASSIGN
112 NO ASSIGN
113 NO ASSIGN
114 NO ASSIGN
115 NO ASSIGN
116 NO ASSIGN
117 NO ASSIGN
118 NO ASSIGN
119 NO ASSIGN
59 NO ASSIGN
60 NO ASSIGN
61 NO ASSIGN
62 NO ASSIGN
63 NO ASSIGN
64 SURROUND
65 SURROUND
66 SURROUND
67 SURROUND
68 SURROUND
69 SURROUND
70 SURROUND
71 SURROUND
72 SURROUND
73 SURROUND
74 SURROUND
75 SURROUND
76 SURROUND
77 SURROUND
78 SURROUND
79 SURROUND
80 NO ASSIGN
81 NO ASSIGN
82 NO ASSIGN
83 NO ASSIGN
84 NO ASSIGN
85 NO ASSIGN
86 NO ASSIGN
87 NO ASSIGN
88 NO ASSIGN
Mid
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1L
ST-IN1R
ST-IN2L
ST-IN2R
ST-IN3L
ST-IN3R
ST-IN4L
ST-IN4R
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1L
ST-IN1R
ST-IN2L
ST-IN2R
ST-IN3L
ST-IN3R
ST-IN4L
ST-IN4R
MIDI Data Format
173
MIDI Data Format
1. DATA FORMAT
1.1 CHANNEL MESSAGE
Command
8n NOTE OFF
9n NOTE ON
Bn CONTROL CHANGE
Cn PROGRAM CHANGE rx/tx rx rx function
Control the internal effects
Control the internal effects rx/tx Control parameters rx/tx Switch scene memories
1.2 SYSTEM COMMON MESSAGE
Command
F1 MIDI TIME CODE QUARTER
FRAME rx/tx rx MTC function
1.3 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE
Command
F8 TIMING CLOCK
FE ACTIVE SENSING
FF RESET rx/tx rx rx rx function
MIDI clock
Check MIDI cable connections
Clear running status
1.4 EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE
1.4.1 Real Time System Exclusive
Command
F0 7F dd 06 … F7 MMC
COMMAND rx/tx tx
F0 7F dd 07 … F7 MMC RESPONSE rx
F0 7F dd 01 … F7 MIDI TIME CODE rx function
MMC command
MMC response
MTC full message
1.4.2 System Exclusive Message
1.4.2.1 Bulk Dump
Command
F0 43 0n 7E … F7 BULK DUMP
DATA
F0 43 2n 7E … F7 BULK DUMP
REQUEST rx/tx rx/tx rx/tx function
BULK DUMP DATA
BULK DUMP REQUEST
‘V’
‘U’
‘C’
‘P’
‘Q’
‘Y’
‘G’
‘E’
‘H’
‘R’
‘O’
‘N’
The following data types of bulk dump are used on the 01V96i.
‘m’
‘S’
‘L’
Data name tx/rx function tx/rx Scene Memory & Request
(compressed data) tx/rx Setup Memory & Request tx/rx User defined MIDI remote &
Request tx/rx User defined keys & Request tx/rx User assignable layer & Request tx/rx Control change table & Request tx/rx Program change table & Request tx/rx Equalizer library & Request tx/rx Compressor library & Request tx/rx Gate library & Request tx/rx Effect library & Request tx/rx Channel library & Request tx/rx Input patch library & Request tx/rx Output patch library & Request tx/rx Plug-in Effect Card Data & Request
1.4.2.2 PARAMTER CHANGE
Command
F0 43 1n 3E 0D … F7 RARAMETER
CHANGE
F0 43 3n 3E 0D … F7 PARAMETER
REQUEST
F0 43 1n 3E 7F … F7 PARAMETER
CHANGE
F0 43 3n 3E 7F … F7 PARAMETER
REQUEST rx/tx function rx/tx 01V96i-specific parameter change rx/tx 01V96i-specific parameter change rx/tx General purpose digital mixer parameter change rx/tx General purpose digital mixer parameter request
1 (01)
2 (02)
3 (03)
4 (04)
16 (10)
17 (11)
18 (12)
19 (13)
20 (14)
32 (20)
33 (21)
34 (22)
The following data types of parameter change are used by the 01V96i.
Type (HEX) tx/rx tx/rx Edit buffer tx/rx Patch data function tx/rx Setup data tx/rx Backup data tx/rx Function (recall, store, title, clear) rx Function (pair, copy) rx Function (effect) tx/rx Sort table tx/rx Function (attribute, link) rx Key remote tx/rx Remote meter tx/rx Remote time counter
* ‘tx’ indicates that the data can be transmitted from the 01V96i, and
‘rx’ indicates that the data can be received by the 01V96i.
2. Format Details
2.1 NOTE OFF (8n)
Reception
If [OTHER ECHO] is ON, these message are echoed from MIDI OUT.
If the [Rx CH] matches, these messages are received and used to control effects.
STATUS
DATA
1000nnnn 8n Note off message
0nnnnnnn nn Note number
0vvvvvvv vv Velocity(ignored)
2.2 NOTE ON (9n)
Reception
If [OTHER ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed from MIDI OUT.
If the [Rx CH] matches, these messages are received and used to control effects.
STATUS
DATA
1001nnnn 9n Note on message
0nnnnnnn nn Note number
0vvvvvvv vv Velocity(1-127:on, 0:off)
2.3 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn)
Reception
If [Control Change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed from MIDI OUT.
If [TABLE] is selected, these message are received if [Control Change Rx] is ON, and will control parameters according to the [Control assign table] settings.
The parameters that can be set are defined in the Control Change Assign Parameter List.
If [NRPN] is selected, these messages are received if [Control Change Rx] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches, and will control the parameter that is specified by the four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and Data Entry control number (06h, 26h). Parameter settings are defined in the Control Change Assign Parameter List.
Transmission
If [TABLE] is selected, operating a parameter specified in the [Control assign table] will cause these messages to be transmitted if [Control Change Tx] is ON.
The parameters that can be specified are defined in the Control Change Assign
Parameter List.
If [NRPN] is selected, operating a specified parameter will cause data to be transmitted on the [Tx CH] if [Control Change Tx] is ON, using the four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and Data Entry control number (06h,
26h). Parameter settings are defined in the Control Change Assign Parameter
List.
This data cannot be transmitted via control change to Studio Manager since there is no guarantee that the contents of the tables will match. (Parameter
Change messages will always be used.)
01V96i—Reference Manual
174
Appendix: MIDI
If [TABLE] is selected
STATUS
DATA
1011nnnn Bn Control change
0nnnnnnn nn Control number (0-95, 102-119)
0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127)
If [NRPN] is selected
STATUS
DATA
STATUS
DATA
STATUS
DATA
STATUS
DATA
1011nnnn Bn Control change
01100010 62 NRPN LSB
0vvvvvvv vv LSB of parameter number
1011nnnn Bn Control change *1
01100011 63 NRPN MSB
0vvvvvvv vv MSB of parameter number
1011nnnn Bn Control change *1
00000110 06 MSB of data entry
0vvvvvvv vv MSB of parameter data
1011nnnn Bn Control change *1
00100110 26 LSB of data entry
0vvvvvvv vv LSB of parameter data
*1) The second and subsequent STATUS need not be added during transmission. Reception must be implemented so that reception occurs whether or not STATUS is present.
2.4 PROGRAM CHANGE (Cn)
Reception
If [Program Change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed from MIDI
OUT.
If [Program Change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches, these messages will be received. However if [OMNI] is ON, they will be received regardless of the channel. When a message is received, a Scene Memory will be recalled according to the settings of the [Program Change Table].
Transmission
If [Program Change TX] is ON, this message is transmitted according to the settings of the [Program Change Table] on the [Tx CH] channel when a scene memory is recalled.
If the recalled scene has been assigned to more than one program number, the lowest-numbered program number will be transmitted. Transmission to Studio
Manager using Program Change messages will not be performed since there is no guarantee that the contents of the tables will match. (Parameter Changes will always be used.)
STATUS
DATA
1100nnnn Cn Program change
0nnnnnnn nn Program number (0-127)
2.5 TIMING CLOCK (F8)
Reception
It is used to control effects. This message is transmitted 24 times per quarter note.
STATUS 11111000 F8 Timing clock
2.6 ACTIVE SENSING (FE)
Reception
Once this message has been received, the failure to receive any message for an interval of 400 ms or longer will cause MIDI transmission to be initialized, such as by clearing the Running Status.
STATUS 11111110 FE Active sensing
2.7 SYSTEM RESET (FF)
Reception
When this message is received, MIDI communications will be cleared, e.g., by clearing the Running Status.
STATUS 11111111 FF System reset
2.8 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE (F0)
2.8.1 MIDI MACHINE CONTROL (MMC)
These messages are transmitted when the Machine Control section of the
01V96i is operated. For details, refer to the MMC specification.
2.8.2 BULK DUMP
This message sends or receives the contents of various memories stored within the 01V96i.
The basic format is as follows.
For DUMP DATA
F0 43 0n 7E cc cc <Model ID> tt mm mm [Data …] cs F7
For DUMP REQUEST
F0 43 2n 7E <Model ID> tt mm mm F7 n cs
Device Number cc cc mm mm
DATA COUNT (the number of bytes that follow this, ending before the checksum)
4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 33 Model ID tt DATA TYPE
DATA NUMBER
CHECK SUM
A unique header (Model ID) is used to determine whether the device is a
01V96i.
CHECK SUM is obtained by adding the bytes that follow BYTE COUNT
(LOW) and end before CHECK SUM, taking the binary compliment of this sum, and then setting bit 7 to 0.
CHECK SUM = (-sum)&0x7F
Reception
This message is received if [Bulk RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS.
When a bulk dump is received, it is immediately written into the specified memory.
When a bulk dump request is received, a bulk dump is immediately transmitted.
Transmission
This message is transmitted on the [Tx CH] by key operations in the
[MIDI]-[BULK DUMP] screen.
A bulk dump is transmitted on the [Rx CH] in response to a bulk dump request.
The data area is handled by converting seven words of 8-bit data into eight words of 7-bit data.
Conversion from actual data into bulk data d[0~6]: actual data b[0~7]: bulk data b[0] = 0; for( I=0; I<7; I++){ if( d[I]&0x80){ b[0] |= 1<<(6-I);
} b[I+1] = d[I]&0x7F;
}
Restoration from bulk data into actual data d[0~6]: actual data b[0~7]: bulk data for( I=0; I<7; I++){ b[0] <<= 1; d[I] = b[I+1]+(0x80&b[0]);
}
2.8.2.1 Scene memory bulk dump format (compress)
The 01V96i can transmit and receive scene memories in compressed form.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch data count = ch * 128 + cl
COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01101101 6D ‘m’
0mmmmmmm mh m=0-99, 256, 8192(Scene0-99, EDIT
BUFFER, UNDO)
01V96i—Reference Manual
MIDI Data Format
175
0mmmmmmm ml Receive is effective 1-99, 256, 8192
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt total block number(minimum number is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block number)
DATA 0ddddddd ds Scene data of block[bb]
: :
0ddddddd de
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.2.2 Scene memory bulk dump request format
(compress)
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the scene number that is being requested. If this is 256, the data of the Edit Buffer will be bulk-dumped.
If this is 8192, the data of the Undo Buffer will be bulk-dumped.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01101101 6D ‘m’
0mmmmmmm mh m=0-99, 256, 8192(Scene0-99, EDIT
BUFFER, UNDO)
EOX
0mmmmmmm ml
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.2.3 Setup memory bulk dump format
Of the setup memory of the 01V96i, this bulk-dumps data other than the User
Define MIDI Remote, User Defined Keys, User Assignable Layer, Control
Change Table, and Program Change Table.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch data count = ch * 128 + cl
COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01010011 53 ‘S’
00000010 02
00000000 00 No.256 = Current
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt total block number(minimum number is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block number)
DATA 0ddddddd ds Setup data of block[bb]
: :
0ddddddd de
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.2.4 Setup memory bulk dump request format
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01010011 53 ‘S’
EOX
00000010 02
00000000 00 No.256 = Current
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.2.5 User Defined MIDI Remote bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases) change if the same bank is being used.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch data count = ch * 128 + cl
COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01001100 4C ‘L’
00000000 00
0bbbbbbb bb b=0-3(bank no.1-4)
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt total block number(minimum number is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block number)
DATA 0ddddddd ds User define layer data of block[bb]
: :
0ddddddd de
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.2.6 User Defined MIDI Remote bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01001100 4C ‘L’
EOX
00000000 00
0bbbbbbb bb b=0-3(bank no.1-4)
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.2.7 User Defined Keys bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases) change if the same bank is being used.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch data count = ch * 128 + cl
COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
01V96i—Reference Manual
176
Appendix: MIDI
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01010110 56 ‘V’
00000000 00
0bbbbbbb bb b=0-7(bank no.A-H)
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt total block number(minimum number is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block number)
DATA 0ddddddd ds User define key data of block[bb]
: :
0ddddddd de
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.2.8 User Defined Keys bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01010110 56 ‘V’
EOX
00000000 00
0bbbbbbb bb b=0-7(bank no.A-H)
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.2.9 User Assignable Layer bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases) change if the same bank is being used.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch data count = ch * 128 + cl
COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01010101 55 ‘U’
00000000 00
0bbbbbbb bb b=0-3(bank no.1-4)
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt total block number(minimum number is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block number)
DATA 0ddddddd ds User assignable layer data of block[bb]
: :
0ddddddd de
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.2.10 User Assignable Layer bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01010101 55 ‘U’
EOX
00000000 00
0bbbbbbb bb b=0-3(bank no.1-4)
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.2.11 Control change table bulk dump format
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch data count = ch * 128 + cl
COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01000011 43 ‘C’
00000010 02
00000000 00 No.256 = Current
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt total block number(minimum number is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block number)
DATA 0ddddddd ds Control change table data of block[bb]
: :
0ddddddd de
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.2.12 Control change table bulk dump request format
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
EOX
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01000011 43 ‘C’
00000010 02
00000000 00 No.256 = Current
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
01V96i—Reference Manual
MIDI Data Format
177
2.8.2.13 Program change table bulk dump format
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch data count = ch * 128 + cl
COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01010000 50 ‘P’
00000010 02
00000000 00 No.256 = Current
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt total block number(minimum number is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block number)
DATA 0ddddddd ds Program change table data of block[bb]
: :
0ddddddd de
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.2.14 Program change table bulk dump request format
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01010000 50 ‘P’
EOX
00000010 02
00000000 00 No.256 = Current
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.2.15 Equalizer library bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
0:Library no.1 – 199:Library no.200,
256:CH1 – 287:CH32, 288:STEREO 1L – 295:STEREO 4R, 384:BUS1 –
391:BUS8, 512:AUX1 – 519:AUX8, 768:STEREO, 8192:UNDO
256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer.
For reception by the 01V96i, only the user area is valid. (40-199, 256-)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch data count = ch * 128 + cl
COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01010001 51 ‘Q’
0mmmmmmm mh 0-199(EQ Library no.1-200),
0mmmmmmm ml 256-(Channel current data)
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt total block number(minimum number is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block number)
DATA 0ddddddd ds EQ Library data of block[bb]
: :
0ddddddd de
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.2.16 Equalizer library bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. (See above)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01010001 51 ‘Q’
EOX
0mmmmmmm mh 0-199(EQ Library no.1-200),
0mmmmmmm ml 256-(Channel current data)
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.2.17 Compressor library bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
0:Library no.1 – 127:Library no.128,
256:CH1 – 287:CH32, 384:BUS1 – 391:BUS8, 512:AUX1 – 519:AUX8,
768:STEREO, 8192:UNDO
256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer.
For reception by the 01V96i, only the user area is valid. (36-127, 256-)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch data count = ch * 128 + cl
COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01011001 59 ‘Y’
0mmmmmmm mh 0-127(COMP Library no.1-128),
0mmmmmmm ml 256-(Channel current data)
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt total block number(minimum number is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block number)
DATA 0ddddddd ds COMP Library data of block[bb]
: :
0ddddddd de
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
01V96i—Reference Manual
178
Appendix: MIDI
2.8.2.18 Compressor library bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. (See above)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01011001 59 ‘Y’
EOX
0mmmmmmm mh 0-127(COMP Library no.1-128),
0mmmmmmm ml 256-(Channel current data)
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.2.19 Gate library bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
0:Library no.1 – 127:Library no.128, 256:CH1 – 287:CH32, 8192:UNDO
256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer.
For reception by the 01V96i, only the user area is valid. (4-127, 256-)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch data count = ch * 128 + cl
COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01000111 47 ‘G’
0mmmmmmm mh 0-127(GATE Library no.1-128),
0mmmmmmm ml 256-351(Channel current data)
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt total block number(minimum number is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block number)
DATA 0ddddddd ds GATE Library data of block[bb]
: :
0ddddddd de
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.2.20 Gate library bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. (See above)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01000111 47 ‘G’
EOX
0mmmmmmm mh 0-127(GATE Library no.1-128),
0mmmmmmm ml 256-351(Channel current data)
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.2.21 Effect library bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
0:Library no.1 – 127:Library no.128, 256:EFFECT1 – 259:EFFECT4, 8192:UN-
DO
256-259 are the data for the corresponding area of the edit buffer.
For reception by the 01V96i, only the user area is valid. (xx-127, 256-259, 8192)
(xx varies with the firmware version.)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch data count = ch * 128 + cl
COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01000101 45 ‘E’
0mmmmmmm mh 0-127(Effect Library no.1-128),
0mmmmmmm ml 256-259(Effect1-4 current)
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt total block number(minimum number is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block number)
DATA 0ddddddd ds Effect Library data of block[bb]
: :
0ddddddd de
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.2.22 Effect library bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. (See above)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01000101 45 ‘E’
EOX
0mmmmmmm mh 0-127(Effect Library no.1-128),
0mmmmmmm ml 256-259(Effect1-4 current)
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.2.23 Channel library bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
0:Library no.0 – 128:Library no.128,
256:CH1 – 287:CH32, 288:STEREO 1L – 295:STEREO 4R, 384:BUS1 –
391:BUS8, 512:AUX1 – 519:AUX8, 768:STEREO, 8192:UNDO
256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer.
For reception by the 01V96i, only the user area is valid. (2-128, 256-)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch data count = ch * 128 + cl
COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01V96i—Reference Manual
MIDI Data Format
179
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01001000 48 ‘H’
0mmmmmmm mh 0-128(Channel Library no.0-128),
0mmmmmmm ml 256-(Current data)
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt total block number(minimum number is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block number)
DATA 0ddddddd ds Channel Library data of block[bb]
: :
0ddddddd de
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.2.24 Channel library bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. (See above)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01001000 48 ‘H’
EOX
0mmmmmmm mh 0-128(Channel Library no.0-128),
0mmmmmmm ml 256-(Current data)
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.2.25 Input patch library bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
0:Library no.0 – 32:Library no.32, 256:current input patch data, 8192:UNDO
For reception by the 01V96i, only the user area is valid. (1-32, 256, 8192)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch data count = ch * 128 + cl
COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01010010 52 ‘R’
0mmmmmmm mh 0-32(Input patch Library no.0-32),
0mmmmmmm ml 256(Current data)
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt total block number(minimum number is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block number)
DATA 0ddddddd ds Input patch Library data of block[bb]
: :
0ddddddd de
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.2.26 Input patch library bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. (See above)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01010010 52 ‘R’
EOX
0mmmmmmm mh 0-32(Input patch Library no.0-32),
0mmmmmmm ml 256(Current data)
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.2.27 Output patch library bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
0:Library no.0 – 32:Library no.32, 256:current output patch data, 8192:UNDO
For reception by the 01V96i, only the user area is valid. (1-32, 256)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch data count = ch * 128 + cl
COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01001111 4F ‘O’
0mmmmmmm mh 0-32(Output patch Library no.0-32),
0mmmmmmm ml 256(Current data)
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt total block number(minimum number is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block number)
DATA 0ddddddd ds Output patch Library data of block[bb]
: :
0ddddddd de
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.2.28 Output patch library bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. (See above)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01001111 4F ‘O’
EOX
0mmmmmmm mh 0-32(Output patch Library no.0-32),
0mmmmmmm ml 256(Current data)
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
01V96i—Reference Manual
180
Appendix: MIDI
2.8.2.29 Plug-in effect card bulk dump format
The second byte of the DATA NAME indicates the slot number.
0:SLOT 1
The data is not received if the Developer ID and Product ID are different than the card that is installed in the slot.
The data is not transmitted if a valid plug-in effect card is not installed.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch data count = ch * 128 + cl
COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01001110 4E ‘N’
0mmmmmmm mh m=0(SLOT 1)
0mmmmmmm ml
BLOCK INFO. 0bbbbbbb bh current block number(0-total block number)
0bbbbbbb bl
0ttttttt th total block number(minimum number is 0)
0ttttttt tl
0000iiii 0i Developer id (High)
0000iiii 0i Developer id (Low)
0000jjjj 0j Product id (High)
0000jjjj 0j Product id (Low)
DATA 0ddddddd ds Plug-in Effect card memory data of block[bb]
: :
0ddddddd de
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.2.30 Plug-in effect card bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the slot number. (See above)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
FORMAT No.
01111110 7E Universal bulk dump
01001100 4C ‘L’
01001101 4D ‘M’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00100000 20 ‘ ’
00111000 38 ‘8’
01000011 43 ‘C’
00111001 39 ‘9’
00110011 33 ‘3’
DATA NAME 01001110 4E ‘N’
0mmmmmmm mh m=0(SLOT 1)
EOX
0mmmmmmm ml
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.3 PARAMETER CHANGE
2.8.3.1 Basic behavior
Reception
If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.
If [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the Device Number included in the SUB STATUS, these messages are received. A specific parameter is controlled when a Parameter Change is received. When a Parameter Request is received, the current value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a
Parameter Change with the Device Number set to [Rx CH].
Transmission
If [Parameter change TX] is ON and you operate a parameter for which Control
Change transmission is not enabled, a parameter change will be transmitted with [Tx CH] as the Device Number.
As a response to a Parameter Request, a parameter change will be transmitted with [Rx CH] as the Device Number.
2.8.3.1.1 Parameter change basic format
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
00011010 1A 01V96i
ADDRESS
DATA *)
0ttttttt tt Data type
0eeeeeee ee Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
0ddddddd dd data
EOX
: :
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
*) For parameters with a data size of 2 or more, data for that size will be transmitted.
2.8.3.1.2 Parameter Change basic format (Universal format)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01111111 7F Universal
ADDRESS
DATA *)
0ttttttt tt Data type
0eeeeeee ee Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
0ddddddd dd data
EOX
: :
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
*) For parameters with a data size of 2 or more, data for that size will be transmitted.
2.8.3.1.3 Parameter request basic format
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
00011010 1A 01V96i
ADDRESS
EOX
0ttttttt tt Data type
0eeeeeee ee Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.3.1.4 Parameter request basic format (Universal format)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01111111 7F Universal
ADDRESS
EOX
0ttttttt tt Data type
0eeeeeee ee Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
01V96i—Reference Manual
MIDI Data Format
181
2.8.3.1.5 Parameter Address
Consult your dealer for parameter address details.
2.8.3.2 Parameter change (Edit buffer)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01111111 7F Universal
ADDRESS
DATA
00000001 01 Edit Buffer
0eeeeeee ee Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
0ddddddd dd data
EOX
: :
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.3.3 Parameter request (Edit buffer)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01111111 7F Universal
ADDRESS
EOX
00000001 01 Edit Buffer
0eeeeeee ee Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.3.4 Parameter change (Patch data)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
00011010 1A 01V96i
ADDRESS
DATA
00000010 02 Patch data
0eeeeeee ee Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
0ddddddd dd data
EOX
: :
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.3.5 Parameter request (Patch data)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
00011010 1A 01V96i
ADDRESS
EOX
00000010 02 Patch data
0eeeeeee ee Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.3.6 Parameter change (Setup memory)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
00011010 1A 01V96i
ADDRESS
DATA
00000011 03 Setup data
0eeeeeee ee Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
0ddddddd dd data
EOX
: :
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.3.7 Parameter request (Setup memory)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
00011010 1A 01V96i
ADDRESS
EOX
00000011 03 Setup data
0eeeeeee ee Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.3.8 Parameter change (Backup memory)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
00011010 1A 01V96i
ADDRESS
DATA
00000100 04 Backup data
0eeeeeee ee Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
0ddddddd dd data
EOX
: :
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.3.9 Parameter request (Backup memory)
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
00011010 1A 01V96i
ADDRESS
EOX
00000100 04 Backup data
0eeeeeee ee Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.3.10 Parameter change (Function call: Library store / recall)
Reception
When this is received, the specified memory/library will be stored/recalled. If this is received from Studio Manager or Cascade Link, the operation will be executed, and then the result of execution will be transmitted as a Parameter Response.
Transmission
If [Parameter change Tx] is ON, and you store or recall a memory/library for which Program Change transmission is not valid, this message will be transmitted with the Device Number set to the [Tx CH].
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01111111 7F Universal
ADDRESS 00010000 10 Function call
00ffffff ff function
0mmmmmmm mh number High
0mmmmmmm ml number Low
DATA
EOX
0ccccccc ch channel High
0ccccccc cl channel Low
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
01V96i—Reference Manual
182
Appendix: MIDI function
SCENE RECALL
EQ LIB RECALL
GATE LIB RECALL
COMP LIB RECALL
EFF LIB RECALL
CHANNEL LIB RECALL
INPATCH LIB RECALL
OUTPATCH LIB RECALL
0x00
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x06
0x07
0x08 number channel*1)
0-99, 8192 256
1-200, 8192 0-513
1-128, 8192 0-95
1-128, 8192 0-513
1-128, 8192 0-3
0-128, 8192 0-513
0-32, 8192
0-32, 8192
256
256 tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx
SCENE STORE
EQ LIB STORE
GATE LIB STORE
COMP LIB STORE
EFF LIB STORE
CHANNEL LIB STORE
INPATCH LIB STORE
OUTPATCH LIB STORE
0x20
0x21
0x22
0x23
0x24
0x26
0x27
0x28
1-99
41-200
5-128
37-128 xx(*2)-128
1-128
1-32
1-32
256, 16383 tx/rx
0-513, 16383 tx/rx
0-31, 16383 tx/rx
0-513, 16383 tx/rx
0-3, 16383 tx/rx
0-513, 16383 tx/rx
256, 16383 tx/rx
256, 16383 tx/rx
*1) 0:CH1 – 31:CH32, 32:ST-IN1L - 39:ST-IN4R, 128:BUS1 – 135:BUS8,
256:AUX1 – 263:AUX8, 512:STEREO
Use 256 if the recall destination or store source is a single data item.
Effect is 0:Effect 1–3:Effect 4
If the store destination is 16383 (0x3FFF), this indicates that the library data has been changed by a external cause (such as bulk reception)
(only transmitted by the 01V96i)
*2) Varies with the firmware version.
2.8.3.11 Parameter change (Function call: title)
Reception
When this is received, the title of the specified memory/library will be changed.
If this is received from Studio Manager or Cascade Link, the operation will be executed, and then the result of execution will be transmitted as a parameter response.
Transmission
In response to a request, this is transmitted with the device number set to the
[Tx CH].
When the title is changed on the 01V96i, this message will be transmitted with the device number set to [Tx CH].
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01111111 7F Universal
ADDRESS 00010000 10 Function call
0100ffff 4f title
0mmmmmmm mh number High
0mmmmmmm ml number Low
DATA
EOX
0ddddddd dd title 1
: : :
0ddddddd dd title x(depend on the library)
11110111 F7 End of exclusive function
SCENE LIB TITLE
EQ LIB TITLE
GATE LIB TITLE
COMP LIB TITLE
EFF LIB TITLE
CHANNEL LIB TITLE
INPATCH LIB TITLE
OUTPATCH LIB TITLE
0x40
0x41
0x42
0x43
0x44
0x46
0x47
0x48 number
0-99,256(0:response only)
1-200(1-40:response only)
1-128(1-4:response only)
1-128(1-36:response only)
1-128(1-xx(*1):response only)
0-128(0:response only)
0-32(0:response only)
0-32(0:response only)
*1) Varies with the firmware version.
16
16
16
16 size
16
16
16
16
2.8.3.12 Parameter request (Function call: title)
Reception
When this is received, a parameter change will be transmitted with the device number set to [Rx CH].
Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01111111 7F Universal
ADDRESS
EOX
00010000 10 Function call
0100ffff 4f title
0mmmmmmm mh number High
0mmmmmmm ml number Low
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.3.13 Parameter change (Function call: Scene/Library
Clear)
Reception
When this is received, the specified memory/library will be cleared. If this is received from Studio Manager or Cascade Link, the operation will be executed, and then the result of execution will be transmitted as a parameter response.
Transmission
When a memory or library is cleared on the 01V96i, this message will be transmitted with the device number set to [Tx CH].
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01111111 7F Universal
ADDRESS
EOX
00010000 10 Function call
0110ffff 6f clear function
0mmmmmmm mh number High
0mmmmmmm ml number Low
11110111 F7 End of exclusive function
SCENE LIB CLEAR
EQ LIB CLEAR
GATE LIB CLEAR
COMP LIB CLEAR
EFF LIB CLEAR
CHANNEL LIB CLEAR
INPATCH LIB CLEAR
OUTPATCH LIB CLEAR
0x60
0x61
0x62
0x63
0x64
0x66
0x67
0x68
*1) Varies with the firmware version.
number
1-99
41-200
5-128
37-128 xx-128 (*1)
1-128
1-32
1-32
2.8.3.14 Parameter change (Function call: attribute)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, the attribute of the specified memory/library will be changed.
Transmission
In response to a request, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the
[Rx CH].
If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted without change.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01111111 7F Universal
ADDRESS
DATA
00010100 14 Function call
0000ffff 0f attribute
0mmmmmmm mh number High
0mmmmmmm ml number Low
0ttttttt tt attribute(protect:0x0001, normal:0x0000)
EOX
0ttttttt tt
11110111 F7 End of exclusive function
SCENE LIB ATTRIBUTE 0x00 number
0-99(0:response only)
2.8.3.15 Parameter request (Function call: attribute)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the
[Rx CH].
01V96i—Reference Manual
MIDI Data Format
183
Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01111111 7F Universal
ADDRESS
EOX
00010100 14 Function call
0000ffff 0f attribute
0mmmmmmm mh number High
0mmmmmmm ml number Low
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.3.16 Parameter change (Function call: link)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, the patch link data of the specified scene will be modified.
Transmission
In response to a request, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the
[Rx CH].
If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted without change.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01111111 7F Universal
ADDRESS
DATA
00010100 14 Function call
0010ffff 2f link
0mmmmmmm mh number High
0mmmmmmm ml number Low
0iiiiiii ih inpatch
EOX
0iiiiiii il
0ooooooo oh outpatch
0ooooooo ol
11110111 F7 End of exclusive function
SCENE LIB LINK 0x20 number
0-99(0:response only)
2.8.3.17 Parameter request (Function call: link)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the
[Rx CH].
Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01111111 7F Universal
ADDRESS
EOX
00010100 14 Function call
0010ffff 2f link
0mmmmmmm mh number High
0mmmmmmm ml number Low
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.3.18 Parameter change (Function call: pair, copy)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, pairing will be enabled/disabled for the specified channel.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID 00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
DATA
EOX
01111111 7F Universal
00010001 11 Function call Pair
0000ffff 0f function
0sssssss sh Source channel H
0sssssss sl Source channel L
0ddddddd dh Destination channel H
0ddddddd dl Destination channel L
11110111 F7 End of exclusive function
PAIR ON with COPY
PAIR ON with RESET BOTH
PAIR OFF
0x00
0x01
0x02
*1)
*1)
*1) channel
*1) 0:CH1 – 31:CH32, 128:BUS1 – 135:BUS8, 256:AUX1 – 263:AUX8,
512:STEREO
Effect is 0:Effect 1–3:Effect 4
• In the case of PAIR, you must specify channels for which pairing is possible.
• In the case of PAIR ON with COPY, you must specify Source Channel as the copy source, and Destination Channel as the copy destination.
2.8.3.19 Parameter change (Function call Event: Effect )
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS.
This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, the corresponding effect’s function activates (depending on the effect type).
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01111111 7F Universal
ADDRESS 00010010 12 Function call Effect Event
0000ffff 0f function
DATA
EOX
00000000 00
0ppppppp pp Release:0, Press:1
00000000 00
0eeeeeee ee Effect number (0:Effect1 - 3:Effect4)
11110111 F7 End of exclusive function
Freeze Play button
Freeze Record button
0x00
0x01 channel
0:Effect1-3:Effect4
0:Effect1-3:Effect4
• This does not activate when the effect type is different.
2.8.3.20 Parameter change (Sort Table)
When scene memory sort is executed on the 01V96i, the memory sort table will be transmitted to Studio Manager.
Studio Manager will sort the memories according to this data.
If Studio Manager performs a scene memory sort, it will transmit this data to the 01V96i.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
00011010 1A 01V96i
ADDRESS
DATA
00010011 13 Library sort table
0000ffff 0f Library type
0ddddddd ds Data
EOX
: :
0ddddddd de Data
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
8-7 conversion is performed on the data area in the same way as for bulk.
01V96i—Reference Manual
184
Appendix: MIDI
2.8.3.21 Parameter request (Sort Table)
When the 01V96i receives this data, it will transmit Sort Table Data.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
00011010 1A 01V96i
ADDRESS
EOX
00010011 13 Library sort table
0000ffff 0f Library type
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.3.22 Parameter change (Key remote)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS.
This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, the same processing that is executed when the key specified by Address is pressed (released).
Transmission
If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without change.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
00011010 1A 01V96i
ADDRESS
DATA
EOX
00100000 20 Key remote
0kkkkkkk kk Key address H
0kkkkkkk kk Key address M
0kkkkkkk kk Key address L
0ppppppp pp Release:0, Press:1
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.3.23 Parameter change (Remote Meter)
When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Remote meter, the specified meter information is transmitted every 50 msec for 10 seconds. When you want to transmit meter information continuously, a Request must be transmitted continuously within every 10 seconds.
Reception
This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
Transmission
When transmission has been enabled by a Request, the parameter specified by
Address will be transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel at 50 msec intervals for a duration of 10 seconds.
Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again, or if the
PORT setting is changed.
If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without change.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
00011010 1A 01V96i
ADDRESS
DATA
00100001 21 Remote meter
0mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS UL
0mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS LU
0mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS LL
0ddddddd dd Data1 H
0ddddddd dd Data1 L
EOX
: :
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
* Meter data uses the unmodified DECAY value of the DSP. The interpretation of the data will depend on the parameter.
2.8.3.24 Parameter request (Remote Meter)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, data of the specified address is transmitted on the [Rx
CH] at intervals of 50 msec as a rule (although this may not be the case if the port is being used by other communication), for a period of 10 seconds.
If Address UL= 0x7F is received, transmission of all meter data will be halted immediately. (disable)
Transmission
If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without change.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
00011010 1A 01V96i
ADDRESS 00100001 21 Remote meter
0mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS UL
0mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS LU
0mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS LL
EOX
0ccccccc ch Count H
0ccccccc cl Count L
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.3.25 Parameter change (Remote Time Counter)
When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Remote Time Counter, the Time Counter data is transmitted every 50 msec for 10 seconds. When you want to transmit Counter information continuously, a Request must be transmitted within every 10 seconds.
Reception
This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
Transmission
When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request, the Time Counter information is transmitted on [RxCH] channel every 50 msec for 10 seconds.
Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again, or if the
PORT setting is changed.
If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without change.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
00011010 1A 01V96i
ADDRESS 00100010 22 Remote Time counter
0000tttt 0t 0:Time code, 1:Measure.Beat.Clock
0ddddddd dd Hour / Measure H
0ddddddd dd Minute / Measure L
DATA
EOX
0ddddddd dd Second / Beat
0ddddddd dd Frame / Clock
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.3.26 Parameter request (Remote Time Counter)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, the Time Counter information is transmitted on the [Rx
CH] channel every 50 msec for 10 seconds.
When the second byte of Address is received on 0x7F, data transmission will be halted immediately. (disable)
Transmission
If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without change.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E MODEL ID (digital mixer)
00011010 1A 01V96i
ADDRESS
EOX
00100010 22 Remote Time counter
0ddddddd dd 0:Transmission request,
0x7F:Transmission stop request
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
01V96i—Reference Manual
YAMAHA [Digital Mixing Console-Internal Parameters]
Model: 01V96i
Date: 26 Aug. 2011
MIDI Implementation Chart
Version: 1.0
Function...
Transmitted Recognized Remarks
Basic
Channel
Mode
Default
Changed
Default
Messages
Altered
Note
Number
True Voice
Velocity
After
Pitch Bend
Note On
Note Off
Key’s
Ch’s
1–16
1–16
X
X
**************
X
**************
X
X
X
X
X
1–16
1–16
OMNI off/OMNI on
X
X
0–127
X
X
X
X
O
O
Memorized
Memorized
Effect Control
Control
Change
0-95,102-119 O O Assignable
Prog
Change
Aux
Messages
:True#
System Exclusive
System
Common
System
Real Time
:Clock
:Commands
Notes
:Song Pos
:Song Sel
:Tune
:Local ON/OFF
:All Notes OFF
:Active Sense
:Reset
Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY
0–127
**************
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
X
X
X
O
O
0–127
0–99
O
X
X
X
Assignable
*1
Effect Control
MTC quarter frame message is recognized.
*1: Bulk Dump/Request, Parameter Change/Request, and MMC.
For MIDI Remote, ALL messages can be transmitted.
Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO
O: Yes
X: No
Yamaha Pro Audio Global Web Site http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/
C.S.G., Pro Audio Division
© 2011 Yamaha Corporation
110IP-A0
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project